Solid-State Memory Camcorder: PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF

4-587-873-19 (1)
GB
Solid-State Memory Camcorder

Operating Instructions
PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF

Software Version 6.1
© 2015 Sony Corporation

0002
Table of Contents
1. Overview Obtaining Location Information (GPS).............................59 ALL Files..........................................................................129
Scene Files.......................................................................130
Name and Function of Parts............................................... 3 5. Network Configuration
Reference Files................................................................131
Screen Display...................................................................13 Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder...........60 Lens Files.........................................................................132
Supplied Lens and Viewfinder..........................................20 Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN..........................61 Gamma Files...................................................................133
2. Preparation Connecting to the Internet...............................................65
Transferring Files...............................................................69 9. Connecting External Devices
Preparing a Power Supply................................................23
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio.......................73 Connecting a Remote Control Unit.................................134
Attaching a Viewfinder.....................................................24
Streaming High Quality Video..........................................74 Connecting an External Monitor.....................................138
Using the Camcorder for the First Time...........................26
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control.............................................75 Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer.....................139
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens....................................27
Configuring from the Web Menu.....................................77 Configuring a Shooting and Recording System.............141
Preparing the Audio Input System...................................29
Supported Network Functions and Operating Recording External Input Signals...................................143
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices....................30
Limitations................................................................82
Handling SxS Memory Cards............................................31 10. Maintenance and Inspection
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data...........33 6. Clip Operations Maintenance...................................................................144
Using a Media Adaptor.....................................................34 Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen.......................83 Error/Warning System....................................................145
Thumbnail Menu..............................................................89
3. Settings and Adjustments 11. Appendix
Format Settings.................................................................35 7. Menu Display and Settings Messages Displayed During Operation..........................148
Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range............................38 Setup Menu Organization.................................................90 Items Saved in User Data................................................154
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance.............39 Basic Setup Menu Operations...........................................92 Special Recording Support by Recording Format..........164
Setting the Electronic Shutter...........................................41 Editing the User Menu......................................................94 Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings...................................165
Setting Auto Iris................................................................42 User Menu (Factory Default Configuration).....................96 Media Recording and Playback Time.............................166
Adjusting the Focus..........................................................44 Operation Menu................................................................97 Usage Precautions...........................................................167
Adjusting the Audio Level................................................45 Paint Menu......................................................................106 Specifications..................................................................169
Setting Time Data.............................................................47 Maintenance Menu.........................................................111
File Menu.........................................................................122
4. Shooting
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches.................124
Basic Operations................................................................49
Advanced Operations........................................................51 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Proxy Data.........................................................................55 User Configuration Data..................................................127
Planning Metadata...........................................................57 User Files.........................................................................128
0003 1. Overview
Name and Function of Parts

“Preparing a Power Supply” (page 23)
Power Supply [Note]
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the BP-GL95B
6 Battery Pack.
6. Camera adaptor connector

Enables connection of a CA-TX70/FB70 HD Camera
Adaptor. To connect an adaptor, remove the
cover.
1 2 3 4 5
1. LIGHT (video light) switch 2. POWER switch
Determines how a video light connected to the Turns the main power supply on () and off ().
LIGHT connector (page 4) is turned on and off.
3. DC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR type,
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light
4-pin, male)
is in the on position, the video light is turned
on automatically while the camcorder is 4. DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector
recording. (4-pin, female)
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off Supplies power for the CBK-DL1 USB Adaptor and
manually, using its own switch. HDVF-L750 Viewfinder (maximum 1.8 A).
[Note] 5. Battery attachment shoe
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache Rec
Attach a BP-GL95B Battery Pack. Alternatively, you
mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before operation
to start recording is carried out (or while data is being stored can attach an AC-DN10A AC Adaptor to operate
in memory). the camcorder from an AC power supply.
0004 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
ˎˎ When connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to

Accessory Attachments this connector, power off the camcorder first. Controls Near the Lens
8. Lens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens
1 2 3 45 locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of
the two projections. This fixes the lens mount,
preventing it from coming loose.
9. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
(page 24)
10. Attachment for optional microphone holder
(page 29) and attachment for supplied
9 guard (page 61) 3
6 11. LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female)
10 (page 30)
7
12. Shoulder pad (page 30)
11 8 13. Lens cable clamp
Clamps the lens cable.
14. MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector
(XLR type, 5-pin, female) 4
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
1 5
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
15. LENS connector (12-pin) (page 27)
2 6
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first. 1. REC START (recording start) button
16. Tripod mount Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the recording. The operation is the same as that of the
tripod adaptor (optional). VTR button on the lens.
1. Wireless receiver insertion slot (page 29) 7. VF (viewfinder) connectors (26-pin, 2. SHUTTER switch
rectangular and 20-pin, round) 17. Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
“Attaching a Wireless Receiver” (page 29)
(page 27) Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to
The analog interface connector (20-pin) is for SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
2. Shoulder strap fitting (page 30) connection of an HDVF series viewfinder, and 18. Lens locking lever (page 27) mode setting. When this switch is operated, the
the digital interface connector (26-pin) is for new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for
3. Accessory shoe (page 30) connection of a CBK-VF02 HD viewfinder. 19. Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing the lens locking lever up. about three seconds.
4. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever Connect a viewfinder connection cable to the
(page 25) connector compatible with the viewfinder being When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 41)
used. protection from dust.
5. Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
(page 24) [Notes]
ˎˎ Do not connect viewfinders to both connectors at the
6. Viewfinder attachment shoe (page 24) same time.
[Note] 5. AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black

If Flash Band Reduce is On, setting the SHUTTER switch balance adjustment) switch LCD Monitor Side (1)
to ON turns off the Flash Band Reduce function and the
FBR indicator disappears from the viewfinder screen.
Activates the automatic white/black balance
Subsequently, setting the SHUTTER switch to OFF turns adjustment functions.
on the Flash Band Reduce function and the FBR indicator
reappears on the viewfinder screen.
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (page 6) is set
1 2 3 4 5
3. FILTER knob to A or B, the white balance setting is stored
Switches between four ND filters built into this in the corresponding memory. If the WHITE
camcorder. BAL switch is set to PRST, the automatic
white balance adjustment function does not
operate.
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance
automatically.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when
the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) function is
operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once
When this selector is used, the new setting more during the automatic white balance
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and
seconds. the white balance setting returns to the original
setting.
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once
FILTER knob ND filter more during the automatic black balance
setting
adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and
1 CLEAR the black balance setting returns to the original
2 1/4 ND (attenuates light to setting.
approximately 1/4)
6. MIC (microphone) LEVEL knob (page 45)
3 1/16 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/16)
4 1/64 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/64)
6 789
You can change a Maintenance menu setting so
10 12 11 12
that different white balance settings can be stored
for different FILTER knob positions. This allows you
to automatically obtain optimum white balance
for the current shooting conditions in linkage with 13
the filter selection.
“Adjusting the White Balance” (page 39) 14
4. MENU knob (page 92)
1. ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches 5. MONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches 8. OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic Examples:
You can assign a function using Operation By means of combinations of the two switches, contrast control) switch ˎˎ When a single color dominates the subject, such as sky,
sea, ground, or flowers.
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu you can select audio that you want to hear Switches the video signal output from the camera
ˎˎ When the subject is under a light source of extremely
(page 124). through the built-in speaker or earphones. module, between the following two. high or extremely low color temperature.
The ASSIGN. 1/3 switches are provided with an BARS: Output the color bar signal.
indicator to show whether a function is assigned When the lower switch is set to CH-1/2 CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW
to the switch (ON) or not (OFF). this is selected, you can switch DCC1) on and function takes an unacceptably long time or only
Upper switch Audio output
off. results in an inadequate effect, then execute the
2. ONLINE button CH-1/CH-3 Channel 1 audio 1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright
When network client mode or the streaming AWB function.
MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject,
function is assigned to this button, press and hold (stereo)a) objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The 10. Switch cover
until the indicator is lit orange. Then, press the DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore
CH-2/CH-4 Channel 2 audio Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF switch
much of the lost detail. It is particularly effective for
button again, turning the indicator blue, to enable shooting in the following cases. or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch.
network client mode or the streaming function. ˎˎ Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
To exit the enabled function, press and hold the When the lower switch is set to CH-3/4 ˎˎ Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
11. MENU ON/OFF switch
button until the indicator turns off. through a window To use the switch, open the cover.
Upper switch Audio output
The button can also be used as an assignable ˎˎ Any high contrast scene This switch is used to display the menu on the
CH-1/CH-3 Channel 3 audio viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each
switch when assigned with functions other than 9. WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch
MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen
those above (page 125). Controls adjustment of the white balance.
(stereo)a) is turned on and off.
3. ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment) PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset
CH-2/CH-4 Channel 4 audio The function of this switch is the same as that
knob value (the factory default setting: 3200K). Use
of the MENU button in the thumbnail screen
Controls the volume of the warning tone that a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack, this setting when you have no time to adjust
operations section.
is output via the built-in speaker or optional you can hear the audio in stereo. (Maintenance >Audio the white balance.
>Headphone Out in the setup menu must be set to A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment [Note]
earphones. When the knob is turned to the Stereo.) It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing the
minimum position, no sound can be heard. settings already stored in A or B. Push the
cover.
However, if Maintenance >Audio >Min Alarm 6. ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch AUTO W/B BAL switch (page 5) to the
Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set], the alarm You can assign a function using Operation WHITE position to automatically adjust the 12. MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /ESCAPE switch
tone is audible even when this volume control is at >Assignable Switch in the setup menu white balance and save the adjustment To use the switch, open the cover.
the minimum position. (page 124). settings in memory A or memory B. This switch has different functions depending on
Off is assigned to these switches when the B (ATW1)):When this switch is set to B and whether or not a menu is displayed.
camcorder is shipped from the factory. Operation >White Setting >White Switch
ALARM This is a momentary type switch. Each press of the is set to [ATW] in the setup menu, ATW is Use the switch in the following way when the
switch turns the function assigned to this switch activated. menu is displayed.
Minimum Maximum on or off. You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this
when ATW is in use. position after a setting is changed in the
4. MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment) 7. GAIN switch When this switch is adjusted, the new setting setup menu displays the message to confirm
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match whether the previous settings are canceled.
knob appears on the viewfinder screen for about
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gain three seconds. Pushing this switch up to this position again
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
values corresponding to the L, M, and H settings 1) ATW (Auto Tracing White balance): The white balance cancels the previous settings.
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
can be selected using Operation >Gain Switch in of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for Pushing this switch up to this position before a
or earphones. When the knob is turned to the
the setup menu (page 101) (factory settings are varying lighting conditions.
minimum position, no sound can be heard. setting is changed in the setup menu or after a
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB). [Note] setting change is canceled in the setup menu
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate colors
displays the message to confirm whether the
appears on the viewfinder screen for about three using ATW, depending on the lighting and subject
conditions. setting is reset to the initial value. Pushing
seconds.
this switch up to this position again resets the 1. Built-in speaker

settings to the initial value. LCD Monitor Side (2) The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, during recording, and playback sound during
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened. playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
Each time the switch is pushed to this position, reinforce visual warnings (page 145).
the page returns to one stage higher in the If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack,
hierarchy. [2] the speaker output is suppressed automatically.
[1] 1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode,
Use the switch in the following way when the 7 8 9 video and audio signals input to the camcorder are
output after passing through internal electric circuits only.
menu is not displayed. This can be used to check input signals.
CANCEL/PRST: Each time this switch is pushed
upward, a window to confirm the menu 2. LCD monitor
settings and status of the camcorder appears Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining
on the viewfinder screen (page 13). The media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.
window consists of several pages, which are
switched each time the switch is pushed
10 11 12 It also allows you to check camera and playback
pictures (page 13).
upward. You can adjust the position and angle of the LCD
ESCAPE: To clear the page, push this switch down monitor.
to the OFF position.
13. UTILITY SD card slot 1
Insert an SD card for saving camcorder settings.
14. ACCESS indicator 2
Lights up orange when the SD card is being
accessed.
3
4
5 3. WARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
(page 145).
6 4. ACCESS indicator
Lights up in blue when data is written to or read
from the recording media.
13 14 15 16 17 5. Audio control section (page 9)
6. Thumbnail screen operation section (page 9)
7. F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The playback speed changes in the order
×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the button.
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in
the reverse direction.
8. PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator Display indication Description Switch settings RESET/RETURN button
Press this button to view playback video images Video without Only the video appears. operation
using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor. superimposed DISPLAY switch: Reset user bits dataa) to
The indicator lights during playback. information (MONI) U-BIT 00:00:00:00.
Press this button again during playback to pause, PRESET/REGEN/
Status display Counter indications,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator CLOCK switch:
(STATUS) warnings, audio levels, and
flashes at a rate of once per second. (page 13) similar information appear. PRESET
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during No video image appears. F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
playback or pause starts high speed playback in switch:
the forward or reverse direction. The EXPAND button function will be supported in SET
9. F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator a future upgrade.
a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the
This plays back at high speed in the forward 14. HOLD (display hold) button media, those bits which can be used to record useful
direction. The playback speed changes in the order information for the user such as scene number, shooting
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time
place, etc.
×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the button. data displayed in the LCD monitor. (The timecode
The indicator lights during high-speed playback in generator continues running.) Pressing this button “Setting Time Data” (page 47)
the forward direction. again releases the hold. This button returns to the previous screen when
10. PREV (previous) button For details about the time data display, see page 13. pressed during thumbnail screen display or
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip. essence mark thumbnail screen display.
If you press this together with the F REV button, 15. RESET/RETURN button 16. DISPLAY switch
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded Resets the value shown in the time data display in
This cycles the data displayed in the time data
clip on the recording media. the LCD monitor. According to the settings of the
display in the LCD monitor through the sequence
If you press this button twice in rapid succession, PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch (page 9) and the
COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (page 13).
the jump is to the first frame of the preceding F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (page 9), this button
COUNTER: Display recording/playback duration
clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no resets the display as follows.
counter.
preceding clips exist). Switch settings RESET/RETURN button TC: Display timecode.
operation U-BIT: Display user bits data.
11. STOP button
Press this button to stop playback. DISPLAY switch: Reset counter to 00:00:00:00.
17. BRIGHT (brightness) button
COUNTER
12. NEXT button Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor
DISPLAY switch: Reset timecode to backlight.
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip. TC 00:00:00:00.
If you press this together with the F FWD button, Each press of the button selects the next setting in
PRESET/REGEN/
the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded the order shown in the following table. If you press
CLOCK switch:
clip on the recording media. the button with the LCD monitor off, the LCD
PRESET
backlight comes on in the H state.
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
13. DISP SEL (display selection)/EXPAND
switch: Setting LCD monitor backlight
(expand function) button
SET H High (select this to view the LCD
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows. monitor outdoors in the daytime)
M Brightness between H and L
Display indication Description
L Low (select this to view the LCD
Video with The LCD monitor displays monitor indoors or outdoors at night)
superimposed the same text information as
information (CHAR) the viewfinder. OFF Off (the display is also off)
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio control section 8. ESSENCE MARK button 12. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
By pressing this button when a thumbnail display 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
is on the screen, you can view the following Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 thumbnail displays of the essence-marked frames audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
of the selected clip, depending on the item FRONT: Audio input signals from the microphone
selected in a list displayed on the screen. connected to the MIC IN connector
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
essence marks. connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
Rec Start: Thumbnail display of frames marked connectors
with Rec Start marks and of the first frames of WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
clips (when the first frames are not marked portable tuner if it is attached
with Rec Start marks).
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 1.
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 2.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3 to
8 9 1011 12 Shot Mark 9.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that
defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the
1. Thumbnail indicator F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of
selection options in the list are displayed by the
This lights when the thumbnail screen is displayed. whether the camcorder is recording. Use this
defined names.
setting when synchronizing the timecode with
2. THUMBNAIL button 9. SHIFT button
external timecode.
Press this button to display the thumbnail
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits. Use this in combination with other buttons.
screen (page 83) and to carry out a thumbnail
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording.
operation. 10. PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch
Use this setting to have a consecutive
Press once more to return to the original display. Selects the type of timecode to record.
timecode on the recording media.
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
3. SET button and arrow buttons “Setting the Timecode” (page 47) REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
existing timecode recorded on the media.
settings, and for thumbnail screen operations. “Setting the User Bits” (page 47)
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
When the menu is displayed, press this button to
6. LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel RUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN
select an item or to confirm the setting change.
1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs mode.
4. MENU button Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the
Each press of this button turns the setup menu 1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
display on and off. and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are set to the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder
The function of this button is the same as that of MANUAL. operates in F-RUN mode.
the MENU ON/OFF switch.
7. AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio channel 3/4 11. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
5. F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording adjustment method selection) switches adjustment method selection) switches
run) switch Select the audio level adjustment method for Select the audio level adjustment method for
Selects the operating mode of the internal audio channels 3 and 4. audio channels 1 and 2.
timecode generator. The operating mode is set AUTO: Automatic adjustment AUTO: Automatic adjustment
as explained below, depending on the position of MANUAL: Manual adjustment MANUAL: Manual adjustment
the switch.
000
“Obtaining Location Information (GPS)” (page 59) 9. Network connector

Handle and Memory Card Slot Side [Note]
Connects to a network via a wired LAN connection
Do not grasp this part of the camcorder when the GPS using a LAN cable (sold separately).
SxS memory card slots (page 31) function is in use. [CAUTION]
ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral
3. PC connector device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this
654 3 2 1 Used to put this camcorder into USB connection port.
mode and use it as an external storage device Follow the instructions for this port.
for a computer. When a computer is connected ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral
device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction
to this connector, every memory card inserted
due to radiation noise.
in the camcorder is recognized as a drive on the
computer. “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65)
4. External device connector 10. HDMI connector

Connect to a PSZ-HA/HB/HC series Portable Connect an HDMI device, such as a monitor or
Storage HDD (option), PSZ-SA25 Portable Storage recording unit, to output HD or SD HDMI video
SSD (option), a general-purpose external USB and audio signals.
HDD, or USB flash drive to copy clips from the
11. GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
7 recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
camcorder to USB media.
connector (BNC type)
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
[Note] camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode
8 This connector should be used only for connecting the type
is to be synchronized with external equipment.
9 of devices above. It cannot be used for connecting a USB
hub or other devices. The supported reference signals vary depending
on the current system frequency as shown in the
5. USB wireless LAN module connector following table.
Connect to an IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN System frequency Supported reference signals
Adaptor (option), CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor 59.94i 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
10 11 12 Kit (option), or modem (option) to enable 59.94P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
communications with wireless LAN devices and 50i 1080/50i, 576/50i
networks. 50P 1080/50i, 576/50i
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61) 29.97P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 65) 25P 1080/50i, 576/50i
23.98P 1080/23.98PsF
6. PROXY SD card slot (page 55)
Insert an SD card for recording proxy data.
12. TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC type)
7. To apply an external lock to the timecode of the
13 14 (NFC) mark
A built-in NFC antenna is provided. camcorder, input the reference timecode.
8. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select) “Setting the Timecode” (page 47)
1. ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches Off is assigned to these switches when the
You can assign a function using Operation camcorder is shipped from the factory. button
13. VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card
2. GPS module Outputs video signals for monitoring.
(page 125). slots A and B, press this button to select the card
Contains a built-in GPS module. you want to use (page 31).
000
14. TC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC 1. TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
type) Tally Indicator and Connector Section Lights up during recording. It will not light if the
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to TALLY switch is set to OFF. It also flashes when the
the timecode of this camcorder, connect this WARNING indicator operates. The tally indicator on
connector to the external VTR’s timecode input 1 the front of the viewfinder and the REC indication
connector. on the viewfinder screen light or flash in the same
2 manner.
“Error/Warning System” (page 145)
2. TALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function.
3. EARPHONE jack (stereo, mini jack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
and playback sound during playback. When an
alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo using
Maintenance >Audio >Headphone Out in the
setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Use monaural (2-pole) or stereo (3-pole) type earphones.
Use of other earphones may damage the camcorder.
ˎˎ Use earphones with 16 Ω impedance.
4. AUDIO IN selector switch

Select the audio source you connect to the AUDIO
IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
3 4 5 6 LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or other
external audio signal source
AES/EBU: When connecting an external digital
audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone.
5. +48V/OFF (+48V external power source on/
off) switch
Switch between the following settings, according
to the microphone used for audio input.
+48V: Microphone requiring external power
source (phantom power)
17 8 9 10 11 OFF: Microphone using internal power source or
not requiring a power source
6. SDI IN (SDI input) connector (BNC type)
Connector used when connecting an external SDI
signal source to the camcorder.
000
7. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and

channel 2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin,
female)
Connect to audio equipment or a microphone.
8. Bottom cover
This is provided for protecting the cables
connected to the connectors on the rear panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the cover to
the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the
position of the cover depending on the size and
shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs.
After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to
secure the cover.
9. AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-pin,
male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.
The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch.
10. REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a remote control unit to control the
camcorder remotely.
[Note]
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control Unit
to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder
POWER switch.
11. SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (BNC type)

Outputs an HD SDI or SD SDI signal (with
embedded audio). The output signal from this
connector can be turned on/off using Operation
>Input/Output >SDI Out1 Output or SDI Out2
Output in the setup menu.
[Note]
Make sure that the ground connection between the
camcorder and external device is securely established before
turning the power on.
(It is recommended that the camcorder and external device
be turned on after connecting the 75 Ω coaxial cable.)
If the external device must be connected to the camcorder
while the camcorder is on, connect the 75 Ω coaxial cable
to the external device first and then connect it to the
camcorder.
000
13 1. Overview
Screen Display
8. Remaining media capacity indicator
LCD Monitor Information Screen (Status Display) Shows bar segments indicating the remaining Status Screens
capacity of recording media in the slots.
The LCD monitor information screen is displayed 9. Warning indicator area The status screens allow you to check camcorder
by pressing the DISP SEL/EXPAND (display select/ Displays warnings when trouble with recording settings and various types of status information.
expand) button (page 8). occurs. When no menu is displayed, push the MENU
1 23 4 5 For details, see “Error/Warning System” (page 145).
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL/
PRST position to display the status screen. Each
10. Clip name display push selects the next status screen.
The following status screens can be displayed.
12 13
Displays the name of the clip currently recording
when recording, or displays the name of the next Status screen Display indication
clip to be recorded during recording standby. Camera Status screen Settings and status
11 6
11. Time data display information related to
shooting
Switches displays of duration, timecode, and
10 user bits data, depending on the position of the Audio Status screen Settings and status
9 DISPLAY switch. information related to
audio input and output
Displays the type of data currently shown in the
time data display, as follows. System Status screen Settings and status
TCG: Recorded timecode information related to
TCR: Playback timecode recording
8 7 UBG: Recorded user bits Video Output Status Settings and status
UBR; Playback user bits screen information related to
1. File system indicator 5. Audio format indicator CNT: Counter video output
Indicates the audio recording format or the audio DUR: Duration Assignable Button Status Names of functions
2. File format indicator
format of clip being currently played. CLK: Time display (when the PRESET/REGEN/ screen assigned to assignable
3. Status display Indicator Recording format CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK) switches
PB: Appears during media playback. Battery Status screen Status of the battery
16bit HD420 HQ
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the mounted on the
DVCAM
selected. timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the camcorder
MPEG IMX 50
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode format shown below. When the HOLD button is Media Status screen Status information about
generator is locked to an external signal input 24bit HD422 50
pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is recording media
MPEG IMX 50
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector. displayed in the normal format. Network Status 1 screen Settings and status
XAVC Intra
HOLD: Appears when the operation mode of the information related to
XAVC Long
internal timecode generator is set to R-RUN the network
and stopped.
Network Status 2 screen Settings and status
6. Audio level meters The three dots indicate that the timecode and
4. System frequency indicator Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of counter progress are in hold mode. information related to
Indicates the system frequency of video being streaming
channels 1 to 4.
currently played or recorded. 12. Resolution indicator
7. Remaining battery capacity indicator Indicates the resolution of the output video.
Displays the battery remaining capacity icon and
the remaining recording time. 13. Recording format indicator
Indicates the current recording format or the
recording format of clip being currently played.
000
14 1. Overview: Screen Display
Camera Status screen Display item Description Video Output Status screen Display item Description
CH 1/CH 2/ Audio level, input source, Detected Detected type of the battery
CH 3/CH 4 reference input level, and wind Battery
noise reduction filter settings for Remaining Remaining capacity (%)
each channel
Charge Count Number of recharges
Capacity Remaining capacity (Ah)
System Status screen Voltage Voltage
Manufacture Date of battery manufacture
Date
Display item Description Display item Description
Power Source Power supply source
Gain Gain level in dB units SDI SDI OUT connector output
settings (output picture size, Supplied Supplied power source voltage
Shutter Electronic shutter status Voltage
output form, output rate,
Gamma Gamma category and curve
superimposition)
White White balance mode setting
HDMI HDMI connector output settings
(output picture size, output form,
Media Status screen
Gain Switch GAIN switch status
Display item Description output rate, superimposition)
Zebra Zebra pattern status
System System frequency Video VIDEO OUT connector output
Iris Iris f-stop value Frequency settings (output picture size,
Focal Length Focal length File System File system superimposition)
Focus Distance Focus distance Rec Format Recording format
Depth Of Field Depth of field Clip Clip Continuous Rec function on/
Zoom Speed Zoom speed configured for the Continuous off setting Assignable Button Status screen
lens ZOOM button Rec
HDR Setting HDR settings Display item Description
Title Prefix Clip name prefix
SxSA Remaining capacity (bar graph
[Note] Picture Size Picture size
Displayed only when using and remaining time display) and
Simul Rec Simul Rec function on/off media life of media in slot A (0% to
CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option).
Rec Function Enabled special recording format 100% indication. Replacement
and settings recommended at 0%. Displayed
Audio Status screen Picture Cache Picture Cache Rec function on/off
only for media that supports this
function.)
Rec setting
Number Clip name suffix
Battery Status screen SxSB Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display) and
Gamma Gamma category in use media life of media in slot B (0% to
100% indication. Replacement
Proxy Proxy data recording function on/ recommended at 0%. Displayed
Recording off setting only for media that supports this
Mode function.)
000
Display item Description Display item Description Network client mode status Status State Description
SD Proxy Remaining capacity (bar graph Wired LAN Remote control enabled/ Status State Description display
and remaining time display) and Remote disabled state when connected display No Inet Internet Cannot connect to
media life (displayed only if using a LAN cable Off CCM not Network client Access connection error the network. The
available) of media in PROXY SD IP Address IP address of wired LAN connected mode is off. network settings
card slot (Wired) connection may be incorrect.
Connected CCM connected Network client Check the network
SD Utility Remaining capacity (bar graph
mode is on, CCM is settings.
and remaining capacity) and
connected, and
media life (displayed only if Network Status 2 screen CCM control is
Cert. not CCM The CCM certificate
available) of media in UTILITY SD Valid certification not is not valid. The date
enabled.
card slot valid error setting may be
Connecting Connecting to Attempting to invalid. Check the
A mark is displayed if the media is protected. CCM connect to CCM (or date setting.
(disconnected) disconnecting). Wait
until connection
Network Status 1 screen (disconnection) is
successful. If the
status does not
Display item Description change from
“Connecting,” the
NW Client Network client mode status
CCM address setting
Mode Status For details about the status, see
may be incorrect.
“Network client mode status”
Check that the
(page 15).
address is set
CCM Name Name of the connected CCM correctly.
Display item Description when using network client mode
Setting Network setting status Awaiting CCM connection Network client
Streaming Streaming distribution status standby mode is on, but the
Wireless Network Wireless network setting status Status network setting is
Streaming Size Picture size of the currently off. Enable the
Device Name Name of attached USB wireless selected streaming setting network setting to
LAN module device connect to the
Streaming Bit Bit rate of the currently selected CCM.
IP Address IP address of wireless LAN
Rate streaming setting
(Wireless) connection Address CCM address The host name or IP
Streaming Type Type of the currently selected Error error address of the CCM
MAC Addr. MAC address of device attached streaming setting to connect may be
(Wireless) the USB wireless LAN module Streaming Streaming destination address incorrect. Check
connector Dest. Add. that the setting is
Wireless Network Modem setting status Streaming Streaming destination port correct.
Device Name Name of attached modem Dest. Port Auth. CCM user name/ The user name or
device Number of Number of streaming distribution Failed password error password used to
IP IP address of attached modem Distribution destinations connect to the CCM
Address(Modem) device File Transfer File transfer progress status may be incorrect.
Wired LAN Wired LAN network connection Check that the
Transfer to: Server name of file transfer setting is correct.
status destination
000
3. Color temperature indicator

Viewfinder Screen Displays the color temperature of the white
Indicator
Sml Rec
Meaning
Recording in progress in Simul Rec
balance. mode
The viewfinder screen displays images during using the DISPLAY switch. 4. Focus position indicator (with lens mounted) Sml Stby Recording standby in Simul Rec
shooting (recording or recording standby) The information to display is linked to the settings Displays the focus position as a distance to the mode
and playback with camcorder information in Operation >Super Impose in the setup menu, subject (unit: meters). CALL Call received from external
superimposed on the display. and the settings of the corresponding switches. connected device
You can toggle the display of information on/off 5. Iris position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the iris position setting. Green tally is displayed when the camcorder is in
7 6. Electric color temperature filter indicator the following states.
1 23 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 Appears when the CC5600K function is on. ˎˎMaintenance >Camera Config >HD SDI Remote
I/F is set to Green Tally in the setup menu and a
7. Depth of field indicator (serial lens mounted) recording control signal is output from the SDI
Displays the depth of field using a bar. The units
38 13 for display are set using Operation >Display On/Off
OUT connector.
37 14 >Lens Info in the setup menu, and can be set to
ˎˎGreen tally signal received (when a camera
36 15 adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a
35 16 meters or feet. camera extension unit is connected)
17 8. Recording mode indicator
34 18 9. Wireless receiver function indicator
19 20
Displays the following recording operation states
of the camcorder.
Displays “W” when a slot-in receiver is attached to
the camcorder, and displays the reception level
21 for each channel that can be used by the receiver
33 22 Indicator Meaning
32 23 Rec During recording (1ch, 2ch, or 4ch).
Normal: Displays the strength of the received
31 24 Stby Recording standby
30 Cont Rec Clip continuous recording in
signal level by the number of white segment
indicators.
progress
Analog receiver muting/Digital receiver error rate
Cont Stby Recording standby in clip continuous warning: Displays the strength of the received
29 28 27 26 25 recording mode signal level by the number of gray segment
S&Q Rec Recording in progress in Slow & indicators.
1. Extender indicator ON Quick Motion mode If the received level exceeds the peak: Displays “P”
Displays the status of the digital extender function EX4D: Appears when both the lens extender S&Q Stby Recording standby in Slow & Quick in place of the indicator.1)
and lens extender function. function and digital extender function (×4) are Motion mode If the transmitter is in power-save mode: “S” is
EX: Appears when the lens extender function is ON ON Rec Recording in Picture Cache Rec displayed.
X2D: Appears when the digital extender function Turn the digital extender on/off using an mode Receiver battery is low: The corresponding channel
(×2) is ON assignable switch assigned with the Digital Cache Recording standby in Picture Cache number and indicators flash.1)
X3D: Appears when the digital extender function Extender function. 1) When using the DWR-S02DN
Rec mode
(×3) is ON 10. S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick) frame rate
[Note] Int Rec Recording in progress in Interval Rec
X4D: Appears when the digital extender function The digital extender cannot be turned on when Slow & Quick mode indicator
(×4) is ON Motion is enabled.
Displays the shooting frame rate when the
Int Stby Recording standby in Interval Rec
EX2D: Appears when both the lens extender
2. Zoom position indicator (with lens mounted) mode camcorder is set to Slow & Quick Motion recording
function and digital extender function (×2) are mode.
Displays the zoom position of the zoom lens in the Int Stby Recording paused in Interval Rec
ON
range 0 to 99. mode (during pause intervals)
EX3D: Appears when both the lens extender 11. GPS indicator (page 59)
The values displayed will vary with the lens used.
function and digital extender function (×3) are
000
12. Battery capacity/voltage display Menu settings Indicator 18. Wired LAN/Modem connection status State Network
Displays the following indicators according to the Operation Paint >Gamma setting indicator Operation Maintenance Maintenance connection
type of battery power source. >Display Gamma Gamma Gamma Displays icons for the wired LAN network or >Display On/ >Network >Network state/icon
On/Off Category Select modem settings/connection status. Off >Network >Setting >Modem
Battery type Indicator
>Gamma Condition
Info battery Battery remaining capacity On Off — — Gamma Wired LAN settings/connection status On Off – –
icon and remaining recording Off On – –
time State Network
On STD STD1 DVW STD1 Off –
Operation Maintenance Maintenance connection
Anton/Bauer Remaining battery capacity (%
>Display On/ >Network >Network state/icon On Modem
battery indicator) STD2 x4.5 STD2
connecting
Off >Network >Setting >Wired LAN
Other batteries Input voltage Condition
STD3 x3.5 STD3
Off – – – (flashing)
13. Recording format (picture size) indicator STD4 240M STD4
On Off – – Modem
Displays the picture size of clips recorded onto SxS STD5 R709 STD5 On – – connected
memory cards. Disable –
STD6 x5.0 STD6
14. Recording format (system frequency and Enable Connecting
Modem
to LAN
scan method) indicator HG HG1 HG1 connection
Displays the currently configured camcorder 3250G36 error
system frequency and the recording format scan HG2 HG2 (flashing)
method. 4600G30 Connected to
HG3 HG3 LAN
15. Recording format (codec) indicator 3259G40
19. Streaming indicator
Displays the format name of clips recorded onto Displays the status of streaming using icons.
HG4 HG4 LAN
SxS memory cards. 4609G33 State Streaming
connection
16. Gamma indicator User User 1 User 1 error Operation Maintenance Maintenance state/Icon
Displays the gamma setting. User 2 User 2 >Display >Streaming >Network
User 3 User 3 On/Off >Setting Client Mode
Menu settings Indicator
>Streaming >Setting
Operation Paint >Gamma setting User 4 User 4 3G/4G modem settings/connection status
Status
>Display Gamma Gamma Gamma User 5 User 5 State Network
Off — — —
On/Off Category Select Operation Maintenance Maintenance connection
>Gamma The gamma indicator is “HLG” when Operation >Display On/ >Network >Network state/icon On Off Off —
Off — — — — >Base Setting >Shooting Mode is set to HDR in the Off >Network >Setting >Modem On Off Not
setup menu. Condition streaming
17. Timecode external lock indicator Off – – –

Displays timecode lock when the timecode is Streaming
input from an external source.
Error
000
The following icons are displayed when streaming State Network 22. Proxy indicator 24. Video signal indicator
from a CCM. Operation Maintenance Maintenance connection Displays “Proxy” when proxy recording is on Displays the output video signal in realtime as a
State Streaming >Display On/ >Network >Network state/icon (Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting waveform, vectorscope, or histogram.
Operation Maintenance Maintenance state/Icon Off >Network >Setting >Wi-Fi Mode in the setup menu is set to On). During setup, State Video signal
>Display >Streaming >Network
Condition “Proxy” blinks. “Proxy Rec” is displayed during proxy Operation >Input/ Operation >HDR indicator
On/Off >Setting Client Mode On Off – – recording. Output >Output Setting
>Streaming >Setting On Wi-Fi Access Connecting Format >SDI Out
Point to Wi-Fi
23. Network client mode indicator
Status 1920x1080 HD Rec/Out setting indicator (Using
Displays the status of the connection to the CCM
On Off On Not CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE)
(Connection Control Manager) of either a Network
streaming (flashing) HDR(HLG) HDR(HLG)
RX Station or C3 Portal using icons when network
Wi-Fi standby
client mode is on. SDR SDR
(connected)
Streaming State Icon
Operation Maintenance State 25. Recording media state/remaining capacity
Wi-Fi Station Connecting
>Display >Network indicator for each media slot
to Wi-Fi
On/Off >NW Client Mode Displays the state and remaining capacity of the
[Note] Client Mode >Setting media in SxS slot A, SxS slot B, and the PROXY SD
Icons are not displayed before streaming starts. (flashing) Status card slot.
20. Wi-Fi mode status indicator Searching for Off — — —
Displays the wireless LAN settings and connection access points On Off — — SxS slot icon indicator
*SxS slot A (SxSA) example. The icons for SxS slot B are
status using icons. On CCM
labeled SxSB.
connected
State Network Connecting
Connecting to Icon Media state
Operation Maintenance Maintenance connection to access
CCM — Media not inserted or not mounted
>Display On/ >Network >Network state/icon point
(disconnected) (flashing)
Off >Network >Setting >Wi-Fi Mode
CCM — Media mounted
Condition
connection
Off – – – Media mounting
standby
CCM (flashing)
connection Recording (active)
Icon changes error For details
(orange bar)
due to signal about errors,
strength see Playback (active)
Access point page 15.
(green
connection
indicator)
error
Recording/playback (active)
(orange bar
Off – + green
indicator)
21. File transfer status indicator
SD card (for proxy data recording) icon indicator
Displays and transfer rate (%) during file transfer.
When transfer finishes, disappears to indicate Icon Media state
100% transfer. — Media not inserted or not mounted
000
Icon Media state 31. SDI output REC trigger indicator 36. Gain indicator
Media mounted
Displays the superimposition state of the recording Displays the gain setting (dB), set using the GAIN
command sent to the SDI connector output. switch, of the video amplifier.
Media mounting It is displayed when Maintenance >Camera Config
37. Shutter mode/shutter speed indicator/Flash
(flashing) >HD SDI Remote I/F is set to “Characters” in the
Band Reduce status indicator
Recording (active) setup menu.
Displays the shutter mode or shutter speed.
(orange bar) 32. ALAC indicator “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 41)
Displays “ALAC” when the ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) function is set to be If Flash Band Reduce (page 105) is set to On in
The remaining recording time is displayed performed automatically. the Operation menu, FBR is displayed when the
numerically. ALAC will be performed automatically when shutter is in a non-operating state.
an ALAC-compatible lens is attached, the ALAC 38. White balance mode indicator
26. Audio level meter indicators function is enabled, and Maintenance >Camera
Displays the levels of audio channels 1 and 2. Displays the currently selected white balance
Config >ALAC is set to “Auto” in the setup menu. automatic adjustment memory.
27. Clip name display 33. AE (auto iris) mode indicator ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode
Displays the name of the clip currently recording Displays the current operating mode of the auto W:A: Memory A mode
when recording, or displays the name of the next iris function using an icon and auto iris override W:B: Memory B mode
clip to be recorded during recording standby. level. W:C: Memory C mode
28. Focus assist indicator W:P: Preset mode
Icon Meaning
Displays a detection frame (focus area marker) 3200K: Appears when an assignable switch
Backlight mode assigned with Color Temp SW 3200K is on
indicating the area for detection of degree of
focus, and a level bar (focus assist indicator) 4300K: Appears when an assignable switch
Standard mode assigned with Color Temp SW 4300K is on
indicating the degree of focus within that area.
5600K: Appears when an assignable switch
29. Time data display Spotlight mode assigned with Color Temp SW 5600K is on
Displays the remaining recording/playback 6300K: Appears when an assignable switch
time, timecode, user bits, etc., as selected by the assigned with Color Temp SW 6300K is on
DISPLAY switch (page 8). 34. Auto focus mode indicator (when an auto
focus lens is attached only)
30. SD card indicator for saving configuration
Displays the focus adjustment mode of the
data
camcorder.
Displays the state of the SD card (for saving
configuration data) inserted in the UTILITY SD card ˎˎAF (auto focus)
slot. ˎˎMF (manual focus)
ˎˎMF* (manual focus with MF assist function on)
Icon Media state ˎˎFull MF (full manual focus)
— SD card not inserted or not mounted
35. ND filter indicator
SD card mounted Displays the position number of the currently
selected ND filter (page 5).
Mounted SD card is protected When “Electrical CC” is assigned to an assignable
switch, the position (A/B/C/D) of the electrical
SD card mounting CC filter is displayed on the right of the ND filter
(flashing) indicator (1 to 4).
000
20 1. Overview
Supplied Lens and Viewfinder

[Note] To move rapidly to the shuttle position, press
Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KC Always set the iris mode switch to the M (manual) position and hold the Shtl (shuttle) switch.
first and then adjust the iris.
The zoom rapidly returns to the previous zoom
The PXW-X400KC is supplied with a lens. 11. Zoom lever / zoom ring position when the Shtl (shuttle) switch is
For manual zoom adjustment, set the zoom servo/ released.
6 manual switch to the MANU position, then operate
5 the lever/ring. Current zoom
4 12. Focus ring position
3 Turn this ring to adjust the focus.
2 13. Zoom servo / manual knob
1 7 SERVO (servo): Selects power zoom. Operate the Press and hold Shtl
zoom with the zoom seesaw switch. (shuttle) switch
8 MANU (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate Shuttle position
9 the zoom with the zoom lever/zoom ring.
10 13 14. Power/iris control cable

11 14 Connect to the LENS connector on the camcorder.
Release Shtl
12 15 15. VTR switch (shuttle) switch
16 Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to
start recording, then press once more to stop. Original zoom
17 16. Shtl (shuttle) switch (page 20)
position
18 Used for the shuttle shot function.
1. DIP switches (page 20) 6. RET switch 17. Zoom remote control connector
Used for the shuttle shot function. While pressed, the last few seconds recorded Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to
appear on the viewfinder screen (Rec Review) enable remote control of zooming.
2. Iris gain adjustment trimmer (page 43)
(page 21).
3. Iris push auto switch 18. Memo switch (page 20)
7. F.B. lock screw / F.B. adjustment ring Used for the shuttle shot function.
When the iris mode switch is in the M (manual)
(page 43)
position, press this switch for instantaneous auto
iris adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted 8. Positioning pin About shuttle shot
while the switch is held down. When attaching the lens, align this pin with the
Shuttle shot is a shooting function for rapidly
recess in the top center of lens mount on the
4. Iris mode switch moving to a preset zoom position set by the user.
camcorder.
A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically.
M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring. 9. Macro button / macro ring 1 Set the DIP switch 1 to ON.
Press and hold the macro button and turn the
5. Zoom seesaw switch
This is enabled when the zoom servo/manual
macro ring to adjust the focus (minimum focus 2 Set the zoom position that you want to
distance: 10 mm). register.
knob is in the SERVO position. Set to the W (wide
10. Iris ring
angle) position when you want wide-angle, and
set to the T (telephoto) side when you want For manual iris adjustment, set the iris mode 3 Press and hold the Memo switch and press the
telephoto. switch to the M (manual) position, then turn this Shtl (shuttle) switch.
Press the switch harder for a faster zoom action, or ring. The zoom position is registered as the shuttle
softer for slower zoom action. position.
000
21 1. Overview: Supplied Lens and Viewfinder
operates, minimizing the amount of turning – When shooting point light sources, under
Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KF required for focusing. street lighting or at night
When you slide the focus ring back (toward the – When there are very bright objects close to
The PXW-X400KF is supplied with a lens. camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF the subject
mode, in which all focus adjustments are manual – When shooting through a glass window
1 (page 44). ˎˎIf there are a number of objects within the
2 7. Flange focal length adjustment button
screen at close and far range, the focus may not
3 Press this to adjust the flange focal length (the
be on the intended subject. In this case, with
the subject on which you want to focus in the
4 distance from the lens mounting flange plane to
center of the screen, press the PUSH AF button.
5 the focusing plane) (page 27).
ˎˎAfter focusing with the PUSH AF button, if you
6 8. Zoom control connector (8-pin)
Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to
operate the zoom or adjust the iris, the depth of
field may become shallower, losing crisp focus.
enable remote control of zooming. In such cases, press the PUSH AF button once
more.
9. ZOOM switch
10 SERVO: Selects power zoom. Operate the zoom
ˎˎIf you focus at wide-angle then zoom to
telephoto, the subject may no longer be in
11 with the power zoom lever.
MANUAL (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate
focus.
12 the zoom with the zoom ring.
ˎˎIt may take time until the image is in focus while
using the slow shutter mode.
13 10. PUSH AUTO (instant auto iris) button 13. RET (return video) button
7 14 When the IRIS switch is in the M position for
manual adjustment, press this button for
You can assign a function and use this as an
8 instantaneous auto adjustment. The iris is
assignable switch (page 124).
When “Lens RET” is assigned to this button (factory
9 automatically adjusted while the button is held
down.
default setting), press this after recording stops
to review the last few seconds recorded on the
1. PUSH AF (auto focus) button mode is enabled, allowing focusing over the 11. IRIS (adjustment mode) switch viewfinder screen (Rec Review) (page 49).
When adjusting focus in manual mode, pressing whole range (5 cm1) to ∞) including the macro A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically. Press this button (single click) during recording or
this button enables auto focus adjustment on the range (from 5 cm1) to 80 cm from the front of the M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring. playback to record a Shot Mark 1 mark, or double-
subject. lens). click to record a Shot Mark 2 mark (page 51).
Press the button to activate auto focus, and release This operation is independent of whether the 12. Power zoom lever
the button when the subject is in focus. focus adjustment mode is auto or manual. This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the 14. VTR button
1) At the wide-angle setting SERVO position. Set to the W (wide angle) position Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to
2. FOCUS (adjustment mode) switch when you want wide-angle, and set to the T start recording, then press once more to stop.
A (Auto): Activates the normal auto focus function. 4. Iris ring (telephoto) side when you want telephoto.
You can also adjust the focus manually using For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to
Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action, or
the focus ring, even when the switch is in the the M (manual) position, then turn this ring.
softer for slower zoom action.
“A” position. 5. Zoom ring Notes about auto focus
M (manual): Selects manual mode for focus For manual zoom adjustment, set the ZOOM ˎˎIt may be difficult to focus on the subject in the
adjustment with the focus ring. switch to the MANUAL position, then turn this ring. following cases. If this does happen, use manual
In manual mode, auto focus adjustment is also focusing.
possible, by pressing the PUSH AF button. 6. Focus ring – If the subject has no contrast
Turn this ring to adjust the focus.
3. MACRO switch – If the subject is moving rapidly
When the ring is set to AF/MF mode, the faster
When this switch is in the ON position, macro you turn ring the faster the focusing mechanism
000
22 1. Overview: Supplied Lens and Viewfinder
7. Viewfinder barrel OFF: Do not reverse the image.

Viewfinder Supplied with the You can raise this up or rotate when required by B/T: Reverse the image vertically.
PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF the situation.
16. Microphone holder
8. Tally indicator
Lights up when recording is started by a press of
1 the REC START button on this camcorder, the VTR
2 button on the lens, or the START/STOP button on
3 the remote control unit.
16 When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator
4 flashes to indicate a warning.
5 9. PEAKING knob
Turning this knob clockwise adjusts the picture
6 sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
7 control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
8
9 10 11 10. CONTRAST knob
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control has
no effect on the output signals of the camcorder.
11. BRIGHT knob
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
15 14 13 12
12. TALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
1. Connector
the viewfinder.
Connect to the VF connector (26-pin) on the
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to high.
camcorder.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
2. Viewfinder cable LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
3. Slide stopper 13. ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the Controls the zebra pattern display.
camcorder when it is slid from side to side. ON: Display a zebra pattern.
OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern.
4. Eyecup
14. DISPLAY switch
5. Diopter adjustment ring
ON: Display text information.
Turn this ring to adjust the image until it is in
OFF: Do not display text information.
sharpest focus.
15. MIRROR switch
6. Eyepiece
The image display on the monitor screen becomes
You can raise this up when required by the
reversed horizontally or vertically when the
situation.
viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated.
L/R: Reverse the image horizontally.
000
23 2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply

For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and AC For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the battery
adaptors listed below. charger operation manual.
ˎˎBP-GL95B Lithium-ion Battery Pack

[CAUTION] Note on using the battery pack
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the recharged.
manufacturer. When you dispose of the battery, you must
obey the law in the relative area or country.
Using AC Power
Using a Battery Pack
Mount an AC-DN10A on the camcorder in the
same way as a battery pack, then connect to the
Press the battery pack against the back of the
AC power supply.
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the
battery pack with the line on the camcorder. Then
slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow
aligns with the line on the camcorder.
To detach the battery pack, pull the battery pack
up by holding the release button in.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminals
may become damaged.
ˎˎ During recording and playback (while the ACCESS lamp
on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS lamp
in the card slot section is lit in orange), be careful never to
remove the battery pack.
Doing so may corrupt the data recorded on the card.
ˎˎ Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
the battery pack.
When a BP-GL95B Battery Pack is used, the

camcorder will operate continuously for
approximately 195 minutes.
[WARNING]
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
[Note]
The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency
of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature
when used.
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger

suitable for each battery.
000
24 2. Preparation
Attaching a Viewfinder
This section describes the viewfinder supplied with
the PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF models.
2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF Viewfinder left-to-
right positioning ring
To restore the normal display, set the MIRROR
switch on the rear panel of the viewfinder to B/T.
connector (26-pin).
[CAUTION] VF connector (26-pin)
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camcorder
with the eyepiece lens facing the sun.
Direct sunlight can enter through the lens, be focused in the
viewfinder and cause fire.
Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel and
[Note] Eyepiece
A viewfinder is supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXW-
X400KF models. A viewfinder for the PXW-X400 is available
separately. You can view the LCD screen inside the viewfinder
or its mirrored image by lifting up the viewfinder
barrel or the eyepiece.
Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder Viewfinder front-to-back

1 Push the clip on the bottom to release and flip
positioning knob up the viewfinder barrel.
[Note]
Up 2 It locks at the 120-degree position.
When attaching a viewfinder, take note of the following
points.
ˎˎ Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle
the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF You can detach the viewfinder by following the
connector (26-pin). If you make this connection when the attaching procedure in reverse order. But, when
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not function detaching the viewfinder from the attachment You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder.
properly.
shoe, pull up the stopper.
ˎˎ Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If the coupling is loose,
noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not
operate properly.
1 [1] Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right Adjusting the Viewfinder Position 2

positioning ring, [2] attach the viewfinder to
the viewfinder fitting shoe, and [3] tighten the
To adjust the viewfinder left-right position, loosen
viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring.
the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust the
Slide stopper front-back position, loosen the front-to-back 1
positioning knob.
Reversing the Display (image/text

[3]
indication) Vertically
[1]
[2] The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180 Normally use it in the locked position.
degrees toward the direction facing the subject. Although you can open it farther from the lock
Left-to-right positioning When you do this, the picture and other position, you must return it to the closed position
ring information displayed in the viewfinder appear to lock it at the 120-degree position again.
upside down.
000
25 2. Preparation: Attaching a Viewfinder
Detaching the Viewfinder Barrel Reversing the Display (image/text

indication) Horizontally Hex socket bolts
1 Push the clip on the bottom to release.
By setting the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of
2 Flip up the viewfinder barrel. the viewfinder to L/R, you can reverse the picture
and other information displayed in the viewfinder
3 Slide the knob on the top to the opposite side
horizontally.
of the viewfinder barrel.
Attaching the BKW-401 Viewfinder Viewfinder slide assembly
4 Detach the viewfinder barrel by horizontally
Adjusting the Diopter Rotation Bracket
sliding it.
3 Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied bolts.
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
viewfinder image is sharpest. Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder out of
the way so that your right leg does not hit the
viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder.
1 Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then pull
the viewfinder slide assembly forward.
3 4
4 Adjust the front-to-back position so that the

arm of the BKW-401 does not touch the
Diopter adjustment ring handle when it is raised.
You can also attach a commercially available Adjust position so that arm does not
protection filter, close-up lens, etc. that is 52 mm touch handle
in diameter.
Adjusting the Screen

1
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the 2 Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench,
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below. detach the viewfinder slide assembly.
Outlines: Adjust using the PEAKING knob.
Contrast: Adjust using the CONTRAST knob.
Brightness: Adjust using the BRIGHT knob.
000
26 2. Preparation
Using the Camcorder for the First Time

When using the camcorder for the first time,
configure the following settings in the menu.
3 Turn the MENU knob to set the year, month, or
day, and then press the knob.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 92).
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the remaining
digits.
Setting the Time Zone 5 Press the SET button.

The internal clock is set to the date set in steps
2 to 4.
Set the time zone for the region of use. The default Next, set the time.
value is “UTC Greenwich.”
1 Select Operation >Time Zone >Time Zone in
6 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Time in the
setup menu.
the setup menu.
The Time screen appears.
2 Select the time zone to use.
Setting the Date and Time of the

Internal Clock
Set the year, month, day, and day-of-week of the
7 Set the time in the same way as when setting
the date.
internal clock.
1 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Date in the 8 Press the SET button.
setup menu. The time is registered in the internal clock.
The Date screen appears.
To cancel the setting, press the Cancel button.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the year, month,

or day, and then press the knob.
The selected year, month, or day becomes
editable.
000
27 2. Preparation
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens

[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
Lens mount securing rubber When carrying out the adjustment, use a flange
focal length adjustment chart as the subject.
7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 until the proper focus is
connector, power off the camcorder first. achieved at both ends of the zoom ring.
8 When the optimum position of the F.B.

adjustment ring is achieved, tighten the F.B.
Attaching a Lens lock screw.
This section describes how to attach the lens

Approx. 3 m (10 ft.) Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens
3
supplied with the PXW-X400KF as an example. supplied with the PXW-X400KF
1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the With an auto focus lens, zoom and focus
lens mount cap from the lens mount. [Notes] operations automatically adjust the flange focal
ˎˎ If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move the length.
2 Align the center pin on the lens with the
camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will cause
1 Place the supplied focal length adjustment
4
an adjustment error.
center slot in the lens mount, and insert the Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector. ˎˎ Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera.
lens into the mount. chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the
5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamp.

telephoto end. Arrange it so that no nearby object (no
object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the 2 Open the iris.
screen at the wide-angle end. The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is
If an aberration correction lens is attached open, making adjustment easier.
Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens
The aberration correction function is activated
automatically.1) Starting the camcorder with an supplied with the PXW-X400KC 3 Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO (power zoom
aberration correction lens may require more time mode).
2 than normal because of data loading at start-up. 1 Place a subject (Siemens star chart, for
The lens supplied with the PXW-X400 is an example) 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera. 4 Hold down the flange focal length adjustment
1 aberration correction lens. Contact a Sony sales or button for 3 seconds.
service representative for information about other 2 Open the iris. The following message appears on the
aberration correction lenses. The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is viewfinder screen.
1) The aberration correction function does not operate if Auto FB Adjust
open, making adjustment easier.
1 Maintenance >Camera Config >ALAC in the setup menu Executing...
is set to Off.
3 Set the lens zoom to T (telephoto).
After successful adjustment, the message on
the viewfinder screen changes to the
3 Holding the lens in place, push the lens following.
locking lever down to lock the lens. 4 Adjust the focus on the subject. Auto FB Adjust
[CAUTION] Adjusting the Flange Focal Length OK
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off 5 Set the lens zoom to W (wide angle).
while the camcorder is being used. This could If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you If the flange focal length adjustment is not
cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is
firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the 6 Loosen the F.B. lock screw on the lens, and successful
flange focal length (the distance from the plane turn the F.B. adjustment ring to adjust the
mount securing rubber be put on the lens of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane, focus. Check the subject and lighting conditions, and
locking lever as illustrated below. also called flange-back). repeat the adjustment.
Make this adjustment just one time after mounting
or changing the lens.
000
28 2. Preparation: Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
Adjusting the flange focal length on manual

lenses other than the lens supplied with the
PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF
1 Set the iris to manual.
2 Place the supplied flange focal length

adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) in front of
the camera.
3 Open the iris.

The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is
open, making adjustment easier.
4 Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring

(flange focal length adjustment ring).
5 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to

telephoto.
6 Point the camcorder at the chart by turning

the focus ring and focus on it.
7 Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
8 Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in

focus, being careful not to disturb the focus
ring.
9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the chart stays in

focus all the way from wide angle to
telephoto.
10 Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.

000
29 2. Preparation
Preparing the Audio Input System

Connecting a Microphone to the MIC 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN Attaching a Wireless Receiver
channels 3 and 4 does not depend on the XLR
automatic detection function. It is determined
connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch for
IN Connector the channel on which you want to record the
by the switch selection only.
audio from this microphone to FRONT. To use a Sony wireless microphone system, power
The XLR connection automatic detection function
the camcorder off and then attach a wireless
Attach the supplied microphone to the can be switched on/off using Maintenance >Audio
receiver.
microphone holder of the supplied viewfinder. >Rear XLR Auto in the setup menu.
ˎˎDWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless
1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone Receiver
[4]
holder clamp. ˎˎURX-S03D UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
Microphone holder clamp For details about attaching a wireless receiver, refer to the
instruction manual of each product.
[1] [1] [2]

[2] Connecting Line Input Audio [3]
4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable Equipment [1]

[2]
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switches
To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
clamp. [3] Monaural microphone
1 Connect the audio output connector of the [4] AUDIO IN selector switches
audio equipment that supplies the line input
2 Place the microphone in the microphone
Connecting Microphones to the signal to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
holder. connector.
[1] Place the microphone in the holder so that AUDIO IN Connectors
“UP” is at the top. 2 Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to
[2] Close the microphone holder. which the audio signal source is connected to
[3] Tighten the screw. You can connect up to two monaural
LINE.
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
[2] [3] connectors, using an optional CAC-12 Microphone
Holder. XLR connection automatic detect function
Supported microphones: ECM-674/678 electret
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection
condenser microphone function switched off (the factory default
For details about attaching the microphone holder and setting): Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
microphone, refer to the instruction manual of each product. switch to REAR for the channels to which the
audio equipment is connected.
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection
function switched on: When a cable is
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
connector, the input from that connector is
[1] automatically selected for audio recording,
regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2/CH3/CH4 switch.
ˎˎWhen the AUDIO IN selector switch is set to LINE
On how to attach the microphone, refer to the operation or MIC, the type of audio recorded on audio
manual for the microphone.
000
30 2. Preparation
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices

[Note]
Mounting on a Tripod The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position Attaching the Shoulder Strap
even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press 1,3
the red button and move the lever as shown above until
1 Attach the optional VCT-14/U14 Tripod

the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains
in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the 1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting.
Adaptor to the tripod. camcorder on the tripod adaptor. Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Connecting a Video Light

With this camcorder, you can use the Anton Bauer 2
Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light (powered by Shoulder pad
12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W).
ˎˎIf you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT
Clip
1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder
pad to unlock the shoulder pad.
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting
off automatically as you start and stop recording
on this camcorder.
on the other side of the grip in the same way. 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward
until it is in the most convenient position.
ˎˎThe output of the LIGHT connector on the To remove the shoulder strap, refer to the
camcorder is regulated to 12 V even when the
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks. camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
following diagram.
Press here and pull in the direction shown
3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack). in the selected position.
by the arrow to release.
The brightness or color temperature of the light
3 Make sure that the camcorder is securely will not change in response to voltage increase.
attached by moving it back and forth. [Notes]
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of
To remove the camcorder from the tripod 50 W or greater.
attachment, hold down the red button and pull ˎˎ The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
the lever in the direction of the arrow.
connector or from the battery pack) is less than 12 V.
To attach a video light, fit the video light to

the accessory shoe on the camcorder grip,
and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT
connector. Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
[Note]
The accessory shoe on the camcorder is of the 1/4-inch
Red button tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slide-type You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth
shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit. within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps
Lever you get the best balance for shooting with the
camcorder on your shoulder.
000
31 2. Preparation
Handling SxS Memory Cards

This camcorder records video and audio on SxS
memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or
trademarks and trade names are the property of
their respective owners.
2 Press the EJECT button again to eject the card.
both of its memory card slots. [Note]
When you press the EJECT button, take care not to
In addition to SxS memory cards, you can also use
impede the SxS memory card. If the movement of
XQD memory cards (not supplied) with the QDA- Slot A access indicator the SxS memory card is impeded, the lock may fail to
EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor (optional) or SDXC/ Inserting SxS Memory Cards release.
SDHC cards (not supplied) with the MEAD-SD02
Media Adaptor (optional) in the camcorder to
Slot B access indicator
make recordings.
The file system supported by each type of media is
1 Slide the cover to the left to open.
given below.
2 Insert an SxS memory card into a card slot.
Memory card File system Indicator Slot status
exFAT UDF FAT Lights in Accessing the SxS memory card
SxS memory cards Yes Yes No orange (lights during data reading and
XQD memory cards Yes Yes No writing)
Slot A
SDXC cards Yes No No Lights in Standby (the loaded SxS memory
green card is ready for recording or
SDHC cards No No Yes
playback) [Note]
Slot B Not lit No SxS memory card is loaded. Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the
camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card
An unusable card is loaded. is being accessed. All data recorded on the card may be
An SxS memory card is loaded, but discarded. Always make sure that the ACCESS indicator is
About SxS Memory Cards the other slot is selected. lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or
remove a memory card.
[Note]
Make sure to insert the SxS card in the correct
orientation. Hold the card with the arrow on one side
SxS memory cards facing the direction shown in the diagram, and then
insert the card.
Ejecting SxS Memory Cards Selecting the SxS Memory Card to
Use Sony SxS memory cards (SxS PRO X, SxS PRO+,
SxS PRO, or SxS-1) with this camcorder. The ACCESS indicator lights in orange, and Use
then lights in green to indicate that the
memory card is usable.
1 Open the cover, and then press the EJECT
SxS PRO X series button to release the lock and extract the When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot A
SxS PRO+ series button.
SxS PRO series
3 Close the cover.
and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT button
to select the SxS memory card to use.
SxS-1 series When the remaining recording time on the
ACCESS indicator status recording SxS memory card falls below 60
The memory cards listed above comply with the seconds, the remaining capacity indicator for
Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS indicator
ExpressCard memory card standard. the corresponding media slot flashes on the
that indicate the slot status.
viewfinder screen to indicate that the camcorder
ˎˎSxS, SxS PRO X, SxS PRO+, SxS PRO, and SxS-1
are trademarks of Sony Corporation. Press the button once
will switch SxS memory cards soon.
to release the lock. Subsequently, the camcorder switches
ˎˎThe ExpressCard label and logo are the
property of the Personal Computer Memory automatically to the other card when the selected
Card International Association (PCMCIA) and card becomes full, and recording continues.
are licensed to Sony Corporation. All other
000
32 2. Preparation: Handling SxS Memory Cards
[Note]
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback. The
If formatting fails [Note]
A mark appears when a memory card is write protected.
If restoration fails
memory cards are not switched even if you press the button.
Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen A format operation may fail because the SxS ˎˎWrite protected SxS memory cards and cards on
(page 83) is displayed. memory card is write protected, or because it is When to exchange SxS memory cards which memory errors have occurred cannot be
not the type of card specified for use with this restored. A warning message appears for such
camcorder. ˎˎThe warning message “Media Near Full” appears, cards. Follow the instructions in the message
the WARNING indicator and the REC indication
In this case, an error message appears. Follow the and unprotect the card or replace it with
on the viewfinder screen flash, and the buzzer
Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory instructions in the error message and exchange
the card for an SxS memory card that can be used
sounds when the total remaining recording
another card.
ˎˎSxS memory cards on which memory errors
Cards with this camcorder.
time of the two memory cards falls to five
minutes during recording.
have occurred may become usable if they are
[Notes] reformatted.
Exchange one of the cards for media with
ˎˎ Formatting a memory card erases all data, including ˎˎIn some cases, some clips can be restored while
When an unformatted SxS memory card or an SxS available recording capacity.
recorded video data and setup files. others cannot. The restored clips can be played
memory card formatted in another specification is ˎˎ Use the format function of this camcorder to format SxS ˎˎIf you continue recording, the message “Media normally.
inserted, a message notifying you that the media memory cards for use on this camcorder. The formats of Full” appears and recording stops when the
cards formatted on other devices are not recognized as ˎˎIf the message “Could not Restore Some Clips”
has a different file system appears. In this case, total remaining recording time falls to 0.
valid formats, making it necessary to format them again keeps appearing after repeated attempts at
format the memory card in the following way. [Note] restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS
on this camcorder.
SxS memory cards are formatted in exFAT or FAT About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS memory memory card with the following procedure.
by factory default. card.
Formatting while recording The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”
[1] Use the application software (page 172)
[Note] and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip limit is to copy the required clips to another SxS
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM device Even while recording, the SxS memory card loaded reached. memory card.
that supports the exFAT or UDF file system or on this
in the other card slot can be formatted. [2] Format the unusable SxS memory card on
camcorder. Cards in other formats cannot be used.
the camcorder.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
[Notes]
ˎˎ Formatting is not supported during playback or when the [3] Copy the required clips back to the newly
menu. thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎˎ During formatting, recording to an SxS memory card
Restoring SxS Memory Cards formatted SxS memory card.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B). loaded in the other card slot cannot be started. [Note]
For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder, be
If for any reason an error should occur in a memory sure to use this camcorder. Media recorded with a device
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then card, the card must be restored before use. other than this camcorder or with another camcorder of
different version (even of the same model) may not be
press the knob. When you load an SxS memory card that needs to
A confirmation screen prompting whether to Checking the Remaining Recording be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder restored using this camcorder.
to ask whether you want to restore it.

format the card appears.
Time
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the To execute the restore, turn the MENU knob to
confirmation message screen, then press the You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS select [Execute], and then press the knob.
knob. memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking The restoration starts.
Formatting begins. the recording media remaining capacity indicator During restoration, a message is displayed, and the
During formatting, a message is displayed, and in the viewfinder. ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. The remaining recording time is calculated from When restoration ends, a completion message
When formatting ends, a completion message the remaining capacity of the media in each slot appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the and the current video format (recording bit rate), message.
message. and is displayed in units of minutes.
You can check the remaining capacity on a bar
graph by displaying the Media Status screen
(page 14).
000
33 2. Preparation
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data

The following SD cards can be used for saving
configuration data. Checking the Remaining Capacity
SDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher, You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB) card on the Media Status screen (page 14).
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in
the slot of another device, make a backup of the
card, then reformat the card in the device to be
used.
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are
used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
1 Select Operation >Format Media >SD
Card(Utility) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen prompting whether to
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then

press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is displayed, and
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card
cannot be restored.
000
34 2. Preparation
Using a Media Adaptor

[Notes]
ˎˎ For professional applications, the use of other media will
The following SD cards are supported.
SDXC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 1)
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
not provide the same high reliability and durability that is press the knob.
SDHC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 2) When formatting ends, a completion message
obtained using SxS memory cards. A confirmation screen prompting whether to 1) Supported if the file system is exFAT.
ˎˎ Not all memory cards are guaranteed to work with this appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
format the card appears. 2) Supported if the file system is FAT.
camcorder. For compatible memory cards, contact your message.
Sony dealer.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
For details about using an MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, refer to
the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card, including
confirmation message screen, then press the protected video. The data cannot be restored.
knob. [Notes]
ˎˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved with
XQD Memory Cards Formatting begins.
an SD card. Connection between the camcorder and a
ˎˎ Seamless playback across clip boundaries is not
the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. supported. computer
By using an optional QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard When formatting ends, a completion message ˎˎ Recording and playback using SD cards is not supported
Adaptor, you can insert an XQD memory card into when shooting in XAVC-I format. Insert the recorded SD card into a slot in the
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
ˎˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a
an SxS memory card slot and use it instead of an message. recording function cannot be used with an SDXC card.
SxS memory card for recording and playback. computer using a USB cable.
[Note]
For details about using a QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor, Formatting an XQD memory card erases all data on the card, Formatting (initializing) To use a memory card formatted on the
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor. including protected video. The data cannot be restored.
SD cards must be formatted the first time they are camcorder in the slot of another device
[Note]
The following operations may not be available depending on
Connection between the camcorder and a used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
the type of XQD memory cards used. computer card in the device to be used.
ˎˎ High-speed playback formatted using the format function of the
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion shooting Insert the recorded XQD memory card into a slot camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card.
Formatting (initializing) computer using a USB cable. If an unformatted SD card or an SD card that was
formatted in a different specification is inserted, a
XQD memory cards must be formatted the first
time they are used in the camcorder.
To use a memory card formatted on the message asking for confirmation to format media
or a message notifying you that the media has a
XQD memory cards for use in the camcorder camcorder in the slot of another device different file system appears.
should be formatted using the format function Format the card using the following procedure.
of the camcorder. If a message appears when the First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
XQD memory card is inserted into the camcorder, card in the device to be used. 1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup
format the XQD memory card. menu.
If an unformatted XQD memory card or an XQD
memory card that was formatted in a different 2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B).
specification is inserted, a message asking for SD Cards
confirmation to format media or a message 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
notifying you that the media has a different file press the knob.
By using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, A confirmation screen prompting whether to
system appears.
you can insert an SD card into an SxS memory card
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup slot and use it for recording and playback.
menu. [Note]
If an SD card and other media are inserted in their respective
confirmation message screen, then press the
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B). memory card slots, only the first inserted media is recognized
and the last inserted media is not recognized.
knob.
Formatting begins.
000
35 3. Settings and Adjustments
Format Settings
You can set the file system, system frequency,
and video format using Operation >Format in the
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the system Video Formats
frequency, and press the knob.
setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and
Operations” (page 92).
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel]
system frequency.
to cancel, and then press the MENU knob. System frequency File system Video format Picture size
The camcorder will reboot automatically after (Operation >Format (Operation >Format >File (Operation >Format
executing [Execute]. >Frequency in setup menu) System in setup menu) >Rec Format in setup menu)
Selecting the File System exFAT UDF FAT
59.94/50 Yes – – XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080
You can select the file system. Yes – – XAVC-I 1920×1080i
Switching the Video Format
1 Select Operation >Format >File System in the
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
XAVC-I 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
1280×720
1920×1080
setup menu.
Refer to “Video Formats” (page 35) as required Yes – – XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file system,
when switching the video format. Yes – – XAVC-L 50 1280×720P 1280×720
then press the knob. 1 Select Operation >Format >Rec Format in the Yes – – XAVC-L 35 1080P 1920×1080
A confirmation screen appears. setup menu. Yes – – XAVC-L 35 1080i
Yes – – XAVC-L 25 1080i
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] 2 Turn the MENU knob to change the video Yes Yes – HD422 50 1080i 1920×1080
to cancel, and then press the MENU knob. format, and press the knob. Yes Yes – HD422 50 720P 1280×720
The camcorder will reboot automatically after A confirmation screen appears. Yes Yes Yes HQ 1920×1080i 1920×1080
executing [Execute].
[Note] 3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel]
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
1440×1080
1280×720
The file system cannot be changed during recording/ to cancel, and then press the MENU knob.
playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed. – – Yes SP 1440×1080i 1440×1080
Yes Yes – MPEG IMX 50 720×486/720×576
Yes Yes – DVCAM 720×480/720×576
29.97/25/23.98 Yes – – XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080
Switching the System Frequency Yes – – XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P 1920×1080
Yes – – XAVC-L 35 1080P
You can switch the system frequency as required. Yes Yes – HD422 50 1080P 1920×1080
[Notes] Yes Yes – HD422 50 720P 1280×720
ˎˎ The system frequency cannot be changed during Yes Yes Yes HQ 1920×1080P 1920×1080
recording/playback or while the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
ˎˎ After switching between 29.97 and 59.94 or between 25
and 50, the camcorder does not reboot automatically.
ˎˎ Switching the system frequency will automatically switch
the video format to the format used previously at that
frequency.
1 Select Operation >Format >Frequency in the

setup menu.
000
36 3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
SDI OUT Connector and HDMI Output Connector Output Formats Operation menu
Format Input/Output
Frequency Rec Format (codec omitted) Output Format
The signals that can be output from the SDI OUT connector and HDMI output connector are shown in the
following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu. SDI HDMI
50 1920×1080P 1920×1080P (Level A) 1920×1080P
Operation menu
1920×1080P (Level B) No signal
Format Input/Output
1920×1080i 1920×1080i
Frequency Rec Format (codec omitted) Output Format
720×576i 720×576i
SDI HDMI
1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
59.94 1920×1080P 1920×1080P (Level A) 1920×1080P
720×576i 720×576i
1920×1080P (Level B) No signal
1440×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
1920×1080i 1920×1080i
720×576i a) 720×576i a)
720×486i 720×480i
1280×720P 1280×720P 1280×720P
1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
720×576i 720×576i
720×486i 720×480i
720×576i 720×576i 720×576i
1440×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
No signal 720×576P
720×486i a) 720×480i a)
25 1920×1080P 1920×1080PsF 1920×1080i
1280×720P 1280×720P 1280×720P
720×576i 720×576i
720×486i 720×480i
1280×720P 1280×720P 1280×720P
720×480i 720×486i 720×480i
720×576i 720×576i
No signal 720×480P
29.97 1920×1080P 1920×1080PsF 1920×1080i a) Switches to 1920×1080i when proxy recording or wireless LAN connection function is on.
720×486i 720×480i
1280×720P 1280×720P 1280×720P
720×486i 720×480i
23.98 1920×1080P 1920×1080PsF No signal
1920×1080i (2-3PD) 1920×1080i (2-3PD)
720×486i (2-3PD) 720×480i (2-3PD)
1280×720P 1280×720P (2-3PD) 1280×720P (2-3PD)
720×486i (2-3PD) 720×480i (2-3PD)
000
37 3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
VIDEO Connector Output Formats Operation menu

Format
VIDEO OUT signal format
Frequency Rec Format (codec omitted) Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function
The signals that can be output from the VIDEO connector are shown in the following table according to
the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu. OFF ON
50 1920×1080P HD-Y HD-Y
Operation menu VIDEO OUT signal format
HD-Y HD-Y
Format
HD-Y HD-Y
Frequency Rec Format (codec omitted) Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function
Composite Composite c)
OFF ON
1920×1080i HD-Y HD-Y
59.94 1920×1080P HD-Y HD-Y
HD-Y HD-Y
1440×1080i HD-Y HD-Y
HD-Y HD-Y
Composite –
1280×720P HD Sync a) HD Sync a)
1920×1080i HD-Y HD-Y
720×576i Composite Composite c)
1440×1080i HD-Y HD-Y
Composite HD-Y
Composite –
25 1920×1080P HD-Y HD-Y
1280×720P HD Sync a) HD Sync a)
1280×720P HD-Y b)
HD-Y b)
720×480i Composite Composite c)
Composite HD-Y
29.97 1920×1080P HD-Y HD-Y a) 1080i sync signal output.
b) 1080PsF signal output.
c) Character information (superimposed) turns on/off in sync with the SDI OUT2/HDMI character information display switching.
1280×720P HD-Y b) HD-Y b)
23.98 1920×1080P HD-Y HD-Y
HD-Y HD-Y
1280×720P HD-Y b) HD-Y b)
000
Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range

You can set the imaging dynamic range to High assist function is automatically applied when HDR
Dynamic Range (HDR) mode to record and output Setting >HD Rec/Out is set to HDR(HLG).
images with BT.2020 equivalent color space and You can also assign the gamma display assist
increased dynamic range when the recording function to an assignable switch, and then turn
format is HD. the function on/off with a single button touch as
This function requires the CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR required.
LICENSE (option). [Note]
[Notes] This function is applied to the image in the viewfinder and
ˎˎ Not supported for MPEG IMX and DVCAM file formats. LCD monitor. It is not applied to the recorded image or
ˎˎ An SD format signal cannot be output when HDR is output image.
configured. If the signal format is SD and then HDR is
selected, the image is output in the default HD format.
ˎˎ Change the dynamic range mode setting with the Picture
Cache Rec function set to Off.
Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec >Off
Setting the Dynamic Range
1 Select Operation >Base Setting >Shooting

Mode in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the dynamic

range mode.
Select HDR to set to High Dynamic Range or
SDR to set to standard dynamic range.
Checking HDR settings

You can check the settings using Operation
>HDR Setting in the setup menu. For details, see
page 97.
Gamma display assist function

When the HDR(HLG) function is used, the contrast
of the video shown in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor is lower than when using
conventional dynamic range, making the picture
harder to see. In this case, you can adjust the
contrast of the image displayed in the viewfinder
and LCD monitor to an appropriate level using the
gamma display assist function. The gamma display
000
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance

To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the
2 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLACK and Adjusting the White Balance
Iris adjusted using auto iris: Set the automatic/
manual switch on the lens to automatic.
release the switch.
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
The message “Executing…” appears during
Black balance and white balance adjustment
values that are automatically set by the camcorder
execution, and changes to “OK” when the Always readjust the white balance when the 5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHITE and
adjustment finishes. lighting conditions change. then release the switch.
and the various settings are stored in the
camcorder memory and retained even when the
Adjustment values are saved to memory
automatically.
1 Set the switches and selectors as shown
The message “Executing…” appears during
execution, and changes to “OK: (color
power is turned off. below.
temperature of subject)” when the adjustment
[Notes] ˎˎGAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is as finishes.
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the iris is small as possible)
automatically closed. The adjustment values are saved automatically
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM in the memory selected in step 1 (A or B).
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection
Adjusting the Black Balance circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering
on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch: A or B1)
1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only when [Note]
Operation >White Setting >White Switch in the The iris may hunt1) during the adjustment. To prevent
setup menu is set to Memory. this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on
The black balance will require adjustment in the If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be the lens.
following cases.
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used for the first time
made 2 Set the FILTER knob to suit the lighting 1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has not been used for a conditions as follows. the image, resulting from repeated response to
If the black balance adjustment cannot be automatic iris control.
long time completed normally, an error message will appear
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used under conditions for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen. 3 Place a white test card under the same lighting For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
in which the surrounding temperature has conditions as the subject to be shot and zoom
Error message Meaning
changed greatly in on it. If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot
ˎˎWhen the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values NG: Iris not Closed The lens iris did not close; Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth
have been changed with Operation >Gain adjustment was impossible. or a wall can be used.
be made
Switch in the setup menu. NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be The absolute minimum white area is as If the white balance adjustment cannot be
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black completed within the follows. completed normally, an error message will appear
balance when using the camcorder after it has standard number of for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen.
been off. attempts. Rectangle centered on the screen
The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length Error message Meaning
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are If any of the above error messages is displayed, and width of the screen. 10% or more of the NG: Low Light The white video level is too
performed in the following order: black set and retry the black balance adjustment. surface area of the image within the rectangular low. Either open the lens iris or
area must be white.
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment If the error message occurs again, an internal increase the gain.
can be selected from the setup menu. check is necessary. NG: High Light The white video level is too
For information about this internal check, refer to the high. Either stop down the lens
Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in Maintenance Manual (option). iris or change the ND filter.
the following cases. NG: Color Temp. The color temperature of the
[Note]
ˎˎDuring recording High subject lighting is too high,
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
ˎˎDuring special recording modes connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this and could not be adjusted.
ˎˎWhen the shutter mode is SLS happens, the black balance will be incorrect. Adjust the color temperature
[Note]
1 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM. Make sure there are no bright spots in the rectangle.
of the lighting, then update
memory.
4 Adjust the lens iris.

Iris adjusted manually: Set the iris to an
appropriate setting.
000
40 3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
Error message Meaning 2 To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER knob White balance memory
NG: Color Temp. The color temperature of the position number 1, select [ND FLT C.
Low subject lighting is too low, and Temp<1>]. To assign it to positions 2 to 4, Values stored in memory are held until the white
could not be adjusted. Adjust select [ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>]. balance is next adjusted, even if the camcorder
the color temperature of the power is turned off.
NG: Out of Range

lighting, then update memory.
Value could not be adjusted
3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
The camcorder has two white balance memories,
A and B. You can automatically save adjustment
color temperature. values for each ND filter in the memory that
because the difference
between the current value and corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting (A
reference value exceeds the 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required. or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND filters,
adjustment range. allowing you to save a total of eight adjustment
NG: Poor White The white surface of the Switching electrical CC filters with an assignable values (4×2). However, the contents of the
memories are not linked to ND filter settings in the
Area subject is too narrow, and switch following case.
could not be adjusted.
NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be You can assign the function that switches between ˎˎWhen the number of memories allocated to
completed within the specified electrical CC filters to an assignable switch. This each of A and B is limited to one by setting
time. allows you to switch between color temperatures Operation >White Setting >Filter White Memory
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that have been in the setup menu to Off.
If any of the above error messages is displayed, assigned using up to four positions (A to D) with Also, when Operation >White Setting >White
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error each press of the assignable switch. Switch in the setup menu is set to [ATW
message occurs again, an internal check is (Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the WHITE BAL
necessary. 1 Select Maintenance >White Filter in the setup switch is set to B, the ATW function is activated
menu. to automatically adjust the white balance of the
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual. picture being shot for varying lighting conditions.
2 Select the position to which to assign a CC
filter by selecting one of [Electrical CC<A>] to
If you have no time to adjust the white balance [Electrical CC <D>], and then turn the MENU
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. knob to select the desired color temperature.
Select “-----” with Electrical CC<C> or <D>
selected.
Changing the color temperature when the ND When the assignable switch is pressed, the
filter is switched setting for that position is not displayed. For
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then
You can assign electrical CC (color correction) switching between the remaining three
filters to ND filters (page 5) allowing you to positions is carried out.
change the color temperature automatically when
the ND filter is switched.
3 Repeat step 2 as required.
1 Set Maintenance >White Filter >ND Filter C.
Temp to On in the setup menu (page 115).
4 Assign the electrical CC filter switching
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an assignable
switch (page 126).
000
Setting the Electronic Shutter

Shutter Modes ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode ˎˎ The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the
current system frequency.
Setting the shutter speed (ECS mode)
Select this mode for obtaining images with no
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects Switching between Speed mode and Angle mode 1 Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the previous
The shutter modes that can be used with the item).
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can such as monitor screens.
be selected are listed below. As shown in the following tables, the range of 1 Select Operation >Shutter >Mode in the setup 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
shutter speeds that can be set varies depending menu. frequency or number of frames.
[Note]
When a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is
on whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q)
connected, only standard mode (Speed) can be selected. function is on or off. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Speed] or Setting the shutter speed (SLS mode)
System Shutter speed (unit: Hz) [Angle], and then press the knob.
Standard mode frequency S&Q: Off S&Q: On 1 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Setting in the
59.94i 60.00 to 7000 — Setting the shutter mode and shutter speed setup menu and set the shutter mode to On.
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects
with little blurring. 59.94P 60.00 to 8000 60.00 to 8000 (standard mode) 2 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Number of
You can set the shutter speed in one of two 29.97P 30.00 to 8000 30.00 to 8000 Frames in the setup menu and select the
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
shutter modes: Speed mode, in which the speed 23.98P 23.99 to 6000 30.03 to 6000 desired number of frames.
even when the camcorder power is turned off.
is set in seconds, and Angle mode, in which the
speed is set in degrees.
50i
50P
50.00 to 7000
50.00 to 7000
—
50.00 to 7000
1 Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SELECT.
Speed mode The current shutter setting indication appears
25P 25.02 to 7000 30.00 to 7000
in the viewfinder for about three seconds.
System Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
frequency
59.94i 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, SLS (slow speed shutter) mode 2 Before the shutter setting in step 1 disappears,
push the SHUTTER switch down to SELECT
59.94P 1/1000, 1/2000
50i
This mode is used to shoot subjects with low again. Repeat this step until the desired mode
50P illumination. The number of accumulated frames or speed appears.
shot when using the slow speed shutter function When all modes and speeds are displayed, the
29.97P 1/40 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 using Operation display changes in the following order.
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
>Slow Shutter >Number of Frames in the setup Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)
25P 1/33 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, menu.
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
[Notes]
23.98P 1/32 a), 1/48 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/96, 1/100, ˎˎ SLS mode cannot be used when the camcorder is in Slow ECS Mode
1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, & Quick Motion mode.
ˎˎ It is not possible to turn the SLS mode on or off, or change [Note]
1/2000
the number of accumulated frames when recording. Depending on the frame rate setting (page 52), some
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick Motion
a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is in
mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest selectable
Slow & Quick Motion mode and Operation >Rec Function
shutter speed.
>Frame Rate in the setup menu is set to a value that is
greater than the system frequency.
Setting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Example when shooting in XAVC-I 1080P/29.97P,
frame rate of 60, and Slow & Quick Motion:
Angle mode
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, 11.25°
Speed ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: Off
1/401/501/601/100…
ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: On
[Notes]
1/601/100…
ˎˎ When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the
shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field.
000
Setting Auto Iris

The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
Convergence
level
Description 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the reference
value.
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blown- –99 Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more The shaded parts indicate the
out highlights. [Note]
darker Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not
area of light detection.
±0 Reference level ECS.
+99 Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more If you select Var, the following items become
lighter The current reference value is shown by the iris effective and you can set the window of the
Setting the Auto Iris Operating Mode position indicator (page 16) on the desired size. Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Var
viewfinder screen. Width, Iris Var Height, Iris Var, Iris Var H Position,
ˎˎTo open the iris slightly, turn the MENU and Iris Var V Position in the setup menu.
Set the operating mode used when adjusting
knob counterclockwise as seen from the
levels using auto iris.
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Mode in the
Setting the auto iris speed front of the camcorder.
Select one of +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, or +1.
Item
Iris Var Width
Setting
The width of the window
setup menu. ˎˎTo close the iris slightly, turn the MENU Iris Var Height The height of the window
Set the operating speed when adjusting levels knob clockwise as seen from the front of the Iris Var H The position of the window
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the operating
using auto iris. camcorder. Position in the horizontal direction
mode, then press the knob. 1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Speed in the
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.
Iris Var V The position of the window
setup menu. Position in the vertical direction.
Operating Description The changed reference value is retained until
mode the power of the camcorder is turned off. Even
Backlight Mode for shooting in backlight 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the speed in the if the reference value is changed, it reverts to
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window
selected in step 3 appears.
conditions range –99 (slowest) to +99 (fastest), then press the standard value every time the power is Unless you need to keep this window displayed,
Standard Standard mode the knob. turned on. set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
Spotlight Mode for reducing blown out Indication in the setup menu to Off.
highlights when there are
spotlights centered on a
subject. Changing the Reference Value of the Setting the Auto Iris Detection
Lens Iris Window Reducing the Effect of Bright
Highlights
The reference value for the lens iris can be set
Set the target convergence level for within the following range with respect to the 1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
Indication in the setup menu to On.
auto iris standard value.
ˎˎ+0.25 to +1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1 The current automatic iris window appears on much, leaving the overall image dark, a condition
the viewfinder screen. known as clipped blacks. In such cases, switching
stop further open
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris the clip highlight function on will clip the signal
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Level in the setup
ˎˎ–0.25 to –1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1
stop further closed window on the screen, set to Off. above a certain level, reducing the effects of the
menu. auto iris.
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs. 2 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
Set Operation >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in the
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the level in the
1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Override in the
in the setup menu.
setup menu to On.
range –99 to +99, then press the knob.
setup menu to On.
3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
window appears, and then press the knob.
000
43 3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Auto Iris
Adjusting the Iris Gain on the Lens

Supplied with the PXW-X400KC
1 Set the iris mode switch to the A (auto)

position.
2 Flip off the rubber cap of the iris gain

adjustment trimmer.
3 Turn the iris gain adjustment trimmer using a

screwdriver, or similar object, to adjust the
gain.
Turn clockwise to increase the gain. Turn
counterclockwise to decrease the gain.
Adjust while watching the iris ring on the lens
body.
4 Reattach the rubber cap.

000
Adjusting the Focus

This section describes the focus adjustment when
using the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF. One-push Auto Focus
[Note]
The lens is designed with an extra margin at the infinity Press the PUSH AF button. The auto focus activates
position (∞), to compensate for focus drifting due to temporarily.
variations in temperature. When shooting a subject at infinity
in MF or Full MF mode, check the picture in the viewfinder The one-push auto focus stops when the subject
as you focus. comes into focus.
Adjusting in Full MF Mode MF Assist Function

When you slide the focus ring back (toward the When the MF assist function is on (page 125),
camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF mode auto focus is activated after you stop focusing
for full manual focus adjustment. using the focus ring and provides fine control
adjustment of the focus of the subject in the
[Note]
When you slide the focus ring back, the focus instantly center of the display (focus tracking).
moves to the marker position. When fine adjustment stops, the MF assist auto
focus operation ends.
Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the
viewfinder.
The distance indications on the ring are valid in
Full MF mode. The distances where the picture is Adjusting in AF Mode
in focus correspond to absolute positions of the
focus ring.
When you slide the focus ring forward and set
the FOCUS switch to A (auto), the focus mode
Peaking becomes AF mode, in which auto focus is available
You can turn the PEAKING knob on the viewfinder continuously.
to use the peaking function. Edges are emphasized The distance indications on the ring are invalid in
in the monitor picture, which facilitates manual AF mode.
focusing.
The recorded video signals are not affected.
Using Macro Mode

Using the Focus Ring When the focus mode is MF or AF, set the MACRO
switch to the ON position to enable macro mode.
Adjust the focus by turning the focus ring while Macro mode allows you to adjust the focus over a
viewing the viewfinder. range that includes the macro area.
The distance indications on the ring are invalid in Macro mode is disabled in Full MF mode.
MF mode.
000
Adjusting the Audio Level

When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO,
the input levels of analog audio signals recorded
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) Manually Adjusting the Audio Level
[Note]
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL knob and LEVEL
corresponding to the channel(s) selected in (CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the LEVEL (CH1/CH2)
on each channel are adjusted automatically. You
can also make manual adjustments.
step 1 to MANUAL. of the MIC IN Connector knobs are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2
cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH1/
[Note]
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the input
3 With the LEVEL knob(s) for the channel(s)
1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es)
CH2) knobs before adjusting the MIC LEVEL knob.
levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted automatically. selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio
level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal to FRONT.
input volume.
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the
Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4
Target Audio Level for Manual Selecting the knob used for adjusting the desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to
Adjustment recording level MANUAL.

1 Select the audio recorded on audio channels 3
and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4 switches.
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL knob, and adjust so that
CH3 switch Channel 3 recording target
can select which audio level control controls the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
the audio recording level of the input to each normal input volume. FRONT Front microphone audio
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of
of the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level is
excessive.
correspondences between the settings of the Selecting the knob used for adjusting the CH1 connector
menu items and the controls are as follows. WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio
Excessive input level recording level
[Note]
If an AES/EBU digital audio signal is input, the recording level In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you CH4 switch Channel 4 recording target
cannot be adjusted using the camcorder.
can select which audio level control controls the FRONT Front microphone audio
audio recording level of the front microphone REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level
input. The correspondences between the settings CH2 connector
Setting Knob of the menu items and the controls are as follows. WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio
Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level
Front MIC LEVEL knob Setting Knob
Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob
2 To adjust automatically, set the AUDIO SELECT
Target input level knob (linked operation) CH 3-4 switch to AUTO.
Front MIC LEVEL knob
To adjust manually, set the AUDIO SELECT CH
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL 3-4 switch to MANUAL.
knob (linked operation)
Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels Setting
Side2
Knob
LEVEL (CH2) knob MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level 3 Select the knobs that adjust the audio levels
of the Audio Inputs from the AUDIO Front MIC LEVEL knob Setting Knob
with the Audio CH3 Level and Audio CH4 Level
items under Maintenance >Audio in the setup
IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked operation)
Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob menu.
Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording level
1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN [Note]
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs
knob (linked operation) Setting Knob
CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH1 and MIC LEVEL knob linked together, if the MIC LEVEL knob Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob
or CH2 switch to REAR. is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be
To adjust both input signals, set both switches recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL knob before Front MIC LEVEL knob
to REAR. adjusting the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs.
000
46 3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Audio Level
Setting Knob
Front+Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording level

Setting Knob
Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob
Front+Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
You can now adjust the levels of audio

channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected here.
000
Setting Time Data

Setting the Timecode To make the timecode consecutive To reset the value to 00 00 00 00, press the
RESET/RETURN button.
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
The timecode setting range is from 00:00:00:00 to R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the 5 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or
23:59:59:29 (hours:minutes:seconds:frames). media normally produces consecutive timecode. R-RUN, corresponding to the desired operating
However, once you remove the media and record
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch on another media, the timecode will no longer
mode for the timecode generator.
the display in the LCD monitor to status be consecutive when you use the original media
display. User bit memory function
again for recording.
In this case, to make the timecode consecutive, set The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
2 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC. the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN. automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.
3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to Saving the real time in the timecode
PRESET.
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.

CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode. The
time of the camcorder internal clock is applied as
Synchronizing the Timecode to an
The first (leftmost) digit of the timecode
flashes.
the real time. External Source
For details about adjusting the internal clock, see “Setting the
Date and Time of the Internal Clock” (page 26).
5 Use the up and down arrow buttons to You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
change values, and use the left and right arrow To next camcorder
buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat generator. You can also synchronize the timecode
until all digits are set. generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the
To reset the value to 00:00:00:00, press the Setting the User Bits internal generator of this camcorder.
[1]
[2]
VIDEO OUT connector
TC OUT connector
RESET/RETURN button. 1 Connect both the reference video signal and [3] TC IN connector
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal the external timecode as illustrated below. [4] GENLOCK IN connector
6 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or digits), you can record user information such as Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run (timecode generator keeps
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.
signal 2 Turn on the POWER switch.
running)
R-RUN: Recording run (timecode generator
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch 3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
the display in the LCD monitor to status PRESET.
runs only while recording)
display.
[Note]
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.
When Picture Cache Rec mode is active, time data cannot be
set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set 2 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT. [1] [2] External timecode
time data, turn Picture Cache Rec mode off. 5 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
Reference video signal
Switching between DF and NDF The first (leftmost) digit flashes. 6 Supply a timecode signal and a reference
[1] GENLOCK IN connector
video signal, complying with the SMPTE
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or
non-drop frame (NDF) mode using Maintenance 4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to [2] TC IN connector
standard and in proper phase relationship, to
>Timecode >DF/NDF in the setup menu. change values, and use the left and right arrow the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN
buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
connector, respectively.
until all digits are set. camcorders with one camcorder as reference
This operation synchronizes the internal
000
48 3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Time Data
timecode generator with the external

timecode. Once about ten seconds have
elapsed after the timecode locks, the external
lock state is maintained even if the external
timecode source is disconnected.
To release the external synchronization, first

stop the external timecode input, then set the
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the external
timecode and the time data display will show the value of
the external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds
until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.
ˎˎ If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the
camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. If this occurs,
the timecode will not acquire successful lock with the
external timecode.
User bit settings during synchronization

When the timecode is synchronized to an external
signal, only the time data is synchronized with the
external timecode value.
Note on changing the power supply from the

battery pack to an external power supply during
external synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack. You may lose
timecode external synchronization if you remove
the battery pack first.
Camcorder genlock during external

synchronization
During external synchronization, the camcorder is
genlocked to the reference video signal input from
the GENLOCK IN connector.
000
49 4. Shooting
Basic Operations
This section explains the basic shooting and
recording procedures.
9 Do one of the following to start recording.
normal speed. The clip is played to the end,
then Rec Review ends and the camcorder Playing Recorded Clips
–– Press the REC START button (page 4).
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera returns to Stby mode.
–– Press the VTR button on the lens.
system to verify that it is operating properly. When the Rec Review function is assigned to
1 Attach a fully charged battery pack
–– Turn on the assignable switch to which the
Rec function has been assigned (page 124).
the RET button on the lens, you can also 1 Insert the SxS memory card to play
conduct a review by using the RET button. (page 31).
(page 23).
2 Load one or two SxS memory cards

During recording, the TALLY indicators, the
tally indicator on the front panel of the 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue recording. 2 Press the PREV button (page 8) or the F REV
viewfinder, and the REC indicator on the With each repetition, another clip is created on button (page 7) to cue up the clip to play.
(page 31).
viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and the memory card.
If you load two cards, the camcorder switches
automatically to the second card when the focus as required. Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 3 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
first card becomes full. [Notes]
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the
ˎˎ Never remove the battery pack while the camcorder playback picture appears in the viewfinder.
3 Set the camcorder’s POWER switch

is recording (while the ACCESS indicator on the
right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS indicator Seamless playback
(page 3) to ON. in the card slot section is lit in orange). Doing so [Notes]
risks the loss of several seconds of data before
ˎˎ You cannot resume recording for about one second after Seamless playback across clip boundaries is
4 Make the following settings.
the recording was interrupted, because internal
processing will not end normally.
stopping recording.
ˎˎ The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
supported if each clip recorded on an SxS PRO+,
Marker display: On (page 100) ˎˎ The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD, one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has SxS PRO X, or XQD-G series memory card has the
Iris: Auto (page 42) NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do not function enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600 clips following status.
during recording.
Zoom: Auto have been recorded, no further recording is possible. ˎˎVideo format is XAVC-I/XAVC-L and clip length is
Camera output: Select the picture currently ˎˎ Clips shorter than 2 seconds cannot be created. 4 seconds or longer
being shot (camera picture), and turn the 10 To stop recording, perform one of the For example, even if recording is started and then stopped
within 2 seconds, the recording continues for a duration ˎˎVideo format is MPEG HD and clip length is 2
DCC function on (page 6) operations listed in step 9. of 2 seconds. Also, if recording is started, immediately seconds or longer
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free Run) or The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on the stopped, and then restarted within 2 seconds of the initial [Notes]
R-RUN (Rec Run) (page 47) front panel of the viewfinder, and the REC recording start, two clips are created.
ˎˎ For SxS-1 cards, double the length described above is
Audio input channel selection: Auto indicator on the viewfinder screen go out, and ˎˎ The maximum continuous recording time spanning required.
several memory cards is 24 hours. When 24 hours have
(page 9) camcorder enters recording standby (Stby) ˎˎ Seamless playback not supported for SD cards.
elapsed, recording stops.
mode.
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the BLACK
A clip is created from the video and audio data
Clip names Pausing playback
and the metadata recorded between steps 9
position to adjust the black balance Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
and 10. Eight-character clips names (consisting of a
(page 39). The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is
four-character prefix and a four-digit number) are
To review the recording (rec review) paused.
6 Select a filter according to the lighting
generated automatically for clips recorded by this
camcorder.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
conditions, and adjust the white balance With the camcorder in recording standby Example: ABCD0001
(page 39). mode, press an assignable switch assigned You can also use Operation >Clip >Title Prefix High-speed playback
with the Rec Review function to play back the in the setup menu to set the clip name prefix
7 Point the camcorder at the subject, and adjust last two seconds of the clip at normal speed. to a user-specified string of characters (four to
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV
button (page 7).
the focus and zoom. Press and hold an assignable switch assigned 46 characters in length). (A user-specified prefix
with the Rec Review function for one second To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
cannot be changed after recording.)
8 If you are using the electronic shutter, select an or longer to start play back from the frame two
seconds prior to the last frame at four times
The four-digit number at the end of clip names is
PAUSE button.
appropriate shutter mode and speed generated automatically, incrementing as clips are
(page 41). speed in the reverse direction. Then, release recorded.
the button to play the clip from that point at
000
50 4. Shooting: Basic Operations
Stopping playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 83) appears in
the viewfinder.
Playback also stops and the timecode screen
appears in the viewfinder when you start
recording during playback, and when you eject an
SxS memory card.
Switching between memory cards

When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button (page 31) to select the
active slot.
It is not possible to switch between memory cards
during playback.
000
51 4. Shooting
Advanced Operations
Recording Shot Marks Recording Retroactive Images 4 Turn the MENU knob to select the Picture Device operation when recording in Picture Cache
Cache Rec time setting, then press the knob. Rec mode
(Picture Cache Rec Function) The options will vary depending on the
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are recording format and system frequency The recording procedure is essentially the same,
available. You can record them at user-specified settings. See “Picture Cache Rec Mode except for the following points where operation
positions to make it easier for editors to cue up The camcorder always maintains a cache of video
Settings” (page 165) in the Appendix. varies from normal.
those positions. and audio data for a set interval (maximum of
ˎˎIf recording is started while accessing media,
The maximum number of shot marks per clip is 15 seconds) in internal storage memory when
Once Picture Cache Rec mode is selected, it is the actual start point of recording may be
999. shooting, allowing you to record several seconds
maintained until the settings are changed. delayed even longer than the set Picture Cache
of footage before the start of recording.
You can also use the Thumbnail menu to add and delete shot Alternatively, instead of performing steps 1 and 2, Rec time. The delay increases with the number
For details about the video formats supported for
marks in clips. For details, see “Adding/Deleting Essence Marks in you can also select Picture Cache Rec mode using of recorded clips, so stopping recording and
Clips” (page 87). this function, see “Special Recording Support by
an assignable switch (page 124) which has been quickly restarting recording should be avoided
Recording Format” (page 164).
assigned with the Picture Cache Rec function. in Picture Cache Rec mode.
To record shot marks, turn on an assignable switch [Notes] ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
To start recording in Picture Cache Rec mode,
assigned with the Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Picture RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN
Picture Cache Rec mode and the storage time of
function. Cache Rec, can be used at any one time. mode.
images in memory (Picture Cache Rec time) must If another special recording mode is enabled while Picture
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or ˎˎIn Picture Cache Rec mode, time data cannot be
be set beforehand in the Operation menu. Cache Rec is in use, Picture Cache Rec is automatically
“Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the viewfinder set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch
When recording is started, the duration of footage released.
for about three seconds near the timecode ˎˎ Changing system settings, such as the video format,
to SET.
that can be recorded retroactively is determined
indicator. clears all images stored in memory. Consequently, images To set time data, first stop Picture Cache Rec
by the Picture Cache Rec time. The duration that shot just before changing settings cannot be recorded, if mode.
[Note] can be recorded retroactively may be reduced recording is started immediately after changing settings.
An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the MEAD-SD02 ˎˎIf the remaining recording time of the media
in some circumstances, as described in [Notes] Picture Cache Rec mode is automatically released.
Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for recording. in the currently selected slot is shorter than the
below. ˎˎ The Picture Cache Rec time cannot be set during
recording. Picture Cache Rec time, images are recorded
[Notes] to the media (if there is sufficient remaining
ˎˎ The storage of video in memory starts when Picture Cache
Rec mode is selected. However, if recording is started Starting Picture Cache Rec recording recording time) in the non-selected slot.
Setting Clip Flags immediately after selecting this mode, a portion of the However, images are not recorded if there is no
media in the non-selected slot or if the media
images shot immediately prior to selecting Picture Cache Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
Rec mode will not be recorded. (page 49). in the slot has insufficient remaining recording
To make it easier for editors to select good clips, ˎˎ Images are not stored in memory during playback, time. (A message notifying you that there
you can set clip flags in recorded clips. recording review, or thumbnail display, so recording of
When recording starts, the “Cache” indication in is insufficient remaining recording time will
images during these periods is not supported.
Clip flags are set in the Thumbnail menu. For the viewfinder changes to the “Rec” indication. appear on the viewfinder screen.)
details, see “Adding Clip Flags to Clips” (page 87) The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on ˎˎShot marks are not recorded, even if the
and “Deleting a Clip Flag” (page 87). Setting the Picture Cache Rec time the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do shot marks are set before the recording start
[Note]
An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the MEAD-SD02
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Picture
during normal recording. operation.
Cache Rec in the setup menu.
Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for recording. To exit, stop the recording. If the camcorder is turned off during recording
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press Canceling Picture Cache Rec mode ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
the knob. to the OFF position, the media is accessed for
In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec several seconds to record the images stored
3 Select Operation >Rec Function > Cache Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu in memory up till that moment, and then the
power turns off automatically.
Time in the setup menu. to Off.
ˎˎIf the battery is removed, the DC cable
disconnected, or the AC adaptor turned off
000
52 4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
during recording, the video and audio data allows you to record pictures under stable light [Notes] [Note]
stored in memory is erased, and images up till and color temperature conditions. ˎˎ If you want to turn the video light on before the start Restarting the camcorder automatically releases Interval Rec
of recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to mode.
that point are not recorded. Care should be [Notes] AUTO. The video light switch must also be turned on.
exercised when exchanging the battery. ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Interval Rec When this is done, the video light turns on and off
recording, can be used at any one time. automatically. However, the video light remains lit if Limitations during recording
If another special recording mode is enabled while the time that it would be off is five seconds or less.
Interval Rec is in use, for example, Interval Rec is ˎˎ If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and turn the ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
automatically released. video light switch on, the video light is always lit. (The RUN switch, the advance mode of the internal
Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval ˎˎ Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during recording. video light does not turn on and off automatically.) timecode generator is always R-RUN.
Rec Function) Setting Interval Rec The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is
ˎˎAudio is not recorded.
ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
powered off, but the number of frames, interval possible.
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows you 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Interval Rec time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained. You
do not need to set them again the next time you
ˎˎGenlock is not possible.
to capture time-lapse video to the camcorder’s in the setup menu.
internal memory. This function is an effective way shoot in Interval Rec mode. If the camcorder is turned off during recording
to shoot slow-moving subjects.
When you start recording, the camcorder
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
Starting Interval Rec recording ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
the knob.
automatically records a specified number of to the OFF position, the media is accessed for
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, and Make the settings and preparations described
frames at a specified interval time. several seconds to record the images stored
“Int Stby” appears at the REC indicator position in “Basic Operations” (page 49), secure the
This function is enabled when the camcorder is set in memory up till that moment, and then the
on the viewfinder screen. (The green tally camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
to any of the following video formats (page 35). power turns off automatically.
indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also shooting.
XAVC-I ˎˎIf power is lost because the battery was
flashes.)
XAVC-L removed, the DC power cord was disconnected,
MPEG HD 422 When Interval Rec mode is set to On, “Int Stby” or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor
3 Select [Number of Frames], turn the MENU appears at the REC position on the viewfinder side, then the video and audio data shot up to
Recording interval (Interval Time) knob to select the number of frames to record screen. When you start recording, “Int Rec” and that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds).
in one take, and then press the knob. “Int Stby” are displayed alternately. The TALLY Care should be exercised when exchanging the
You can select 2, 6, or 12 when the format is indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel battery.
50P or 59.9P. of the viewfinder light as they do during normal
You can select 1, 3, 6, or 9 when the format is recording. (The green tally indicator in the HDVF
23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i. series viewfinder also flashes at high speed.)
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the video
Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion
4 Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU knob to light comes on before recording starts.
select the desired interval, and then press the
knob. To exit, stop the recording. You can specify a recording frame rate that is
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec, 1 When shooting ends, the video data stored in different from the playback frame rate.
to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, or 1 to 4/6/12/24 memory up to that point is written to the media. [Note]
hour. When shooting in XAVC recording format, use SxS PRO+
Canceling Interval Rec mode type SxS memory cards.
Number of frames in one take 5 As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn the Do one of the following.
(Number of Frames) MENU knob to select the length of lighting ˎˎSet the POWER switch to OFF.
time before recording starts, and then press ˎˎIn recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
A pre-lighting function is available when Interval the knob.
Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu to Off.
You can select 2, 5, 10 seconds, or Off.
on the video light before recording starts, which
000
Recording
format
System frequency S&Q frame rate When you finish making these settings, the system
frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of
ˎˎAudio cannot be recorded when the recording
and playback frame rates differ.
the knob.
XAVC-I 1080P 59.94P/50P 1 FPS to 60 FPS the viewfinder screen. You can change the frame ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not “Cont Stby” appears in the viewfinder, and the
/29.97P/23.98P (1 FPS units) rate while viewing the display in the viewfinder by possible.
function is enabled.
/25P turning the MENU knob. ˎˎIf you change the recording frame rate to a
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the value faster than the current shutter speed, the [Notes]
XAVC-L 50 59.94P/50P/ ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Clip
1080P 29.97P/23.98P/ frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is shutter speed is changed to the slowest value
Continuous Rec, can be used at any one time.
25P powered off. for which shooting is possible. ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while Clip
[Notes] Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter Continuous Rec is in use, for example, the currently
XAVC-L 35 59.94P/50P
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Slow & Quick speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to selected mode is automatically released.
1080P /29.97P/23.98P
25P
Motion, can be used at any one time. 55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60.
ˎˎ If another special recording function is enabled while It is not possible to select a shutter speed that is You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off
HD422 50 29.97P 1 FPS to 30 FPS using Slow & Quick Motion, Slow & Quick Motion is function to one of the ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches,
slower than the recording frame rate.
1080P a) 23.98P (1 FPS units) automatically canceled.
ˎˎGenlock is not possible. ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, or the ONLINE button.
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording,
25P 1 FPS to 25 FPS playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed. For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
(1 FPS units) ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set if the slow shutter (page 124).
function is set.
a) Supported for exFAT and UDF files systems. Only exFAT is
supported for other recording formats.
Starting Slow & Quick Motion recording Recording with the Clip Continuous Starting Clip Continuous Rec recording
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
Rec Function Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
the playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and (page 49).
(page 49).
quick motion effects that are smoother than low- Normally, a clip is created as an independent file When recording starts, the “Cont Stby” indication
speed or high-speed playback of content recorded each time that you start and stop recording. But in the viewfinder changes to “Cont Rec”
When recording starts, the “S&Q Stby” indication
at the normal frame rate. this function allows you to start and stop recording indication.
in the viewfinder changes to the “S&Q Rec”
while continuously recording to the same clip, for The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally
Setting Slow & Quick Motion indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as long as the function remains enabled. This is the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do
convenient when you do not want to generate a during normal recording.
as they do during normal recording.
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick
To exit, stop the recording.
large number of short clips, and when you want [Note]
During recording or in recording standby mode (when
Motion in the setup menu. to record without worrying about exceeding the
clip limit. “Cont Stby” indication is displayed), if you remove the media,
[Note] the battery, or the power source, the media needs to be
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when the
frame rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).
It is still easy to find recording start points, because
a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the
restored. It is not possible to restore media on a device other
than this camcorder.
the knob.
recording start point each time you start recording. Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (page 54) and then remove
Slow & Quick Motion starts, and “S&Q Stby”
appears in the recording status indicator area
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode This function is enabled when the camcorder is set the media.
When “Cont Stby” indication is flashing (once per second),
to any of the following video formats (page 35).
in the viewfinder. With the camcorder in recording standby mode, you can remove the media.
XAVC-I
Next, set the frame rate. set Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick in the XAVC-L To exit, stop the recording.
setup menu to Off. MPEG HD 422
3 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick [Note]
Motion >Frame Rate in the setup menu. Limitations during recording Setting Clip Continuous Rec Stop the recording after recording for two or more seconds.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select the frame rate, ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-
RUN switch, the advance mode of the internal 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Clip
then press the knob. Continuous Rec in the setup menu.
timecode generator is always R-RUN.
000
Canceling Clip Continuous Rec mode Operation >Format

>Rec Format in the
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup
2 Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 49).
With the camcorder in recording standby mode, setup menu menu
set Operation >Rec Function >Clip Continuous [Notes]
XAVC-L 50 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not possible if either of the
Rec in the setup menu to Off. 1920×1080P media is defective or if the media is write protected.
XAVC-L 50 59.94/50 ˎˎ During simultaneous recording, if either of the media
Limitations during recording 1920×1080i becomes full or an error occurs and recording cannot
continue, recording to that media stops but recording to
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P 59.94/50 the other media continues.
A single continuous clip cannot be created if you
perform one of the following operations while the XAVC-L 35 1080P 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
camcorder is in recording or recording standby XAVC-L 35 1080i 59.94/50 To exit, stop the recording.
mode. (A new clip will be created when you next XAVC-L 25 1080i 59.94/50
start recording.) HD 422 50 1080P 29.97/25/23.98 Canceling Simul Rec mode
ˎˎOperate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip) HD 422 50 1080i 59.94/50 In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec
ˎˎSwitch slots
HD 422 50 720P 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98 Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu to Off.
ˎˎChange the recording format
HQ 1920×1080P 29.97/25/23.98
ˎˎTurn off the POWER switch
ˎˎPlayback HQ 1920×1080i 59.94/50
ˎˎSwitch to the thumbnail screen HQ 1440×1080i 59.94/50
HQ 1280×720P 59.94/50
Recording Video Simultaneously to Setting Simul Rec

Two SxS Memory Cards (Simul Rec) 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Simul Rec in
the setup menu.
When the video format (page 35) is set to one of
the options in the following table, you can record 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
the same video to two SxS memory cards. This the knob.
function is useful for making a video backup while
[Notes]
shooting.
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Simul Rec,
[Notes] can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ It is recommended that both SxS memory cards be ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while using
formatted (initialized) using the camcorder before use. Simul Rec, Simul Rec is automatically released.
ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not supported when the file ˎˎ Simul Rec cannot be set during recording, playback, or
system is UDF. while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎˎ SD cards cannot be used.
Operation >Format Operation >Format Starting Simul Rec recording
>Rec Format in the >Frequency in the setup
setup menu menu 1 Insert SxS memory cards in both memory slots
XAVC-I 1920×1080P 59.94/59/29.97/25/23.98 A and B.
XAVC-I 1920×1080i 59.94/50 The ACCESS indicators for SxS slots A and B are
XAVC-I 1280×720P 59.94/50
lit. Also, icons for SxS slots A and B appear in
the viewfinder (page 18).
000
55 4. Shooting
Proxy Data
Proxy data is made up of low-resolution video data
(H.264) and audio data (AAC-LC). This lightweight
indicator for the PROXY SD card slot is not lit,
then turn off the camcorder or turn off the proxy
1 Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode Recording Proxy Data
>Setting in the setup menu.
proxy data can be used in the same way as the recording/wireless LAN connection function.
original data, but it can be transferred more To turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN
quickly, for more efficient viewing and editing. connection function, make the following 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
To record proxy data simultaneously
During clip recording, proxy data is recorded onto settings in the setup menu. the knob.
the SD card inserted into the PROXY SD card slot. - Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode You can record proxy data to an SD card
>Setting to Off. 3 Select Operation >Format Media >SD simultaneously as the recording to SxS memory
- Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to Off. Card(Proxy) in the setup menu. cards.
ˎˎAttempting to remove the SD card while either
the proxy recording or wireless LAN connection 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
1 Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
function is enabled may display a warning >Setting in the setup menu.
press the knob.
(E91-1C0) in some cases. If the warning appears A confirmation screen prompting whether to
while recording, data is still recorded correctly format the card appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press
to the SxS memory cards, but proxy files are not the knob.
PROXY SD card slot recorded. The warning message can be cleared
by turning the camcorder off and then on again. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
3 Insert an SD card for recording proxy data into
press the knob.
ˎˎProxy recording will not start if Picture Cache the PROXY SD card slot.
Rec, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, or Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message and progress
By importing proxy data recorded on the SD
streaming is enabled.
state (%) is displayed and the ACCESS indicator 4 Start recording.
card into a computer, you can quickly check the is lit orange. The proxy data file is saved in the “/PRIVATE/
recorded content or perform rapid offline editing. When formatting ends, a completion message PXROOT/Clip” directory of the SD card at the
You can record proxy data not only simultaneously appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the same time as the original data is being
when recording on SxS memory cards, but also SD Cards message. recorded onto an SxS memory card.
independently from recording to SxS memory Proxy data recording automatically stops when
[Note]
cards. Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card you stop recording.
SD cards supported for recording proxy data cannot be restored.
To record proxy data separately from recording
ˎˎSDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher, Checking the remaining recording capacity original data
Proxy Recording using the Camcorder non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
You can check the remaining capacity on an SD
ˎˎSDXC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher, You can record proxy data to an SD card
non-UHS, Capacity: 64 GB to 256 GB) card on the Media Status screen (page 14). independent of the SxS memory cards.
ˎˎWhen recording simultaneously, proxy * Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
[Notes]
recording will not start unless an SxS memory To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in ˎˎ If simultaneous proxy recording is started while recording
card is inserted. Formatting (initializing) SD cards
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has been turned on for
the slot of another device proxy data independently is in progress, the proxy data
recording continues without interruption. Subsequently,
about 35 seconds, the icon (media status SD cards must be formatted the first time they are when simultaneous recording is stopped, proxy data
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the
indicator for Proxy SD slot) turns on in the LCD used in the camcorder. recording also stops.
card in the device to be used.
monitor and viewfinder screen to indicate that SD cards for use in the camcorder should be ˎˎ Proxy recording cannot be stopped independently during
simultaneous proxy recording.
proxy recording is enabled. formatted using the format function of the
If you start shooting while the icon is camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card
flashing or is not lit, proxy files are not recorded. is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card. Proxy recording limitations
ˎˎBefore removing an SD card from the
Proxy recording is not supported in the following
camcorder, always check that the ACCESS
cases.
000
56 4. Shooting: Proxy Data
ˎˎDuring streaming (Maintenance >Streaming When there is insufficient remaining capacity on

>Setting in the setup menu set to On)
ˎˎDuring Interval Rec (Operation >Rec Function
an SD card
>Interval Rec in the setup menu set to On)
A warning is displayed to indicate that there is
ˎˎDuring Picture Cache Rec (Operation >Rec insufficient free space.
Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu
is set to On)
ˎˎDuring Slow & Quick Motion (Operation >Rec
Changing proxy recording settings
Function >Slow & Quick Motion in the setup Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Size
menu set to On) and Audio Channel in the setup menu to change
ˎˎWhen network client mode is enabled the settings for the size of the proxy recording
(Maintenance >Network Client Mode format and the audio channel for proxy recording,
>Setting in the setup menu is set to On) and respectively.
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset
1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the [Note]
When Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size in the setup
setup menu is set to Disable. menu is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) and the
ˎˎWhen Operation >Format >Frequency in the system frequency is set to 29.97 or 25, the proxy data picture
setup menu is set to 23.98P and Operation size will be set to 1920×1080 even if the picture size of the
>Proxy Recording Mode >Size is set to HD recording video format is set to 1280×720.
Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps)
ˎˎWhen power is being supplied to the external Checking proxy recording settings
device connector (Operation >USB in the setup
menu). Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Frame
ˎˎThe maximum number of clips that can be Rate and Bit Rate in the setup menu to view the
recorded is 600. settings for the video frame rate and video bit rate,
respectively.
About the recorded files
ˎˎThe file name extension is “.mp4”.
ˎˎThe timecode is also recorded simultaneously.
ˎˎA still image of the first frame is also recorded
simultaneously.
ˎˎLocation information and a Log file are recorded
simultaneously if the GPS function is enabled.
The Log file is saved in “Root/PRIVATE/SONY/
GPS.”
Canceling proxy data recording

Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in
the setup menu to Off.
000
57 4. Shooting
Planning Metadata
Planning metadata is information about shooting
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.
“Sort by” setting
Date/Time (9-0)
Sort order
Sort the file list in
Item
Modified
Information
Date and time of most recent
Defining Clip Names in Planning
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
descending order in the modification Metadata
Date/Time column Modified by Name of person who
file. (newest creation date at modified the file
You can send and receive planning metadata the top). The following two types of clip name strings can
using the “Content Browser Mobile” application. Title Title1 specified in file (ASCII be written in a planning metadata file.
format clip name)
[Note] ˎˎAn ASCII format name that appears in the
Use a font set that is compatible with the language set using 4 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load Title2 Title2 specified in file (UTF-8 viewfinder
Maintenance >Language in the setup menu when defining and press the knob. format clip name) ˎˎA UTF-8 format name that is actually registered
clip names and shot mark names. Using fonts for a language as the clip name
that is different from the language setting on the camcorder Material Group Number of material groupsa)
may cause characters to be displayed abnormally. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Load] and press
Shot Mark0 to Names defined in file for Shot You can select which type of clip name is
the knob, then select [Execute] and press the Shot Mark9 Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9 displayed with Operation >Planning Metadata
knob again.
>Clip Name Disp in the setup menu.
[Note] a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with the When a clip name is set with planning metadata,
Loading a Planning Metadata File Planning metadata files can be loaded from SDXC cards same planning metadata.
the clip name is displayed.
using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor. However, data
into Camcorder Memory when cannot be loaded from SDHC/SD cards. You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the list. [Note]
When you define both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8
Recording a Clip format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8 format
string is used as the clip name string. If you define either an
ASCII format name or a UTF-8 format name with planning
1 Save the planning metadata file on an SxS

Displaying Detailed Information in Clearing the Loaded Planning metadata, the defined format name is displayed though it is
not selected by menu setting.
memory card beforehand. Planning Metadata Metadata
Planning metadata files are stored in the
“General/Sony/Planning” directory.
After loading planning metadata into the
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Clear
2 Insert an SxS memory card in slot A or B.
camcorder, you can check the detailed information
that it contains, such as file names, date and time Memory in the setup menu.
of creation, and titles.
3 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Load
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and
from Media(A) or Load from Media(B) in the then press the knob.
setup menu. >Properties in the setup menu.
Deletion starts.
A file list screen appears. When the deletion ends, the following
Up to 512 planning metadata files are 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and message appears.
displayed in the list. then press the knob. Clear Planning Metadata File
You can change the file list sort order using The planning metadata information is Done
Operation >Planning Metadata > Sort by in the displayed.
menu. Item Information
“Sort by” setting Sort order File Name File name
Date/Time (0-9) Sort the file list in Assign ID Assign ID
ascending order in the Created Date and time of creation
Date/Time column (oldest
creation date at the top).
000
58 4. Shooting: Planning Metadata
Clip name string example name is used.

Defining Shot Mark Names in Title>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the Setting clip names Planning Metadata content="Goal"/>
<Title> tag that contain the clip name strings. <Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
The shaded fields in the example are clip name
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
1 Load a planning metadata file that contains
When you use planning metadata to set shot
content="Shoot"/>
clip names into camcorder memory
(up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is (page 104). marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to content="Corner Kick"/>
described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes). Shot Mark 9. <Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp
“sp” indicates a space and  indicates a carriage
return.
2 Set Operation >Clip >Clip Naming in the setup
When you record shot marks, you can add the
shot mark name strings defined in the planning
content="Free Kick"/>
menu to Plan. metadata. content="Goal Kick"/>
Each time that you record a clip, the
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding=" [Note] <Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp
camcorder automatically generates a name
UTF-8"?> Only Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the content="Foul"/>
consisting of the clip name defined in the
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http:// camcorder. <Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp
planning metadata file, with the addition of an
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ content="PK"/>
underbar (_) and a five-digit serial number
planningmetadata"spassignId="
(00001 to 99999).
Shot mark name string example <Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp
P0001"spcreationDate=" content="1st Half"/>
Examples:Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001, Use a text editor to modify the fields in the <Meta
2016-11-30T17:00:00+09:00"sp <Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002,… After the name> tag.
lastUpdate=" content="2nd Half"/>
number reaches 99999, the next increment The shaded fields in the example are essence mark
2016-12-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp <Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp
returns the number to 00001. name strings. Names can be either in ASCII format
version="1.00"> content="Kick Off"/>
<PropertiessppropertyId=" [Note] (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 </Properties>
assignment"spupdate=" When you load another planning metadata file, the serial characters). </PlanningMetadata>
number continues incrementing. You can change the “sp” indicates a space and  indicates a carriage
2016-12-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp numbering using Operation >Clip >Number Set in the setup [Note]
modifiedBy="Chris"> menu.
return. When you create a definition file, enter each statement
<TitlespusAscii="Typhoon"sp [Note] as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
xml:lang="en">Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo Selecting the clip name display format If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, the
maximum length of that string is 16 characters. specified, except within essence mark name strings.
</Title>
</Properties> When names are defined in both ASCII format and
</PlanningMetadata> UTF-8 format, you can use Operation >Planning <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
Metadata >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to UTF-8"?>
[Notes]
select which of the names to display on the LCD <PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
ˎˎ When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line with a CRLF only after the last character in the monitor and on the viewfinder screen. xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
statement line, and do not enter spaces except where To display ASCII format names: planningmetadata"spassignId="
specified. H00123"spcreationDate="
Select Title1(ASCII).
ˎˎ The following characters cannot be used in clip names. 2016-11-30T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
If they are used, they are replaced by an underscore The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
character (_). Tokyo_SerialNumber”, but “Typhoon_ 2016-11-30T15:00:00Z"spversion=
"*/:<>?\| SerialNumber” is displayed on the screen. "1.00">
ˎˎ Up to 44 bytes (or characters) can be entered for the clip To display UTF-8 format names: <PropertiessppropertyId=
name. "assignment"spclass="original"sp
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, the first 44 Select Title2(UTF-8).
bytes are used as the clip name. The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_ update="2016-11-30T15:00:00Z"sp
If only an ASCII format name is specified, a 44-character Tokyo_SerialNumber”, and the same name is modifiedBy="Chris">
string is used as the clip name. displayed on the screen. <TitlespusAscii="Football
When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8 Game"spxml:lang="en">
format name string can be used, the standard format clip Football Game 30/11/2016</
000
59 4. Shooting
Obtaining Location Information (GPS)

Location and time information of video shot Positioning Display GPS reception state
when positioning is enabled is recorded by the status
camcorder. Positioning A weak GPS signal is
The GPS function is set to Off by factory default. being received.
A GPS signal is being
Supported formats for GPS recording received. Location
information can be
GPS recording is supported in XAVC-I and XAVC-L
acquired.
recording formats.
A strong GPS signal is
When a recording format that does not support
being received. Location
GPS recording is set, location information can
information can be
still be obtained on an SDI output if SDI output is
acquired.
set to On (Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1
Output or SDI Out2 Output set to On). ˎˎIt may take some time to start acquiring location
[Note] information after turning on the camcorder.
Location information is not output when the format is SD ˎˎIf a positioning icon is not displayed after several
SDI. Nor is it output during playback. minutes, there may be a problem with signal
reception. Start shooting without location
1 Check that the camcorder is in standby state. information, or move to an area with a clear
view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning
2 Set Operation >GPS to On in the setup menu. icon is not displayed means that location
information will not be recorded.
is displayed in the viewfinder when the
camcorder is seeking GPS satellites. When ˎˎThe GPS signal may not be received when
positioning is established, location information indoors or near tall structures. Move to a
is recorded when shooting video. location with a clear view of the sky.
ˎˎThe recording of location information may be
The icon displayed in the viewfinder varies, interrupted, depending on the strength of the
depending on the signal reception from the GPS received signal, even if a positioning icon is
satellites. displayed.
Positioning Display GPS reception state

status
Off No display GPS is set to Off or an
error occurred.
Positioning Location information
not could not be obtained
available because GPS signal
could not be received.
Move to a location with
a clear view of the sky.
Searching Searching for GPS
for satellites satellites. Several
minutes may be required
to acquire satellites.
000
60 5. Network Configuration
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder

The camcorder supports various network Connecting to the Internet using a LAN cable Using a modem Using Wi-Fi remote control
functions. This section provides an overview and
detailed description of the network connections Connect the camcorder to the Internet via a router
1 Attach the USB extension adaptor of the
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into
and functions. CBK-NA1 (option).
using the network connector. the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other
(page 65)
Configure a password in order to use network
functions using Access Authentication >Password. 1 Connect the camcorder and router using a
device over a wireless LAN connection.
(page 75)
[Notes]
LAN cable.
(page 65)
2 Connect the modem.
ˎˎ The Access Authentication >Password setting is blank (page 66) Configuring from the web menu
when network functions are used for the first time and
after updating the software to version 5.0 or later from a Connecting to the Internet using wireless LAN The web menu of the camcorder appears when
version prior to version 5.0 or updating to version 6.1 or
the camcorder is accessed from a browser
later from a version prior to version 6.1. Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the
ˎˎ If a password is not configured, the Network menu items IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied), Network Function Overview on a device connected using a wireless LAN
in the setup menu are disabled (grayed out), and network connection.
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or
settings cannot be configured. (page 77)
modem (option).
[Note] Transferring files recorded on the camcorder to a Supported network functions and operating
The CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) is required if
server on the Internet limitations
Network Connection Overview connecting using a CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option)
or modem (option).
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD (page 82)
card and original files recorded on SxS memory
When using the IFU-WLM3 (supplied)
cards to a server on the Internet when connected
Connecting devices using wireless LAN 1 Attach the IFU-WLM3 to the camcorder. via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, wired LAN
(page 61) router.
The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
(page 69)
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
connection using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN 2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Station mode and connect to the Internet. Transmitting streaming video and audio
Adaptor (option). (page 67)
You can transmit the video and audio captured/
1 Select the wireless connection device.
When using the CBK-WA02 (option)
played back with the camcorder via the Internet or
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module local network.
(supplied) (page 61) 1 Attach the CBK-WA02 to the camcorder.
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) (page 61) Streaming using the streaming settings on the camcorder
(page 61) (page 73)
2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
2 Select the wireless LAN access mode. Station mode and connect to the Internet. High-quality streaming using the Connection Control
Wi-Fi Access Point mode (page 62) (page 67) Manager (CCM) of either a Sony Network RX Station
Wi-Fi Station mode (page 63) (option) or C3 Portal
(page 74)
000
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN

The camcorder can connect to smartphones, ˎˎ Streaming is not supported when the video format is set
to MPEG-IMX or DVCAM. Attaching the IFU-WLM3 If not using the IFU-WLM3
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
ˎˎ Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between
connection by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and
Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 close the connector cover.
Wireless LAN Adaptor (option).
device, or the ambient environment (such as wall
materials) could shorten the communication range or 1 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
The following operations can be performed prevent connections altogether. If you experience these module connector.
problems, check the connection/communication status Guard (supplied)
between the camcorder and devices connected
after moving the camcorder to a new location, or bringing
using a wireless LAN. the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer Attaching the CBK-WA02
[Note] together.
USB wireless LAN modules/adaptors other than the IFU-
WLM3 or CBK-WA02 cannot be used. Compatible Devices 1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle
in the position shown in the following
Remote operation via wireless LAN You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer
diagram.
The camcorder can be operated remotely from a to configure and operate the camcorder. The
For attachment of the attachment bracket
smartphone, tablet, or computer that is connected supported devices, OS, and browsers are shown in
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony
using a wireless LAN. the following table.
service representative.
Device OS Browser Attachment bracket
File transfer via wireless LAN
Proxy files (low-resolution files) stored on the
Smartphone Android 11/12 Chrome 2 Attach the protective cap to the IFU-WLM3.
iOS 15.x Safari
camcorder SD card and original files (high-
Tablet Android 10/11 Chrome
resolution files) recorded on the camcorder can be
transferred to a server via a wireless LAN. iPadOS 15.x Safari
Computer Microsoft Chrome
Windows 10/11
Monitoring video via wireless LAN
You can create a stream (H.264) of the camera macOS 12.x Safari
picture or playback picture of the camcorder for
monitoring from a device via wireless LAN using the [Notes]
“Content Browser Mobile” application. ˎˎ The picture may not be depicted correctly, depending on 3 Plug the IFU-WLM3 into the connector.
the version of your browser.
Operation with the following browser versions has been
2 Attach the USB extension adaptor, supplied
“Content Browser Mobile” is an application that verified. with the CBK-WA02 (option), to the
can operate the camcorder remotely on the device Safari: 15 attachment bracket.
screen, while streaming content, and can be used Chrome: 103
to configure the camcorder.
You can also transfer a cutout part of a file by
ˎˎ Playback may not be supported, depending on the
operating system of the terminal device used and the 3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser USB extension adaptor.
specifying In and Out points in the proxy file Mobile.”
(page 70).
Always check that you have the latest version of
the “Content Browser Mobile” application.
For details about the “Content Browser Mobile” application, [Note]
contact your Sony sales or service representative. Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the IFU-WLM3.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Proxy files (low-resolution files) recorded on the SD card in
the camcorder can be streamed via a wireless LAN.
000
62 5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
Fixing screw Guard (supplied) 8 Set the wireless LAN channel in Maintenance Connecting using Wireless LAN
USB extension adaptor >Network >Channel in the setup menu
(page 117). Access Point (Wi-Fi Access Point
For details about using the CBK-WA02, refer to the instruction
manual supplied with the CBK-WA02.
Mode)
[Notes]
The camcorder can connect to devices that are set
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-WA02. up as an access point.
ˎˎ Attaching the CBK-WA02 and selecting Wi-Fi Station in
Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode in the setup menu Computer
enables connection to a 5 GHz access point. Smartphone/
ˎˎ The Ch setting “Auto(5GHz)” in Wi-Fi Access Point mode Tablet
You can adjust the position of the USB 6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension may not be displayed, depending on the CBK-WA02 used.
ˎˎ “Auto(5GHz)” is not displayed in the menu if use of the
extension adaptor over the range shown in the adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module CBK-WA02 in the 5 GHz band is prohibited for outdoor
following diagram. connector. use in your country or region. Check that the use of the
CBK-WA02 is permitted in your country or region. For
details, refer to the CBK-WA02 operation manual.
If not using the CBK-WA02

Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and
close the connector cover.
Install “Content Browser Mobile” on the device

to connect before starting the connection
configuration.
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
[Note]
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor. The default Wi-Fi Access Point password should not be
7 Plug the CBK-WA02 into the USB connector of

used as-is. Use a password generated using the following
procedure.
the USB extension adaptor. 1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Wi-Fi Access
Point.
3 Execute Maintenance >Network >Regenerate Password.
5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN

module connector.
000
One-touch connection using NFC-equipped 5 Touch the device against the camcorder. 5 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi Connecting Using Wireless LAN
devices The device connects to the camcorder, and Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
“Content Browser Mobile” launches. Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
Devices that support NFC can be connected by
one touch using NFC.
6 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
network SSID list, display Option, and select The camcorder can connect to an existing wireless
1 Select [Settings] on the device and enable the WPS Push Button. LAN access point as a client.
[NFC] function. [Note] The device connects via the access point.
The steps will vary depending on the device used. The connection can be established using the
setup menu or the web menu. This section
Connecting using SSID and password on the describes the method using the WPS function in
device the setup menu.
For details about connecting using the web menu,
Connect by entering the SSID and password on see “Connecting to an access point in station
2 Turn the camcorder on, and set Maintenance [Notes] the device. mode without using WPS” (page 79).
For details about connecting using the network
>Network >Setting to On.
ˎˎ Wake a sleeping device and unlock the lock screen
beforehand. 1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. auto detection function or by manual entry, see
ˎˎ Continue to hold the device against the camcorder “Connecting to an Access Point using the Setup
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to without moving it until “Content Browser Mobile”
launches (1 to 2 seconds). 2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Menu” (page 67).
Wi-Fi Access Point. ˎˎ If a device with identical SSID has already been registered, Wi-Fi Access Point.
the device may not be able to be connected, depending
[Note]
4 Activate the NFC function.
on the OS version of the device. In this case, you can
connect the device by deleting the registered SSID from
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable Smartphone/ Computer
Set NFC connection mode by executing access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point) Tablet
the device.
indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or
Maintenance >Network >NFC in the setup
in the viewfinder.
menu or by pressing and holding an Connecting using WPS-equipped devices
assignable switch that has been assigned with
the NFC function for three seconds. Devices that support WPS can be connected using 3 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi
The NFC function can be used only when is WPS. Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
displayed on the screen.
[Note]
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 4 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
network SSID list, then enter a password to
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) for
appear on the screen. Wait until the network “AP” (access
to
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to connect.
Access
point) wireless network indicator (page 18) stops flashing Wi-Fi Access Point. For the camcorder SSID and password, see
on the viewfinder screen. point
[Note] Maintenance >Network >SSID & Password
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable (page 117) in the setup menu.
access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point)
[Note]
indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
in the viewfinder.
3 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the

setup menu.

press the knob.
000
Connecting to an access point using WPS

If an access point supports the WPS function, you
can connect using a basic setting.
1 Turn the access point on.
2 Turn the camcorder on.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
4 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to

Wi-Fi Station.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable
station mode. Wait until the network indicator (page 18)
signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in
the viewfinder.
5 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the

setup menu.

press the knob.
7 Press the access point WPS button.

For details about WPS button operation, refer
to the instruction manual for the access point.
When the connection is successful, the
network indicator (page 18) signal strength
icon will show a strength of 1 or higher on the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
[Note]
If the connection fails, perform the procedure again from
step 1.
8 Connect the device to the access point.

For details about how to connect, refer to the
instruction manual for each device.
000
Connecting to the Internet

You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN
or wireless LAN.
For details, see “Limitations on Simultaneous Use
of Network Functions” (page 82).
1 Connect the network connector of the Preparation for Connection to the
camcorder and a router using a LAN cable.
For wired LAN, connect a LAN cable (not supplied)
to the network connector on the camcorder, and
Internet Using a Modem
connect to the Internet via a router.
For wireless LAN, connect to the Internet using the Connecting Using a LAN Cable You can connect the camcorder to the Internet
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied), via a 3G/4G network by connecting an optional
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or (Wired LAN Connection) modem to the unit.
modem (option). You can connect the CBK-NA1E USB Extension
Adaptor, supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network
You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN
Required device for network connection connection via a router connected to the network
Adaptor Kit (option), to the USB wireless
LAN module connector on the camcorder in
connector on the camcorder.
preparation for connection using the following
Wireless LAN connection [Notes] procedure.
One of the following devices is required. ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral
device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this 2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. You can also connect to the Internet using a
smartphone network by attaching a USB cable to
ˎˎIFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied) port. Follow the instructions for this port.
ˎˎCBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) +
CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor supplied with
ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral
device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction 3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN to
the USB wireless LAN module connector of the
unit and connecting a smartphone.
Enable.
the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option)
ˎˎModem (option) + CBK-NA1E USB Extension
due to radiation noise.
An IP address is automatically assigned to the 1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle
camcorder. in the position shown in the following
Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network Computer diagram.
Adaptor Kit (option) [Notes]
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) for the For attachment of the attachment bracket
wired LAN connection to become enabled. Wait until (Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony
Wired LAN connection the network status indicator (page 18) LAN icon stops service representative.
ˎˎLAN cable (not supplied) flashing on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
Attachment bracket
ˎˎ To transfer original files/proxy files recorded on the
[Notes] camcorder, use Wi-Fi remote control, operate the web
ˎˎ The wireless LAN module may not be available in some menu, or monitor output using the “Content Browser
countries/regions. Mobile” application, set Maintenance >Network >Wired
ˎˎ The frequency band for the wireless LAN module is shared LAN Remote in the setup menu to On (page 118).
by various devices. Depending on the use environment, Router
ˎˎ When connected to a network, using a LAN cable, that will
transmission speed and distance may be decreased, or not be used to connect to the Internet, it is recommended
communication may be disconnected, by using other that Wired LAN Remote be set to On to prevent
devices. unauthorized access from the Internet. When connecting
ˎˎ To use the 3G/4G/LTE services, you need to contract with to the Internet, check that the network connection is to a
a cell phone company.
Internet
secure network before use.
ˎˎ For details about the required compatible device for the ˎˎ A wired LAN connection is not possible if a modem
network connection, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony (option) is attached to the USB wireless LAN module
service representative. connector. For wired LAN connection, first remove the
modem (option). 2 Attach the USB extension adaptor to the
Limitations on simultaneous use of network ˎˎ When connected to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode
and the wired LAN is not connected to the Internet, a attachment bracket.
connection function network error may occur and Internet-related functions
may not operate. In this case, set Wired LAN to Disable,
The camcorder can connect to a network using and connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode
only.
wireless LAN or wired LAN methods.
However, there are limits on the simultaneous use
of these connection functions.
000
66 5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the 5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN Connecting Using a Modem
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable
modem mode. Wait until the 3G/4G modem settings/
USB extension adaptor. module connector. connection status indicator (page 17) stops flashing on
Fixing screw Guard (supplied) the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet via
USB extension adaptor
a 3G/4G network by attaching a modem (option)
to the camcorder using a CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option). Connecting Using the Network Setup
Internet Assist Tool
Using the network setup assist tool, you can create
a QR code with the information required to access
the camcorder via a C3 Portal connection. Loading
You can adjust the position of the USB 6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension CBK-NA1
+
the created QR code onto a smartphone allows
you to quickly connect to the camcorder via C3
extension adaptor over the range shown in the adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module
Modem Portal connection.
following diagram. connector. To use this function, first install the C3 Portal
dedicated app on your smartphone using the
following procedure.
Connecting
1 Plug the USB cable connected to a
1 Connect the modem (option) to the USB smartphone into the USB wireless LAN module
connector.
connector of the CBK-NA1E USB extension
adaptor.
2 Turn the camcorder on.
3 Select Maintenance >Setup for Mobile App

>Setup in the menu.
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the A screen appears showing the settings that
USB connector of the USB extension adaptor. will be changed automatically to enable
connection with C3 Portal.
[Note]
Setup cannot be executed when both Maintenance
>Network Client Mode is set to On in the menu and
For details about connecting a modem, refer to the streaming is in progress.
instruction manual supplied with the modem.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Modem to On.

[Notes]
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-NA1 and modem.
000
4 Check the settings and select OK. Connecting Using Wireless LAN Smartphone/ Computer
First, turn the access point and device on, and
configure the device tethering function if planning
The configuration starts. A “Processing” Tablet
message appears while configuration is in Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode) to use tethering.
progress.
When the configuration is completed, the
You can connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi station
required information and a QR code for
accessing the unit is displayed.
mode by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless
LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Connecting to an Access Point using
Adaptor (option) to the camcorder, and using a the Setup Menu
3G/4G/LTE-compatible access point (option) or Access
using device tethering. point
You can connect to an access point using the
For details about attaching devices, see “Attaching Internet
setup menu.
the IFU-WLM3” (page 61) and “Attaching the
The connection can be established using the
CBK-WA02” (page 61).
network auto detection function or by manual
entry.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Take care that the password cannot be viewed and
the QR code image cannot be copied by others. Connection using network auto detection function
ˎˎ The QR code screen appears on the LCD monitor,
but it is not displayed when the LCD monitor is set to
“Video without superimposed information (MONI)” 1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an
or “Status display (STATUS)” mode. Switch to “Video access point using WPS” (page 64).
with superimposed information (CHAR)” mode using
the DISP SEL button (page 8).
Smartphone/
Tablet
2 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Station
5 Launch the C3 Portal dedicated app installed Internet
Detail Settings >Scan Networks in the setup
menu, then select [Execute].
on your smartphone, and scan the QR code
The camcorder starts detection of connection
using the camera of the smartphone.
destinations. Detected destinations for
For details about using the dedicated app,
connection are displayed in the Scan Networks
refer to the dedicated app Help Guide.
result list.
The required information for accessing the [Note]
Close the list display first if you want to turn the
camcorder is loaded into the smartphone. camcorder off.
For details about the dedicated app, visit the C3

Portal site. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination to
https://www.c3p.sony.net which to connect, then press the knob.
Connecting Using a Device When the connection is established, the
Password input screen appears.
If the access point and device supports WPS,
connect using the procedure in “Connecting to 4 Set the password on the Password input
an access point using WPS” (page 64). If WPS is screen.
not supported, connect using the procedure in After setting the password, the display returns
“Connecting to an access point in station mode to the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen.
without using WPS” (page 79). If information about a previous connected
destination is stored in the device history,
000
selecting the SSID for that destination displays [Notes] Item Description
the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen. ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always
select Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the Gateway Enter the gateway for the
configured settings are not applied. access point.
5 Configure the following connection settings ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to
enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator
Enabled only when DHCP is
on the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen. [Off].
(page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the
Item Description LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. DNS Auto Obtains DNS address
ˎˎ The connection station setup information is stored automatically.
DHCP Enables/disables DHCP.
in the history. The history can be cleared using ALL When set to On, the address
When set to On, an IP address Reset and Network Reset. of the DNS server is obtained
is automatically assigned to
automatically.
the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
Connection by manual entry Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server
address manually, set to Off. Server for the access point.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the 1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an Enabled only when DNS Auto
is [Off].
camcorder. access point using WPS” (page 64).
Enabled only when DHCP is Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS
[Off]. 2 Configure the following connection settings
Server server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto
Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the using Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Station
is [Off].
camcorder. Detail Settings in the setup menu.
Item Description
Gateway
[Off].
Enter the gateway for the
SSID Enter the SSID for the 3 When finished, select Set >Execute to apply
destination to which to the settings.
access point.
connect. [Notes]
[Off]. Password Enter the password for the ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always
access point to connect. The select Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the
DNS Auto Obtains DNS address configured settings are not applied.
entered password is
automatically. ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to
displayed using asterisks. The
When set to On, the address enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator
entered characters are visible (page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the
of the DNS server is obtained
while the SHIFT key is LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
automatically.
pressed.
Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server
DHCP Enables/disables DHCP.
Server for the access point.
When set to On, an IP address
is automatically assigned to
is [Off].
the camcorder.
Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS To enter the camcorder IP
Server server for the access point. address manually, set to Off.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the
is [Off].
camcorder.
6 When finished, select Set >Execute to apply

Subnet mask
[Off].
Enter the subnet mask of the
the settings.
camcorder.
[Off].
000
Transferring Files
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD card
and original files recorded on SxS memory cards Transferring Proxy Files using the
to a server on the Internet when connected to the
Internet via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, or
Thumbnail Screen
wired LAN router.
You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD
2 Select OK. card to a server using the thumbnail screen of the
The setup information starts loading. camcorder.
Setting a Transfer Destination When the setup is loaded successfully, a Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can quickly display a
“Network File loaded.” message appears. Transferring a specific proxy file
Items configured automatically thumbnail for a proxy file on an SD card by
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using For items configured automatically, see “To
register a destination server” (page 80).
using the still image of the first frame.
1 Select a transfer destination previously
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to [Note] 4 Select the files you want to transfer.
registered in the web menu.
You can select a transfer destination using the
the Internet” (page 65). Service, Show Password, and Load Certification are not Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to web menu or using Maintenance >File
included in the items that are configured automatically. de-select it. You can double-tap a file to play Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup
2 You must first register a server to which you For details about the dedicated app, visit the C3
the file to check its content. menu.
want to transfer files.
For details about registering a server, see “To
Portal site.
https://www.c3p.sony.net
5 Tap [Transfer]. 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
register a destination server” (page 80). The default destination server specified in thumbnail screen.
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register a
destination server” (page 80)).
To change the destination server, tap the 3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) >Select
Configuring the Transfer Destination Transferring Proxy Files using the destination server to display a list and then Clip in the setup menu.
A transfer file selection screen appears.
Using the Dedicated App Web Menu select a different server. Enter the directory on
the destination server, as required.
You can select a transfer destination using 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor to a
(smartphone connection) You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD card Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload file (clip) to be transferred, then press the knob.
to a server using the web menu. Server in the setup menu. A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
You can send the settings required for file transfer 1 Connect the camcorder and device using a
To clear the check mark from a selected clip,
press the MENU knob again.
from a smartphone to the camcorder when LAN connection, then launch a browser on the
connected to C3 Portal using a smartphone
(page 66).
device to access the camcorder.
5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and press the
1 Send the file transfer information to the 2 Display a file list screen to select files.
SET button.
camcorder using the dedicated app on a
3 6 Tap [Transfer].
smartphone.
For details about using the dedicated app,
Tap
Card].
and select [Media Info], then tap [SD Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel 6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the
file transfer, tap [Cancel]. confirmation message screen, then press the
refer to the dedicated app Help Guide. The SD Card screen appears. knob.
If the camcorder receives the file transfer
The selected file is registered in the job list, and
information successfully, the following
a registration completed message appears.
message appears.
000
70 5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
Transferring all proxy files planning metadata file.

Transferring Original Files using the 7 Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
You can transfer all proxy files recorded on an SD Transferring parts of proxy files Web Menu [Default Setting] appears (see “To register a
card at the same time. destination server” (page 80)).
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
[Notes] To change the destination server, tap the
version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points in You can upload original files recorded on an SxS
ˎˎ Proxy files for which there are no original files cannot be destination server to display a list and then
selected for transfer on the thumbnail screen. proxy files to cut out and transfer the cutout parts. memory card to a server using the web menu.
select a different server.
ˎˎ Proxy files that are not displayed on the transfer file
selection screen cannot be transferred.
You can also transfer the cutout portions of
multiple files using the Storyboard. 1 Connect the camcorder and device using a Enter the directory on the destination server in
LAN connection, then launch a browser on the [Directory].
1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) >All [Notes] device to connect to the camcorder You can select a transfer destination using
Clips in the setup menu. ˎˎ Margins of up to 15 frames are added before and after the Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload
cutout region in the created file.
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN”
(page 61). Server in the setup menu.
ˎˎ Files created from cutouts from proxy files recorded using
network function software (V1.25 or earlier) may not be
press the knob.
imported into non-linear editors.
ˎˎ When partial transfer is performed using the Storyboard,
2 Select Maintenance >File Transfer >File
the file for sending Storyboard information to a non-linear Transfer in the setup menu.
editor is displayed in the Job List.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then ˎˎ When transferring, a General/Sony/tmp folder is created
automatically on the SD card. The file is temporarily stored
press the knob. press the knob.
All files are registered in the job list, and a
in this folder, and is automatically deleted after the file
transfer is completed. Original file transfer mode is initiated. 8 Tap [Transfer].
registration completed message appears. ˎˎ Files cannot be transferred under the following Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel
The file transfer starts transferring files in the
order the files were registered in the job list.
conditions.
–– When Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode is set to 4 Display a file list screen to select files in the file transfer, tap [Cancel].
When the transfer of all files is completed,
You can check the registered files by
Wi-Fi Access Point, and Wired LAN is set to Disable in browser on the device.
the setup menu transfer mode is automatically released, and
displaying the transfer job list using
Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in
–– When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance
>Streaming >Setting is set to On) 5 Tap and select [Media Info], then tap Slot A
the display returns to the camera shooting
screen.
the setup menu. –– When network client mode is enabled and highquality (for files recorded on media in slot A) or Slot B
streaming is in progress (streaming when Maintenance (for files recorded on media in slot B).
>Network Client Mode >Setting is set to On)
Transferring automatically when recording The Slot A or Slot B screen appears.
Example: Slot A screen
finishes
If Maintenance >File Transfer >Auto Upload(Proxy)
in the setup menu is set to On beforehand, the file
is automatically uploaded to the specified server
when proxy recording finishes.
If a proxy file with an identical duration as the
original file, inheriting the information from
the original file, is recorded based on planning
metadata, a folder is created on the transfer
destination with a name defined by the content of 6 Select the files you want to transfer.
the <Title> tag of the planning metadata file, and Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to
the proxy file is transferred to that folder. de-select it.
When transferring, the ID of the recording media
is automatically appended to the file name of the
000
Transferring Original Files using the Transferring all original files out and transfer the cutout parts.
Checking the Status of File Transfer
You can also transfer the cutout portions of
Thumbnail Screen You can transfer all original files recorded on an
SxS memory card at the same time.
multiple files using the Storyboard.
The following formats of original files are
You can upload original files recorded on an SxS 1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >All Clips in
supported.
ˎˎXAVC-I
Monitoring using the web menu
memory card to a server using the thumbnail the setup menu.
ˎˎXAVC-L Tap [Job List] on the SD Card, Slot A, or Slot B
screen. ˎˎHD422 (exFAT/UDF)
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then ˎˎHD420HQ (exFAT/UDF)
screen to display the Job List screen to check the
status of the file transfer (page 81).
Transferring an original file press the knob.
[Note]
A confirmation screen appears. To transfer a part of an original file using “Content Browser Monitoring using the setup menu
1 Select a transfer destination previously
Mobile,” a proxy file with the same file name as the original
file is required. Select Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in
registered in the web menu. Enable the creation of proxy files before you start to record.
You can select a transfer destination using the press the knob. The relevant settings are shown below. the setup menu to display the Job List screen.
web menu or using Maintenance >File All files are registered in the job list, and a ˎˎ Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the You can check the status of file transfer on the Job
Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup registration completed message appears. setup menu to On. List screen.
The file transfer starts transferring files in the ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled, set Maintenance
menu. >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3
order the files were registered in the job list. >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu to Enable.
2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
You can check the registered files by
displaying the transfer job list using
thumbnail screen.
Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in
the setup menu.
3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >Select Clip in
the setup menu. If Maintenance >File Transfer >Remote File Item Description
A transfer file selection screen appears. Transfer in the setup menu is set to Enable
Src. Transfer clip source media indicator
beforehand, original file transfer mode is initiated
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor to a automatically without having to set file transfer
A: Slot A media
B: Slot B media
file (clip) to be transferred, then press the knob. mode. P: PROXY SD card slot media
A check mark is attached to the selected clip. [Note] Clip Name Name of transfer clip
To clear the check mark from a selected clip, Files cannot be transferred under the following conditions.
Destination Transfer clip destination server
press the MENU knob again. ˎˎ During recording, playback, or when displaying the
thumbnail screen
5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and press the

ˎˎ When both Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network is
set to Wi-Fi Access Point and Wired LAN >Disable is set to
SET button. Disable in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears. ˎˎ When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance
>Streaming >Setting is set to On)
ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled and high-quality
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the streaming is in progress (streaming when Maintenance
confirmation message screen, then press the >Network Client Mode >Setting is set to On)
knob.
The selected file is registered in the job list, and Transferring parts of original files
a registration completed message appears.
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points
in original files recorded by the camcorder to cut
000
Item
Status
Description
Transfer status
Deleting Transfer Files on the Job List
Completed: Transfer completed Screen of the Camcorder
Transferring: Transfer in progress
Aborted: Transfer aborted
Waiting: Transfer pending You can select and delete any registered transfer
Server Cap. Over: Transfer files on the Job List screen.
destination server capacity [Note]
exceeded (“E03-006” displayed Delete files one at a time. Multiple files cannot be deleted
in Job List (page 81) in the simultaneously.
web menu)
Upload Error: Transfer destination
1 On the Job List screen, turn the MENU knob to
move the cursor to a file you want to delete.
server upload error (“E03-003”
displayed in Job List
(page 81) in the web menu) 2 Press the MENU knob.
Dest. Auth. Failed: Transfer A confirmation message appears, asking if you
destination server want to delete.
authentication error (“E03-005”
(page 81) in the web menu)
Dest. Cert. Err.: Transfer destination
certificate error (“E03-008”
(page 81) in the web menu)
press the knob.
A deletion completion message appears.
Deleting all registered transfer files

Tap [Clear All jobs] on the Job List screen.
Deleting all completed transfer jobs

Tap [Clear Completed jobs] on the Job List screen.
000
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio

You can transmit the video and audio captured/ [Notes]
played back with the camcorder via the Internet or ˎˎ Streaming cannot be started under the following menu
settings.
local network. –– When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup
menu is set to Off
–– When Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting in
the setup menu is set to On
Preparation for Streaming –– When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup

menu is set to On, but Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi
Transmission Mode is set to Off and Maintenance >Network >Wired

LAN is set to Disable
ˎˎ It may take several tens of seconds to stream actual video
or audio after starting streaming.
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using ˎˎ You cannot start streaming when playing back an SD
format clip.
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using ˎˎ If you set the streaming transmission destination is set
Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to incorrectly or the camcorder does not connect to the
the Internet” (page 65). network, “×” appears on the screen as the streaming
status indicator.
ˎˎ Streaming in network client mode (page 74),
2 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3) in monitoring, proxy recording, and file transfer are not
Maintenance >Streaming in the setup menu. available after switching to streaming mode.
The streaming connection destination setup ˎˎ Starting streaming while monitoring, proxy recording, or
transferring files will stop the corresponding function.
screen appears.
3 Set Size, Bit Rate, Type, and items according to

Type on the screen.
For details and limitations about settings, see
Stopping Streaming
“Streaming Settings” (page 78).
Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting to Off to
4 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3), set in steps stop streaming.
When Streaming is On, streaming can also be
1 and 2, in Maintenance >Streaming >Preset
Select in the setup menu. stopped by pressing the assignable switch to
which Streaming has been assigned.
When the camcorder is connected to a device

via Wireless LAN (page 61) or is connected to
Starting Streaming the Internet using wireless LAN station mode
(page 63), you can also set the streaming
1 Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting in the

transmission destination and start/stop streaming
from the web menu (page 77).
setup menu to On.
Streaming starts according to the settings.
You can assign Streaming to an assignable
switch. For details about assignment, see
“Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches”
(page 124).
000
Streaming High Quality Video

High-quality streaming using Sony QoS
technology is supported by enabling network
Item Description 4 Set Maintenance >Network Client Mode
to the CCM of either a Network RX Station or C3
Portal.
CCM Port Enter the port number of the >Setting in the setup menu to On.
client mode and connecting to the Connection
Control Manager (CCM) of either a Sony Network
CCM to connect. Network client mode is enabled, and the 1 Select the files you want to transfer.
User Name Enter the user name. camcorder connects to the Network RX Station ˎˎTo transfer a proxy recording:
RX Station (option) or C3 Portal. Higher quality,
Password Enter the password. or C3 Portal. Follow steps 1 to 5 in “Transferring Proxy
stable streaming can be achieved using multiple
The entered password is Live streaming starts in response to Network Files using the Web Menu” (page 69).
networks.
displayed using asterisks. The RX Station operation. An ALL file can also be ˎˎTo transfer original files:
[Notes] entered characters are visible saved/loaded using remote control of the unit Follow steps 1 to 6 in “Transferring Original
ˎˎ Use V1.18.2 or later for the Network RX Station. while the SHIFT key is by the Network RX Station. Files using the Web Menu” (page 70).
ˎˎ To stream stably using multiple networks, use a different
carrier line for each network.
pressed. For details about operation, refer to the
ˎˎ When using multiple networks, the target bit rate may be
exceeded depending on the scene being shot.
NCM with Proxy Enable/disable proxy
recording when connected
instruction manual for the Network RX Station
or the Help Guide for C3 Portal.
2 Tap [Transfer].
“NCM: RX Server” is displayed as a destination.
ˎˎ C3 Portal is a cloud service that is provided by Sony. with a CCM. You can assign Setting (On/Off) for Network
To use this service, registration is required. Specify “NCM: RX Server” as the destination.
Camera Control Enable/disable camera Client Mode to an assignable switch. For
C3 Portal is not provided in some regions. For details on
areas where the service is provided, refer to the following
site.
control when a CCM is
connected.
details about assignment, see “Assigning
Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124). 3 Tap [Transfer].
https://www.c3p.sony.net Transfer of the selected files to the server
Camera Setting Enable/disable ALL file [Notes] specified on the CCM starts.
In addition, refer to the following sites for the privacy
policy of C3 Portal. handling when a CCM is ˎˎ Changing to network client mode during normal
–– Terms of service connected. streaming (page 73) is not possible. [Note]
https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/tos_eu.html ˎˎ After changing to network client mode, normal streaming The destination can also be set to “NCM: RX Server” when not
(page 73) and monitoring are not available. in network client mode.
–– C3 Portal privacy policy
[Notes] ˎˎ Changing to network client mode while monitoring will In this case, transfer is placed on hold, and then transfer to
https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/c3p_privacy_policy.
ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set if values are not stop the monitoring. the server specified on the CCM starts after connecting to
html
entered for all items. ˎˎ File transfer is not supported during streaming in network the CCM in network client mode.
–– Professional ID privacy policy
ˎˎ Setting Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset client mode. File transfer is supported after stopping
https://www.pro-id.sony.net/#/privacyPolicy
1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup streaming.
ˎˎ For more details, contact a Sony professional sales menu to Enable enables proxy recording, even when
representative. ˎˎ If streaming in network client mode is started during file
network client mode is enabled. To enable the NCM transfer, the file transfer stops. File transfer restarts after
1 Connect the camcorder to the network. with Proxy setting, set Operation >Proxy Recording
Mode >Setting in the setup menu to On.
stopping streaming.
ˎˎ The available streaming bit rates that can be configured
For details, see “Connecting Devices using ˎˎ If Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, by the Network RX Station are limited to the following,
Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup depending on the proxy recording format.
the Internet” (page 65). menu is set to Disable, proxy recording stops if –– If the proxy recording format is 1280×720
network client mode is set to On during recording. 9Mbps/6Mbps, the streaming bit rate is set to 1 Mbps
2 Configure the network settings of the

If original file recording is continuing, set both to Off
to restart proxy recording.
or lower.
–– If the proxy recording format is 640×360 3Mbps, the
destination to which to connect in ˎˎ If Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Proxy File streaming bit rate is set to 3 Mbps or lower.
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, >Size in the setup menu is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) ˎˎ The proxy format cannot be changed in network client
or HD Auto(6Mbps), NCM with Proxy cannot be mode. To change the format, first set Network Client
Preset 2, or Preset 3 in the setup menu. enabled. Mode to Off.
You can save network settings of a destination If HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) is set after ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set to On when
to which to connect as a preset in Preset 1, NCM with Proxy is set to Enable, the setting is Maintenance >Network >Modem Remote is set to On in
Preset 2, or Preset 3. maintained, but proxy recording is not performed. the menu.
Item
CCM Address
Description
Enter the IP address of the
3 Select one of the presets, set in step 1, in Transferring files in network client mode
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset
CCM to connect. (Host name You can transfer files to a server set by a CCM by
or IP address)
Select in the setup menu.
connecting the camcorder in network client mode
000
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control

You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into using [Cam Remote Control] (page 77) from
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Smartphones) Cursor screen
the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other the web menu.
device over a wireless LAN connection. [Notes] ˎˎ Status indicators
Using the Wi-Fi remote control allows you to ˎˎ To display the page for a smartphone, change “rm. ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/
operate the camcorder remotely. This allows html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for a status display
you to start/stop recording or configure settings tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL. When
Main screen Up, Left, Set, Right, Down,
“rm.html” is entered, the page automatically switches Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
remotely, and is useful in applications where
for display on the corresponding device. However, the ˎˎ Status display Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT +
the camcorder is fixed in a remote location or appropriate page may not be displayed, depending on ˎˎ Shooting settings SET)
mounted on a crane, for example. the device. Iris, Focus, Zoom, S&Q FPS,
ˎˎ The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match the camcorder Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto
settings under the following circumstances. If this occurs, Iris, Gain, ATW, Color Bars, Auto
reload the browser window. Black, Auto White
–– If the camcorder is restarted while connected
Displaying the Wi-Fi Remote Control –– If the camcorder is operated directly while connected
–– If the device has been reconnected
–– If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been used
The Wi-Fi Remote screen is automatically resized ˎˎ The Wi-Fi remote control may not function if the wireless
signal strength becomes weak.
to match the screen size of the connected device.
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
Assign screen
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to
ˎˎ Status display
the Internet” (page 65).
ˎˎ Assignable switches
Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://<IP_address>/rm.html” in the URL bar,
where “<IP_address>” is the IP address
(Maintenance >Network >IP Address (Wireless)
in the setup menu) of the camcorder. Playback screen
For example, if the IP address is 192.168.1.1,
enter “http://192.168.1.1/rm.html” in the URL ˎˎ Status display
bar. ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev,
3 Enter the user name and password

Stop, Next
(Maintenance >Access Authentication

(page 116) in the setup menu) on the
browser screen.
When connection is successful, the Wi-Fi
Remote screen appears on the device.
You use the Wi-Fi Remote screen to operate
the camcorder.
You can disable the REC button operation by
sliding the Lock knob to the right on the
screen.
You can also display the Wi-Fi remote control
000
76 5. Network Configuration: Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Tablets) Cursor screen
Main screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT + SET)
Assign screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Shooting settings
S&Q FPS, Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto Iris, Gain, ATW,
Color Bars, Auto Black, Auto White
Playback screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next
000
Configuring from the Web Menu

The web menu of the camcorder appears when The menu has the following items: Settings, Media Media Info Video
the camcorder is accessed from a browser Info, Job List, and Cam Remote Control.
on a device connected using a wireless LAN Displays media information and is used to select ˎˎAVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP
connection. Using the web menu, you can Settings files to transfer from media. ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings.
configure settings related to wireless functions, ˎˎSD Card: Media inserted into the PROXY SD card
transfer files, and perform other actions. Used to configure the camcorder. This screen has slot of the camcorder. Audio
the following items. Double-clicking a file will start playback of the
Item Description See selected file. ˎˎAAC-LC compression
[Note] ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz
Wireless Streaming Streaming Format
Displaying the Web Menu Module format Settings (page 77) Playback may not be supported, depending on the ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo
operating system of the terminal device used and the
>Streaming settings
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser
Format
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using Wireless Proxy format Proxy Format
Mobile.”
the procedures in “Connecting Devices using Module settings Settings (page 78) ˎˎSlot A: Media inserted into card slot A of the
Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to >Proxy camcorder
the Internet” (page 65). Format ˎˎSlot B: Media inserted into card slot B of the
Wireless Load Network System Settings camcorder
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter Module Client Mode (page 78)
“http://192.168.1.1:8080/index.html” in the URL >System Settings Job List
bar. Settings certificate
The user name and password entry screen (execute using Displays the Job List screen for managing file
appears. Load button
of Load
transfers (page 81). Monitoring Settings
3 Enter a user name and password, then select
Certification)
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Station
Cam Remote Control
You can set the format for monitoring by devices.
[OK].
>Station settings Settings (page 79) Displays the Wi-Fi remote control screen Item Description Setting
For the user name and password for access Settings (page 75).
authentication, see Maintenance >Access Monitoring Sets the video size 480×270(1Mbps)/
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Checking wireless Size and bit rate for 480×270(0.5Mbps)
Authentication (page 116) in the setup menu.
>Status settings status LAN settings OSS Information monitoring.
(page 79)
Displays copyright information. Monitoring Displays the video 23.98fps/25fps/
Wired LAN Wired LAN Wired LAN Settings Frame Rate frame rate for 29.97fps/50fps/
>Wired LAN settings (page 79)
Setup Menu Settings
monitoring. 59.94fps
Monitoring Displays the video 1Mbps(VBR)/
Wired LAN Wired LAN Checking wired LAN
Launch a browser on the device and enter >Status settings status settings (page 80) Streaming Format Settings Bit Rate bit rate for
monitoring.
0.5Mbps(VBR)
“http://<IP_address>:8080” in the URL bar, where Upload Transfer Transfer (Upload)

“<IP_address>” is the IP address (Maintenance Settings settings Settings (page 80) You can configure the stream for monitoring [Notes]
>Network >IP Address in the setup menu) of the by devices, and set the format and transmission ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
camcorder, to display the Media Info >SD Card destination of the stream for streaming via the exceeded at times.
screen of the camcorder. ˎˎ A video frame rate of 24 fps is not supported.
Internet or local network. ˎˎ 640×360 (3Mbps (VBR)) is not supported for Monitoring
Tapping in the top left of the web menu screen
Size.
will display the configuration menus. Tap the item
you want to configure.
000
78 5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Streaming Settings Item

Destination
Description
Enter the port
Setting
1 to 65535
Proxy Format Settings Item
Proxy File
Description
Sets the audio
Setting
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Port number of the recording channel to record Ch-3 & Ch-4
You can set the format and transmission transmission You can set the format of the proxy file that is >Audio to proxy data.
destination for streaming. Up to three settings can destination server recorded on the SD card of the camcorder. Channel
be preset. used for streaming. Select
Item Description Setting Audio Selects the audio Ch-1 & Ch-2/ Video
Channel channels for the Ch-3 & Ch-4 [Notes]
On/Off Switches streaming On/Off Select streaming output. ˎˎXAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
transmission on/off. GOP) exceeded at times.
ˎˎ 24 fps is not supported.
ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings. ˎˎ When HD Auto is selected for Size in the proxy format
Preset Selects the preset Preset1/Preset2/ [Notes] settings, the proxy format is set according to the setting of
from Preset 1 to Preset3
Preset 3. You can
ˎˎ When Streaming is set to On, the monitoring function
cannot be used.
Audio the recording format recorded on the SxS memory card or
the format of the clip to be played back.
edit Preset by ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet. ˎˎ Proxy files recorded with Size set to HD Auto in the proxy
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to other ˎˎAAC-LC compression
tapping Edit. format settings may not be able to be played in a browser
parties. ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz or Content Browser Mobile. Insert SD cards for recording
Type Selects the type of MPEG-2 TS/UDP/ Always check that the transmission destination can ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo proxy files directly into a computer to play the files.
video for streaming. MPEG-2 TS/ receive the streaming data.
RTP The data may be sent to an unintended party if the
address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the status of
Size Sets the size of
video for streaming.
HD Auto/
1280×720/
the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
System Settings
When HD Auto is 640×360/ excessive motion.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set to a
selected, the size is 480×270/ large size with a small bit rate.
set to 1920×1080 or 320×180 To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size setting.
1280×720, ˎˎ If a network with bandwidth of less than 500 kbps is used,
according to the Size and Bit Rate are set to the following. Item Description Setting
setting of the –– When Size is 480×270, Bit Rate is set to 0.3Mbps(Mono
L), 0.3Mbps(Mono R), 0.2Mbps(Mono L), or
Proxy File Sets the video size HD Auto(9Mbps)/
recording format recording and bit rate for HD Auto(6Mbps)/
0.2Mbps(Mono R).
recorded on the –– When Size is 320×180, Bit Rate is set to 0.2Mbps(Mono >Size proxy files. 1280×720(9Mbps)/
SxS memory card or L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono R). 1280×720(6Mbps)/
the format of the When this occurs, video is set to a frame rate of 10 fps, and 640×360(3Mbps)/
clip to be played audio is set to a sampling frequency of 48 kHz and a bit 480×270(1Mbps)/
back. rate of 56 kbps Mono. Use to load the Network Client Mode Settings
480×270(0.5Mbps)
ˎˎ When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono L), certificate.
Bit Rate Sets the bit rate of 9Mbps/6Mbps/ Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-1 or Ch-3 Proxy File Displays the video 23.98fps/
video for streaming. 3Mbps/2Mbps/ & Ch-4 is set to Ch-3. recording frame rate for proxy 25fps/
The selectable bit 1Mbps/0.5Mbps/ When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono R) or 0.2Mbps(Mono R), >Frame files. 29.97fps/
rate varies 0.3Mbps(Mono L)/ Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-2 or Ch-3
Rate 50fps/
depending on the 0.3Mbps(Mono R)/ & Ch-4 is set to Ch-4.
59.94fps
Size setting. 0.2Mbps(Mono L)/
0.2Mbps(Mono R) Proxy File Displays the video 9Mbps(VBR)/
recording bit rate for proxy 6Mbps(VBR)/
Destination Enter the address of Host name or IP
>Bit Rate files. 3Mbps(VBR)/
Address the transmission address
1Mbps(VBR)/
destination server
0.5Mbps(VBR)
for streaming data.
000
Network Client Mode Settings Item Description 2 Configure settings on the Station Settings Station mode
Show Key When set to On, entered screen.
characters are displayed. Configure settings to match the settings of the
DHCP Enables/disables DHCP. access point connection.
When set to [On], an IP address For details about access point settings, refer to the
is automatically assigned to the instruction manual for the access point.
camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to [Off]. 3 Tap [Submit].
IP Address Enter the IP address of the The specified settings are applied.
camcorder. Enabled only when
DHCP is [Off]. 4 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode in
ˎˎLoad Certification: Load button
Write the “CCM_certification.pem” CCM
Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder.
the setup menu.
Wired LAN Settings
certificate to be loaded to the root directory of Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Wi-Fi Station],
Use this screen to make settings for connecting
an SD card beforehand. For details about CCM then press the knob.
certificates, contact a Sony professional sales Gateway Enter the gateway for the access This step connects the camcorder to the the camcorder to a wired LAN.
representative. point. access point in station mode. Proceed to step
Enabled only when DHCP is 9 in “Connecting to an access point using WPS”
[Off]. (page 64) to access the camcorder from the
DNS Auto Obtains DNS address device.
Wireless LAN Station Settings automatically.
When set to On, the address of
the DNS server is obtained
Checking wireless LAN settings
Use this screen to make settings for connecting automatically. Use the Wireless LAN >Status tab to monitor the
the camcorder to a wireless LAN. Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server for wireless LAN status.
Server the access point. The displayed settings will vary depending on the Item Description
Enabled only when DNS Auto is wireless LAN mode of the camcorder. DHCP Enables/disables DHCP.
[Off]. When set to [On], an IP address
Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS server is automatically assigned to the
Access point mode camcorder.
Server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is To enter the camcorder IP
[Off]. address manually, set to [Off].
Submit Applies the wireless LAN IP Address Enter the IP address of the
settings. camcorder.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Item Description Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the
Host Name Name of the camcorder (can be Connecting to an access point in station mode camcorder. Enabled when
modified) DHCP is [Off].
SSID Displays the SSID selected in
without using WPS
Gateway Enter the gateway for the access
[Access Point].
Key Enter the password for the 1 Connect the camcorder and device using
point.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
access point. access point mode (page 62).
000
Item Description
Transfer (Upload) Settings
Use the following procedure to register with “Sony To register a destination server
DNS Auto Obtains DNS address
Ci.”
automatically. For details about registering, visit www.SonyMCS. You can select “Server Settings1,” “Server
When set to On, the address of You can register and set servers for transferring com/wireless. Settings2,” or “Server Settings3” (registered in
the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
proxy files or original files recorded on the 1 Check that “Sony Ci” is displayed on the
Upload Server) as the destination server.
Select the server settings, tap Edit, and configure
camcorder. [Upload Settings] tab, then click [Edit].
Primary DNS Enter the primary DNS server of the server information on the displayed screen
The “Sony Ci” setup screen appears.
Server the router. (below).
Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off].
Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS server
Server of the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off].
Web/Cam Enables/disables access to the
Remote camcorder web menu and Wi-Fi
remote control.
When set to On, access is
permitted. Auto transfer ON/OFF
Submit Sets the wired LAN settings.
If [Auto upload] is [On] and an Internet connection 2 Enter a user name in User, and a password in
After specifying settings, tap [OK] to apply the
settings. Tapping [Cancel] discards the settings.
exists, proxy files are automatically transferred to Password.
[Note]
To prevent unauthorized access from the Internet, it is the default server specified on the Upload Settings The entered characters are visible when Show Item Description
recommended that Web/Cam Remote be set to On only tab when recording ends. Password is set to On. Default Server Set to [On] to set the default
when the wired LAN network is not connected to the file destination server.
“Sony Ci,” “NCM: RX Server,” “Server Settings1,”
Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that the Load Certification: Load button (Displayed at the top of the
network connection is a secure network before use. “Server Settings2,” and “Server Settings3” are
registered as transfer destination servers. The Write the “Ci_certification.pem” Ci certificate to server list for file transfers.)
default value is “Sony Ci.” be loaded to the root directory of an SD card Display Name Enter the name of the server
Checking wired LAN settings beforehand. For details about Ci certificates, to display in the list.
“Sony Ci” is the Media Cloud Services provided by
Sony. You can transfer files to the “Sony Ci” cloud contact a Sony professional sales Service Displays the type of server.
Use the Wired LAN >Status tab to monitor the
service. representative. FTP: FTP server
wired LAN status.
Host Name Enter the address of the server.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The service may not be available in some regions. 3 Tap [Link].
[Note]
ˎˎ A subscription is required in order to use the “Sony Ci” A completion message appears after a short If a port number other than the
cloud service. For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/ while. default number of 21 is used,
wireless. [Link] associates the user with the camcorder. append a colon and the port
For details about the Sony Ci privacy policy, visit the number at the end of the address
following sites. An Internet connection is required to execute
(for example, “:123”).
–– Terms of service [Link].
https://www.sonymcs.com/terms/ User Enter the user name.
–– Usage policy
https://www.sonymcs.com/use/ 4 Tap [OK].
Password
Show Password
Enter the password.
When set to On, entered
–– Privacy policy After registering with “Sony Ci,” [Unlink]
https://www.sonymcs.com/privacy/ appears on the Settings screen. Tapping characters are displayed.
ˎˎ The name of the transfer destination folder is specified in [Unlink] releases the user account to enable PASV Mode Enable/disable PASV mode.
[Destination Directory]. If not specified, a folder name with
the current date is used. To change the setting, see “To
other user accounts to link with the
change registered server settings” (page 81). camcorder.
000
Item
Destination
Description
Specify the destination
Monitoring File Transfers (Job List) Loading Certificates Troubleshooting
Directory directory.
[Note]
You can monitor file transfer status, manage files in
Symptom Solution
If an invalid character is entered the transfer file list, and start/stop file transfers.
“Invalid certification The certificate being loaded is
in the directory name, the The camcorder supports the FTP resume function
directory is not created and files file.” appears. invalid.
(for continuing file transfer if transfer stops).
are transferred to the top level of Check the certificate.
the default transfer destination “Certification file Check that the file name of
directory. not found.” appears. the certificate file is correct.
Using Secure Set whether to use secure FTP.
Protocol
Load Certification Load an intermediate CA
certificate.
Displayed when Using Secure
Protocol is set to On.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Communication using FTP is
not encrypted. The use of FTPS Item Description
is recommended. Total Progress status of the transfer
ˎˎ An intermediate CA certificate of all files
containing a root certificate is
required. Status Progress status of the file
ˎˎ The certificate to be loaded being transferred
must be in PEM format, and Remain time Predicted remaining transfer
should be written to the root
time
directory of the SD card with
“certification.pem” file name. Transfer data rate Transfer rate
[Note]
Communication using FTP is not encrypted. The use of FTPS To stop/restart file transfer or delete a file from
is recommended.
the transfer list
To change registered server settings 1 Select a file.
Select the server whose settings you want to
change on the Upload Settings screen, then 2 Tap on the top right of the screen.
tap [Edit]. Change the setting on the displayed Select a menu item.
configuration screen. ˎˎAbort selected: Stop file transfer.
For details about items, see “To register a ˎˎDelete from list: Delete the file from the
destination server”. transfer list.
ˎˎStart selected: Start file transfer.
ˎˎSelect All: Select all files in the list.
ˎˎClear completed: Delete all files that have
been transferred from the list.
000
Supported Network Functions and Operating Limitations

Network Functions and Network Connection Settings Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions
The supported network functions and corresponding network connection settings (Maintenance The following limitations apply to the simultaneous use of network functions.
>Network >Wi-Fi Mode, Modem, and Wired LAN settings) are shown below.
Wireless LAN connection Wired LAN Operation
To enable the network functions, set Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu to On. connection
Network function Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode Maintenance Maintenance >Network None Disabled Network function stopped
>Network >Wired LAN in the setup USB wireless LAN module Disabled USB wireless LAN module operating
>Modem menu
3G/4G/LTE USB modem Disabled 3G/4G/LTE USB modem operating
Wi-Fi Access Wi-Fi Station Off On Off Enable Disable
None Enabled Wired LAN operating
Point
USB wireless LAN module Enabled USB wireless LAN module and wired LAN operating1)
Proxy recording 1) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(page 55) 1) Streaming and file transfer operate using wired LAN. The USB wireless LAN module is reserved for Wi-Fi remote control
Proxy playback Yes 2) Yes 2) No No No Yes 2) No operation.
(page 77) [Note]
File transfer No Yes 2) No Yes 2) No Yes 2) No Wired LAN connection is not possible when the USB extension adaptor of the CBK-NA1R Ethernet Adaptor, supplied with the
(page 69) CBK-NA1 (option), is attached to the USB wireless LAN module on the camcorder.
Streaming No Yes No Yes No Yes No

transmission
(page 73)
Monitoring Yes 2) Yes 2) No No No Yes 2) No
(page 77)
Network client mode No Yes No Yes No Yes No
(page 74)
Camcorder remote Yes 2) Yes 2) No No No Yes 2) No
control
(page 75)
1) Proxy recording is enabled when Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu is set to On.
2) Supports camcorder and network-connected device functions.
000
83 6. Clip Operations
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen

Thumbnail Screen
Cursor
(yellow)
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
OK S
9 10 11 12 13
The thumbnail screen appears if you press the To hide the thumbnail screen, press the 4. Battery / Voltage status 8. Thumbnail information
THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode. THUMBNAIL button. Displays thumbnail information. The displayed
5. Playback disabled indicator
Thumbnail screens display lists of the index information varies according to the Customize
1. Thumbnail (index picture)
pictures of clips stored on SxS memory cards as 6. Clip status View setting (page 89).
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is
thumbnails. Displays the clips status using an icon.
automatically displayed as the index picture. 9. Clip name / title
You can select any clip (page 84) on the
You can change the index picture to any frame Icon Meaning Displays the name or title of the selected clip.
thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip
(page 88). S, OK, NG, KP Essence mark or clip flag attached
(page 84). 10. Recording video format
icons to a clip
You can also add a clip flag to any clip on the 2. Selected media icon/media status
thumbnail screen to filter clips according to the Lock icon Clip is locked (protected) 11. Special recording information
A mark is displayed if the media is protected.
Displays the recording mode if the clip was
flags. You can also switch to the Essence Mark If two SxS memory cards are inserted in the
recorded using a special recording mode (Slow &
thumbnail screen from the thumbnail screen and camcorder, you can switch between them using 7. Clip select checkbox
Quick Motion).
add essence marks (for example, shot marks) to the SLOT SELECT button. Place a check mark in the checkbox to select a clip
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the [Recording
any frame in the clip. (thumbnail).
3. Clip number / total number of clips frame rate/Playback frame rate] are displayed on
the right.
000
84 6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
12. Clip duration It plays all clips sequentially starting from the
selected clip. Returning to the Start of the Current Jumping to the Last Clip
13. Creation date
When playback of the last clip finishes, the
camcorder switches to the camera image or
Clip
Simultaneously press the F FWD and NEXT
external input state. buttons. This jumps to the last frame of the last clip
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the Press the PREV button.
Selecting Clips thumbnail screen. ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of the
recorded on the SxS memory card.
[Notes] current clip and starts playback.

To select a clip thumbnail, do one of the following ˎˎ Not all clips may be played back sequentially if the clips ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of the
current clip and pauses playback.
to move the yellow cursor to the thumbnail that on the SxS memory cards were recorded with a mixture of
different recording formats. ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of
Adding a Shot Mark during Playback
you want to select. ˎˎ Clips with an playback disabled icon (page 83) the current clip and displays a still image.
ˎˎPress the , , ,  buttons. displayed on the thumbnail screen are not played. The
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob. corresponding clips are skipped and sequential playback ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to You can add shot marks to clips during playback
continues. the previous clip. by using the same method used during recording
ˎˎPress the PREV or NEXT button.
ˎˎ There may be momentary picture breakup or still image (page 51).
display at the boundary between clips. During this time,
the play controls and the THUMBNAIL button cannot be [Note]
operated. Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory card
Selecting the First Thumbnail ˎˎ When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and begin
playback, there may be momentary picture breakup at
Playing from the Start of the First Clip is write protected.
the start of the clip. To view the start of the clip without
breakup, put the camcorder into playback mode, pause, Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV buttons.
Press and hold the F REV button, and press the use the PREV button to return to the start of the clip, and
PREV button. start play again.
This jumps to the start of the first clip on the SxS
memory card.
Stopping Playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the
Selecting the Last Thumbnail Pausing Playback Jumping to the Start of the Next Clip
camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and
the thumbnail screen (page 83) appears in
Press and hold the F FWD button, and press the Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. the viewfinder.
NEXT button. Press the NEXT button. Play also stops if you eject the memory card. In this
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is
paused. ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of the case, the camera picture appears in the viewfinder.
next clip and starts playback.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of the next
clip and pauses playback. During playback of the
Playing Clips Sequentially Starting last clip, this jumps to the end of the clip and
Basic Thumbnail Menu Operations
from the Selected Clip Playing at High Speed pauses playback.
ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of
the next clip and displays a still image. The Thumbnail menu is used to protect/delete
1 Select the thumbnail of the clip that you want Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to
the next clip.
clips, check properties, add/delete clip flags and
essence marks to frames in a clip, and other tasks.
to play first. button (page 7).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. PAUSE button.
Playback begins from the start of the selected
clip.
000
1 Press the THUMBNAIL button. Protecting Clips 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Example:
ABCD0002ABCD0002(1)
The thumbnail screen appears. press the knob.
ABCD0002(1)ABCD0002(2)
ABCD0005(3)ABCD0005(4)
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press
You can protect a specified clip or all clips to
ˎˎIf the parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already
the MENU button.
protect the clips from being deleted.
is added to the thumbnails of protected clips.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then exist at the copy destination, because a clip
The menu screen appears. press the knob. has been copied more than 1000 times, it is
Clips can be protected on the thumbnail screen or
All clips are protected, and a completion not possible to copy any more clips under that
the filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 87).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Thumbnail],
[Note]
message appears. name.
then press the knob. ˎˎA message appears if there is not enough free
You can also press the  or  button to select
This function is not available when the file system is set to
FAT. 4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. space on the copy destination SxS memory card.
[Thumbnail], and press the SET button. Exchange the card for one with more free space.
Protecting a specific clip Unlocking all clips ˎˎWhen multiple clips are recorded on the source
SxS memory card, it may not be possible to copy
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Select 1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Unlock
all clips even when the source and destination
memory cards have the same capacity,
Clip in the setup menu. All Clips in the setup menu.
depending on the memory characteristics and
usage of the memory cards.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob. press the knob. Copying a specific clip
To hide the Thumbnail menu, press the MENU The clip selection screen appears. A confirmation screen appears.
button again.
3 1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >Select Clip in
To select a menu item/sub-item, do one of the
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to protect, Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
the setup menu.
then press the knob.
following.
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob to select an item or sub-
A check mark is attached to the selected clip. All clips are unlocked, and a completion
message appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
item, then press the knob.
ˎˎPress the arrow buttons (, , , ) to select
4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
The clip selection screen appears.
an item or sub-item, then press the SET button. button.
A selection list or a clip properties screen appears A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to copy,
(page 87) according to the selected item or then press the knob.
sub-item. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Copying Clips A check mark is attached to the selected clip.
To return to the previous screen, push the MENU press the knob.
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE
position.
The clip is protected, and a completion
message appears.
You can copy clips to another SxS memory card. button.
[Notes] Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards A confirmation screen appears.
ˎˎ When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not 6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. using the same names as the original clips.
possible to copy, delete, change index pictures, or add
and delete clip flags marks and shot marks.
Protecting all clips
[Notes] 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
ˎˎ Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state ˎˎIf a clip with the same name already exists at the press the knob.
when the menu was displayed. copy destination SxS memory card, a one-digit The clip is copied, and a completion message
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Lock All number in parentheses is added to the original appears.
For details about the thumbnail screen structure, Clips in the setup menu. name.
see “Thumbnail Menu” (page 89). The number in parentheses is the smallest
number that does not exist at the copy
destination.
000
Copying all clips 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then Transferring Clips
press the knob.
You can copy all clips stored on the same SxS The clip is deleted, and a completion message
memory card at the same time to another SxS appears. Clips (original files) recorded on SxS memory
memory card. cards and proxy files recorded on SD cards can be
1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >All Clips in the 6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message.
uploaded to a server using Thumbnail >Transfer
Clip and Transfer Clip(Proxy), respectively, in the
setup menu.
setup menu.
The clips below the deleted clip on the thumbnail
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then screen move up one position.
For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip procedure, see
“Transferring Original Files using the Thumbnail
press the knob.
Screen” (page 71).
A confirmation screen appears. Deleting all clips For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy)
procedure, see “Transferring Proxy Files using the
You can delete all clips stored on the same SxS
memory card at the same time. Thumbnail Screen” (page 69).
press the knob.
All clips are copied, and a completion message [Notes]
appears. ˎˎ Deleted clips cannot be restored.
ˎˎ If the media or clip is protected, this function is disabled.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. 1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >All Clips in the
setup menu.

Deleting Clips press the knob.
You can delete clips from SxS memory cards. Clips

can be deleted on the thumbnail screen or the
press the knob.
filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 87).
All clips are deleted, and a completion
1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >Select Clip in message appears.
the setup menu.
press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to delete,

A check mark is attached to the selected clip.

button.
000
Displaying Clip Properties 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag, then Setting Filter clip flag
press the knob. OK OK
Setting Added clip flag NG NG
The clip properties screen for the selected clip appears when you select Thumbnail >Display Clip
Add OK OK KEEP KP
Properties in the setup menu.
Add NG NG None (Clips are not filtered)
Add KEEP KP
4 The clip screen appears showing the clips
1
OK S
filtered by the selected clip flag. This screen is
The clip flag is added to the thumbnail of the
referred to as the filtered clip screen.
selected clip.
To cancel filtering, do one of the following.
You can also use an assignable switch assigned
2 5 with the clip flag function to add clip flags ˎˎPress the RESET/RETURN button.
ˎˎSelect Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >All in the
(page 124).
setup menu.
3 6
7 Deleting a Clip Flag Adding/Deleting Essence Marks in
1. Current clip image Clips
Displays the index picture and status of the
Press the RESET/RETURN button: Returns to the
Thumbnail menu screen. 1 Select the thumbnail for the clip from which
selected clip. Press the THUMBNAIL button: Sets the camcorder you want to delete a clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag >Delete Clip Flag in You can add (and delete) essence marks (shot
to E-E mode and displays the camera picture. marks, recording start marks) to any frame in a clip.
2. Timecode display the setup menu.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts playback of You add/delete essence marks on the essence
TC Index: Timecode of the displayed image The clip flag is deleted.
the selected clip. mark thumbnail screen.
Start: Timecode of the recording start point
End: Timecode of the recording end point [Note]
Duration: Duration between start and end points This function is not available when the file system is set to
3. Creation date and modified date Adding Clip Flags to Clips Filtering the Clips Displayed using the FAT.
4. Clip name Filtered Clip Screen Adding a shot mark

5. Recording format You can add clip flags (OK, NG or KP marks) to clips
Video Codec: Video codec to filter the display of clips based on the clip flags.
[Note]
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence
Size: Picture size You can perform this operation on the thumbnail Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
FPS: Frame rate screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen FAT.
Audio Codec: Audio codec (page 87). 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [All], and then
Ch/Bit: Audio recording channel/Number of bits
for audio recording
[Note]
1 Select Thumbnail >Filter Clips in the setup
press the knob.
menu.
6. Special recording information
FAT.
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame to which
7. Recording device name 1 Select the thumbnail for the clip to which you 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag used
you want to add the essence mark on the
essence mark thumbnail screen, then select
want to add the clip flag, then select to filter clips, then press the knob.
Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
To hide the clip properties screen, do one of the Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag in the setup menu.
following.
000
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the

[Note]
following, then press the knob. FAT.
Setting Operation
Add Shot Mark1 Adds Shot Mark 1 1 Select Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >Essence
Add Shot Mark2 Adds Shot Mark 2 Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
The shot mark is added to the selected frame. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an essence
mark used to filter frames, then press the knob.
Deleting a shot mark Setting Description
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence

All All frames with added essence
marks
Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu.
Rec Start Frames with a recording start
2 Select the type of shot mark to delete.

mark and the first frame of
clips that do not have a
recording start mark
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame from which
Shot Mark0 to Frames with each shot mark
you want to delete a shot mark on the essence
mark thumbnail screen, then select Thumbnail Shot Mark9
>Set Shot Mark in the setup menu.
The essence mark thumbnail screen appears
filtered by the selected essence mark.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the
following, then press the knob. If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that
Setting Operation defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the
Delete Shot Mark1 Deletes Shot Mark 1 selection options in the list are displayed by the
defined names.
Delete Shot Mark2 Deletes Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is deleted from the selected

frame.
Changing the Index Picture of a Clip
You can set the frame selected on the essence
Filtering Clips (Frames) using the mark thumbnail screen as the index picture for the
Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen clip.
Select the thumbnail of the frame you want to
set as the index picture for the clip, then select
The essence mark thumbnail screen displays only Thumbnail >Set Index Picture in the setup menu.
those frames in a clip where an essence mark has
been recorded in thumbnail view. Display the
thumbnail screen, then either press the ESSENCE
MARK button (page 9) or use the following
procedure to display the essence mark thumbnail
screen.
000
89 6. Clip Operations
Thumbnail Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Item Sub-item setting Description
Item Sub-item setting Description Filter Clips OK Filters the display of clips by OK flags
Display Clip Properties – Displays clip properties (page 87). Filters the display of clips (page 87).
by clip flag. NG Filters the display of clips by NG flags
Set Index Picture – Sets/changes the index picture of a clip
(page 88). (page 87).
Thumbnail View Essence Mark Thumbnail Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen KEEP Filters the display of clips by KP (Keep) flags
Changes the thumbnail All/Rec Start/Shot Mark1/Shot with clips filtered by essence mark (page 88). (page 87).
screen displayed. Mark2/Shot Mark3/Shot Mark4/ None Clips are not filtered (page 87).
Shot Mark5/Shot Mark6/Shot Customize View Thumbnail Caption Selects the information displayed beneath clip
Mark7/Shot Mark8/Shot Mark9/ Date Time/Time Code/ thumbnails.
Shot Mark0 Duration/Sequential Date Time: Displays the date and time.
Clip Thumbnail Displays the thumbnail screen (clip thumbnail Number Time Code: Displays the timecode.
screen) (page 83). Duration: Displays the duration of the clip.
Set Shot Mark Add Shot Mark1 Adds Shot Mark 1 to a frame (page 87). Sequential Number: Displays a sequential
Adds/deletes shot marks. number for each clip.
Delete Shot Mark1 Deletes Shot Mark 1 (page 88).
Add Shot Mark2 Adds Shot Mark 2 to a frame (page 87).
Delete Shot Mark2 Deletes Shot Mark 2 (page 88).
Set Clip Flag Add OK Adds an OK flag to a clip (page 87).
Adds/deletes clip flags. Add NG Adds an NG flag to a clip (page 87).
Add KEEP Adds a KP (Keep) flag to a clip (page 87).
Delete Clip Flag Deletes a clip flag (page 87).
Lock/Unlock Clip Select Clip Selects the clip to protect (page 85).
Protects/unlocks a clip. Lock All Clips Protects all clips on the media (page 85).
Unlock All Clips Unlocks all clips on the media (page 85).
Copy Clip Select Clip Selects the clip to copy (page 85).
Copies clips. All Clips Copies all clips on the media (page 86).
Delete Clip Select Clip Selects the clip to delete (page 86).
Deletes clips. All Clips Deletes all clips on the media (page 86).
Transfer Clip Select Clip Selects the original file to transfer (page 71).
Registers original files to All Clips Selects all the original files in media to transfer
transfer in the job list. (page 71).
Transfer Clip(Proxy) Select Clip Selects the proxy file to transfer corresponding
Registers proxy files to to the selected original file (page 69).
transfer in the job list. All Clips Selects all the proxy files in media to transfer
corresponding to the original files (page 70).
000
90 7. Menu Display and Settings
Setup Menu Organization

On this camcorder, settings for shooting and
playback are made in the setup menu, which Menu Structure Menu Items Item
Time Zone
Description
Time settings
Page
103
appears in the viewfinder.
Clip Clip settings 104
The setup menu can also be displayed on an User menu
external video monitor (page 138). Update Media Update media 104
Menu used to arrange items from the setup Operation menu management
menu in any chosen order (page 94). information
Operation menu Item Description Page
GPS Location information 104
Menu used to make settings related to Format System settings 97 (GPS) settings
shooting (excluding settings related to picture
Base Setting Dynamic range mode 97 Planning Planning metadata 104
quality). settings Metadata settings
Paint menu
HDR Setting Displays HD recording 97 USB Copy to USB media 104
Menu used to make settings related to picture
format and output settings
quality.
system during HDR
Thumbnail menu Flash Band Flashband correction 105
operation
Menu used to make settings related to clip Reduce settings
Format Media Media format settings 98
thumbnails (page 89).
[Note] Input/Output Input/output signal 98
The Thumbnail menu can be used only when a settings Paint menu
thumbnail screen (page 83) is displayed. It is disabled Super Impose Superimposition 98
when the thumbnail screen is not displayed. Item Description Page
settings
Maintenance menu Switch Status Correction functions 106
Menu used to make settings related to LCD LCD monitor settings 98
and test signal on/off
camcorder maintenance and system Rec Function Special recording mode 99
settings
management. settings
HDR Paint HDR settings 106
File menu Proxy Recording Proxy data settings 99
Setting
Menu used to make perform operations on Mode
White Color temperature 106
files. Assignable Assign functions to 99
settings
Switch assignable switches
Black Black level settings 106
VF Setting Viewfinder settings 100
Flare Flare correction 106
Marker Marker settings 100 settings
Gain Switch Gain value settings 101 Gamma(HDR) HDR gamma display 107
Auto Iris Auto iris settings 101 Gamma Gamma correction 107
Zebra Zebra pattern settings 101 settings
Display On/Off Viewfinder display item 101 Black Gamma Black gamma 107
settings correction settings
“!” LED Viewfinder “!” settings 102 Knee Knee correction 108
settings
White Setting White balance settings 103 White Clip White clip settings 108
Offset White Offset white settings 103 Detail(HD) Detail settings 108
Shutter Shutter settings 103 Detail(SD) Detail settings 108
Slow Shutter Slow shutter settings 103 Aperture Aperture correction 108
settings
000
91 7. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Organization
Item Description Page Item Description Page

Skin Detail Skin detail correction 109 Auto Shading Auto black shading 116
settings correction settings
Matrix Matrix correction 109 APR APR settings 116
settings
Setup for Connection settings 116
Multi Matrix Multi matrix correction 109 Mobile App using the network
settings setup assist tool
V Modulation V modulation shading 109 Access Access authentication 116
correction settings Authentication settings
Low Key Low key saturation 110 Network Network connection 117
Saturation correction settings settings
Saturation Saturation correction 110 Network Client Network client mode 118
Mode settings Mode settings
Noise Noise suppression 110 File Transfer Wi-Fi transfer settings 119
Suppression settings Streaming Streaming settings 119
Clock Set Internal clock settings 120
Language Display language 120
Maintenance menu settings
Hours Meter Digital time counter 120
Item Description Page
settings
White Shading White shading 111
Network Reset Network reset 120
correction settings
Black Shading Black shading 111 Fan Control Fan control settings 120
correction settings VF Display Viewfinder display 120
Battery Battery settings 111 Setting settings
DC Voltage External DC source 111 Option Software option 120
Alarm voltage alarm settings settings
Audio Audio settings 111 Version Version settings 121
WRR Setting Wireless tuner settings 113
Time Code Timecode settings 114 File menu

Essence Mark Essence mark settings 114
Item Description Page
Camera Config Camcorder operation 114
settings User File User file settings 122
Preset White Preset white settings 115 All File ALL file settings 122
White Filter Filter settings 115 Scene File Scene file settings 122
DCC Adjust DCC settings 115 Reference File Reference file settings 122
Flicker Reduce Flicker correction 116 Lens File Lens file settings 123
settings
User Gamma Gamma file settings 123
Genlock Genlock settings 116
000
Basic Setup Menu Operations

Displaying the Setup Menu ˎˎThe menu item selection area displays a
maximum of seven lines. You can scroll
4 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or  Entering Text
button, to move the cursor to the sub-item
through menus with more than seven lines
that you want to set, and then confirm by
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press the by moving the cursor up and down. When you select an item, such as a file name,
pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
MENU button. The settings of the selected sub-item appear, which requires character entry, the character entry
The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu and the cursor moves to the currently selected screen appears.
list appears on the screen. value.
1
The following example shows the cursor
positioned at the Operation menu
Menu list
Displayed when there are further

menu items below.
Menu item selection area
ˎˎIf the selected item has sub-items, Settings area
they appear on the right. 2 3
ˎˎThe settings area displays a maximum of
ˎˎIf there are no sub-items, the current
setting appears on the right. nine lines. You can scroll through menus 1 Press the MENU knob to select the type of
ˎˎSelect [Back] to return to the previous with more than nine sub-items by moving character to enter, then press the MENU knob
level. the cursor up and down. or SET button.
Menu item selection area ˎˎFor sub-items with a large settings range (for ABC: Uppercase alphabetic characters
example, –99 to +99), the settings area is not abc: Lowercase alphabetic characters
[Note]
3 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or  displayed. The current setting is highlighted 123: Numeric characters
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in button, to move the cursor to the menu item to indicate that the value can be changed. !#$: Special characters
focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification mode that you want to set, and then confirm by
by pressing the assignable switch to which the Focus Mag
function has been assigned.
pressing the MENU knob or the SET button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of the
5 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or  2 Select a character from the selected character
button, to select the value to set, and then type, then press the knob.
menu item selection area, and the cursor
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET The cursor moves to the next field.
moves to the first sub-item.
button. Space: Enters a space character at the cursor
Making Menu Settings The setting is changed, and the display is
updated to show the new setting.
position.
/: Moves the position of the cursor.
If you select [Execute] for an executable item, BS: Deletes the character on the left of the
1 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
the corresponding function is executed. cursor (backspace).
button, to move the cursor to the desired
menu.
If an item requires confirmation before execution,
selecting the item in step 3 hides the menu and
3 When finished, select [Done] and press the
A list of selectable menu items appears in the Settings area dial.
ˎˎDisplays sub-items and their current settings a confirmation message appears. Follow the The character string is confirmed and the
menu item selection area to the right of the
ˎˎTo return to the previous level, select [Back], instructions in the message to execute or cancel character entry screen disappears.
menu list. press the  button, or push the MENU the operation.
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
2 Press the MENU knob or the SET button. ESCAPE position.
The menu item selection screen appears.
You can also display the menu item selection
screen by pressing the  button.
000
93 7. Menu Display and Settings: Basic Setup Menu Operations
Canceling Changes to Settings 4 Enter an arbitrary passcode number. Maintenance >File Transfer
>Auto Upload(Proxy)
Auto Upload(Proxy) ˎˎ It is recommended that you leave a record of the
passcode nearby, just in case it is forgotten. If you
The valid input range is 0000 to 9999. The do forget the passcode number, contact your Sony
default value is 0000. service representative.
1 Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch Enter a number and press the MENU knob to
move the cursor to the next digit.
Unlocking the menu
down to the ESCAPE position.
When all digits have been entered, move the
cursor to [Set].
1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press the
MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the
setup menu.
Exiting the Menu 5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
The entry is applied.
A confirmation message appears.
2 Display User >Camera Config >User Menu
with Lock in the setup menu.
1 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press Subsequently, only the User menu is displayed.
the MENU button. [Notes] [Notes]
The normal camera picture reappears. ˎˎ If the menu is locked without registering the following ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press
setup menu items in the User menu, assigning the menu the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config
function to an assignable switch is not possible. >User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock.
ˎˎ If some of the following setup menu items are assigned to ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without
an assignable switch when the menu is locked, the setting pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU
Locking/Unlocking the Menu for the functions assigned to assignable switches are
forcibly set to Off when the menu is locked.
button to display the menu, Camera Config >User
Menu with Lock is not displayed.
Setup menu Functions assignable
You can lock the setup menu so that only the User to assignable switches 3 Select “Off,” then press the MENU knob.
menu is displayed. The viewfinder screen display switches to the
Operation >Rec Function Picture Cache Rec passcode number input screen.
Locking the menu >Picture Cache Rec
Operation >Rec Function Clip Continuous Rec 4 Enter the passcode number used to lock the
1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press the >Clip Continuous Rec
Operation >Rec Function Slow & Quick Motion
menu.
MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the The valid input range is 0000 to 9999.
setup menu. >Slow & Quick Motion Enter a number and press the MENU knob to
Operation >VF Setting VF Mode move the cursor to the next digit.
2 Display Maintenance >Camera Config >User
>Color Mode
Operation >Display On/Off Video Signal Monitor
When all digits have been entered, move the
cursor to [Set].
Menu with Lock in the setup menu.
>Video Signal Monitor
[Notes]
Operation >Display On/Off Lens Info 5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
>Lens Info The entry is applied.
ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press If the entered passcode number matches the
the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config Operation >Auto Iris Spotlight
>User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock. >Mode passcode number used to lock the menu, a
Backlight
ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without confirmation message appears and the display
pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU Operation >Marker Marker of all menus is enabled.
button to display the menu, Camera Config >User >Setting
Menu with Lock is not displayed. [Notes]
Maintenance >Audio Front MIC
ˎˎ If the entered passcode number does not match the
>Front MIC Select passcode number used to lock the menu, the menu
3 Select “On,” then press the MENU knob. Maintenance >Network Network Client Mode is not unlocked.
The viewfinder screen display switches to the Client Mode >Setting
passcode number input screen.
000
Editing the User Menu

You can edit the User menu, such as adding items,
deleting items, and rearranging items, to make the Adding Items and Sub-Items 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit,
User menu more useful using Edit User Menu.
The edit function list appears.
You can select items in the Operation menu, Paint
menu, Maintenance menu, and some items in the 1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu
File menu, and add them to the User menu. >Add Item, then press the knob. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit Sub Item in
Up to 20 items can be registered in the User menu. The items that can be added are displayed. the edit function list, then press the knob.
There are six items registered in the User menu The item is deleted.
by factory default, one of which must always be 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item, then
present, allowing you to add up to 19 new items. press the knob.
[Note] A screen for selecting sub-items to add
Editing is unavailable when the menu is locked. appears. Moving Items
The Edit Sub Item screen appears.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
Displaying the Edit User Menu Screen
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to
You edit the User menu on the Edit User Menu move, then press the knob.
screen. The edit function list appears.
1 Turn the MENU knob to select User >Edit User 3 Turn the MENU knob to select a sub-item, then
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Move in the edit
Menu, then press the knob. press the knob. All sub-items are checked when the screen is function list, then press the knob.
Place a check mark in the All checkbox to add first opened (function to display all sub-items).
all sub-items. Remove the check marks for the sub-items you
Place a check mark in the individual do not want to display in the User menu.
checkboxes to specify which sub-items to add.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press

4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press
the knob.
the knob. Editing is completed.
The Edit User Menu screen appears. The item/sub-item(s) are added. The item to move is highlighted, and a triangle
[Note] mark and line indicate the destination position.
The same item or sub-item cannot be registered twice. Also,
the name of the item or sub-item cannot be changed.
Deleting Items
Editing Sub-Items 1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit,

Triangle mark and line indicating move
You can specify the sub-items to display. then press the knob.
destination
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen. The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Delete in the

edit function list, then press the knob.
000
95 7. Menu Display and Settings: Editing the User Menu
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the triangle and

line to the desired destination, then press the
knob.
The item is moved.
Restoring the User Menu to Factory

Default State
1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu

>Customize Reset, then press the knob.
The Customize Reset screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Reset], then

press the knob.

press the knob.
The User menu is restored to the factory
default state.
000
User Menu (Factory Default Configuration)

The User menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state.
ˎˎFormat Media (page 98)
ˎˎRec Function (page 99)
ˎˎInput/Output (page 98)
ˎˎClip (page 104)
ˎˎAssignable Switch1) (page 99)
ˎˎCamera Config2) (page 114)
1) Excluding sub-item 0
2) Contains only User Menu Only as sub-item
For details about editing the User menu, see “Editing the User Menu” (page 94).
000
Operation Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Operation >Format
Operation >Format Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio. Item Setting Description
Item Setting Description Rec Format HD422 50 1080P When the file system is UDF and the system
Frequency 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98 Selects the system frequency (execute by HD422 50 720P frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
selecting Execute). HQ 1920×1080P
[Note] HQ 1920×1080i When the file system is FAT and the system
Switching the system frequency also switches the Rec HQ 1440×1080i frequency is 59.94 or 50.
Format setting to the value configured previously at that HQ 1280×720P
frequency. SP 1440×1080i
File System exFAT/UDF/FAT Switches the file system (execute by selecting HQ 1920×1080P When the file system is FAT and the system
Execute). frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
Rec Format Settings vary according to the Selects the recording format (execute by selecting Aspect Ratio (SD) 16:9/4:3 Selects the SD mode aspect ratio.
system frequency setting. Execute).
Audio Length 24bit/16bit Selects the audio bit rate for recording in IMX
XAVC-I 1920×1080P When the file system is exFAT and the system
format.
XAVC-I 1920×1080i frequency is 59.94 or 50.
XAVC-I 1280×720P Operation >Base Setting
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P Sets the dynamic range for imaging.
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i [Note]
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option).
XAVC-L 35 1080P Item Setting Description
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i Shooting Mode SDR/HDR SDR: Sets conventional standard dynamic range
HD422 50 1080i mode.
HD422 50 720P HDR: Sets High Dynamic Range mode.
HQ 1920×1080i Operation >HDR Setting
HQ 1440×1080i Displays the HD recording format and output system during HDR operation.
HQ 1280×720P
[Note]
MPEG IMX 50
Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option).
DVCAM
Item Setting Description
XAVC-I 1920×1080P When the file system is exFAT and the system
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98. HD Rec/Out HDR(HLG)/SDR Displays HDR(HLG) when Operation >Base Setting
XAVC-L 35 1080P >Shooting Mode is set to HDR. Displays SDR
HD422 50 1080P when set to SDR.
HD422 50 720P Color Space BT.2020/BT.709 Displays BT.2020 when Operation >Base Setting
HQ 1920×1080P >Color Space is set to HDR. Displays BT.709 when
set to SDR.
HD422 50 1080i When the file system is UDF and the system
HD422 50 720P frequency is 59.94 or 50.
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
MPEG IMX 50
DVCAM
000
98 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Format Media Operation >Input/Output

Formats the media. Sets input/output signals.
Item Setting Description Item Setting Description
Media(A) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in slot A (execute Wide ID Through/Auto Selects whether to add a wide ID signal to the SD
by selecting Execute). output signal.
Media(B) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in slot B (execute Through: Outputs without adding a wide ID
by selecting Execute). signal.
Auto: Adds and outputs a wide ID signal to the
SD Card(Utility) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SD card in the UTILITY SD card slot
video signal when the wide ID signal is set to
(execute by selecting Execute).
Squeeze.
SD Card(Proxy) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SD card in the PROXY SD card slot
Wide Mode(Ext.) Auto/16:9 When the input signal is SD, sets the method that
determines wide screen information.
Operation >Input/Output Auto: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio when the
Sets input/output signals. wide screen information of the input signal is
Item Setting Description Squeeze. Otherwise, records with 4:3 aspect
ratio.
Output Format Settings vary according to the Selects the output format (execute by selecting
16:9: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio.
system frequency setting. Execute).
Settings vary according to the recording format Operation >Super Impose
setting (page 36). Sets character information/markers to be superimposed.
Source Select Camera/External Selects the camera picture (Camera) or SDI IN Item Setting Description
connector input signal for the video input source. Super(VF Display) On/Off When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or
SDI Out1 Output On/Off Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT1 Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this
Super(Menu) On/Off
connector on/off. turns superimposition of character information on
SDI Out2 Output On/Off Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT2 the output from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO
connector on/off. OUT connector on/off, respectively.
HDMI Output On/Off Turns the output signal from the HDMI connector Super(Marker) On/Off When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or
on/off. Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this
SDI Out2/HDMI Super Off/On Turns character information (superimposed) from turns superimposition of markers on the output
the SDI OUT2 and HDMI connectors on/off. from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO OUT
connector on/off, respectively.
Video Out Super Off/On Turns character information (superimposed) from
the VIDEO OUT connector on/off. Operation >LCD
Down Converter Edge Crop/Letter Box/Squeeze Selects the signal conversion mode for output of Sets the LCD monitor.
SD signals. Item Setting Description
Edge Crop: Crops the edges of the 16:9 picture for
LCD Color –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the color depth of the LCD monitor.
output as a 4:3 picture.
Letter Box: Masks the top and bottom of the 4:3 LCD Marker&Zebra On/Off Turns the marker and zebra pattern display on the
picture and displays a 16:9 picture in the LCD monitor on/off.
center of the screen.
Squeeze: Squeezes the 16:9 picture horizontally
for output as a 4:3 picture.
000
Operation >Rec Function Operation >Rec Function

Sets the special recording mode. Sets the special recording mode.
Slow & Quick Motion On/Off Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. (When set to Interval Time 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/ When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
On, the settings for other special recording modes 20/30/40/50 (sec) interval for Interval Rec shooting.
are set to Off.) 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
Frame Rate Settings vary according to the When Slow & Quick Motion is On, selects the 20/30/40/50/ (min)
recording format setting. frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion shooting. 1/2/3/4/6/12/24 (hour)
1 to 60 When the file system is exFAT, and the recording Pre-Lighting Off/2sec/5sec/10sec Sets the number of seconds that the video light is
format is XAVC Intra or XAVC Long. turned on prior to the start of Interval Rec
shooting. To not turn the video light on, select
1 to 50 When the file system is UDF, and the recording
Off.
format is MPEG HD 422 50M (1280×720), 50P/25P.
Simul Rec On/Off Turns simultaneous recording to slots A and B on/
1 to 30 When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the
off.
recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 29.97P/23.98P. Operation >Proxy Recording Mode
1 to 25 When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the Sets proxy recording.
recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M Item Setting Description
(1920×1080), 25P.
Setting On/Off Turns proxy recording on/off.
Clip Continuous Rec On/Off Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. (When
Size HD Auto(9Mbps)/ Selects the size of the proxy recording format.
set to On, the settings for other special recording
HD Auto(6Mbps)/
modes are set to Off.)
1280×720(9Mbps)/
Picture Cache Rec On/Off Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. (When set 1280×720(6Mbps)/
to On, the settings for other special recording 640×360(3Mbps)/
modes are set to Off.) 480×270(1Mbps)/
Cache Rec Time Settings vary according to the Sets the Picture Cache Rec time, when Picture 480×270(0.5Mbps)
recording format setting. Cache Rec is set to On. Frame Rate 23.98fps/25fps/29.97fps/50fps/ Selects the frame rate of the proxy recording
For details, see “Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings” 59.94fps format.
(page 165) in the Appendix. Bit Rate 9Mbps/6Mbps/3Mbps/ Selects the bit rate of the proxy recording format.
Interval Rec On/Off Turns Interval Rec mode on/off. (When set to On, 1Mbps/0.5Mbps
the settings for other special recording modes are Audio Channel CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 Selects the audio channel to record to proxy data.
set to Off.)
Operation >Assignable Switch
Number of Frames The available settings vary When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
Assigns functions to assignable switches.
depending on the Format number of frames to shoot in one Interval Rec
>Frequency setting. take. For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124).
2frames/6frames/12frames When the recording format frame rate is 50P or Item Setting Description
59.94P. <0> page 124 Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 0 switch.
1frame/3frames/6frames/ When the recording format frame rate is 23.98P,
<1> page 125 Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 1 switch.
9frames 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
<4> page 125 Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 4 switch.
<5> page 125 Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 5 switch.
100
Operation >Assignable Switch Operation >Marker

Assigns functions to assignable switches. Sets the marker display in the viewfinder.
For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124). Item Setting Description
Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Lens RET page 126 Assigns a function to RET button on the lens. [Note]
When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 switch, this
Online page 125 Assigns a function to the ONLINE button.
setting is disabled.
Zoom Speed 0 to 20 to 99 When Zoom has been assigned to the Color White/Yellow/Cyan/Green/ Selects the marker display color.
ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch, this sets the zoom Magenta/Red/Blue
speed.
Center Marker 1/2/3/4/Off When the center marker is displayed, selects the
Operation >VF Setting type. Select Off if you do not want to display the
Sets the viewfinder screen. marker.
Item Setting Description Safety Zone On/Off Turns the safety zone indicator on/off.
Color –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the color depth of the viewfinder image. Safety Area 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the safety zone range.
Color Mode Color/B&W Selects the viewfinder display mode (when using Aspect Marker Line/Mask/Off When an aspect marker is to be displayed, selects
CBK-VF02). the display method. Select Off if you do not want
Color: Color to display the marker.
B&W: Black & white Line: Show as white lines.
Peaking Type Normal/Color Selects the type of peaking (when using CBK- Mask: Displays a lower video signal level for areas
VF02). outside the marker area.
Normal: Normal peaking Aspect Select 15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.66:1/ Selects the aspect ratio of the marker.
Color: Color peaking 1.85:1/2.35:1/2.4:1
Peaking Frequency Normal/High When Peaking Type is set to Normal, this selects Aspect Mask 0% to 12% to 15% When the Aspect Marker setting is Mask, this sets
Normal or High peaking frequency (when using the video signal level of areas outside the marker
CBK-VF02). area as a percentage value relative to the video
Peaking Color B&W/Red/Yellow/Blue Selects the peaking color when Peaking Type is signal level of areas inside the marker area.
set to Color (when using CBK-VF02). Aspect Safety Zone On/Off Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/off.
B&W: Black & white Aspect Safety Area 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the size of the aspect safety zone marker
Red: Red (as a percentage of total screen size).
Yellow: Yellow
100% Marker On/Off Turns the 100% safety zone marker indicator on/
Blue: Blue
off.
VF Detail Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the detail level (set on the camcorder) of the
User Box On/Off Turns the box cursor display on/off.
viewfinder (when using HDVF-20A).
User Box Width 40 to 500 to 999 Sets the box cursor width (distance from the
center to the left and right edges).
User Box Height 70 to 500 to 999 Sets the box cursor height (distance from the
center to the top and bottom edges).
User Box H Position –479 to 0 to 479 Sets the horizontal position of the box cursor
center.
User Box V Position –464 to 0 to 464 Sets the vertical position of the box cursor center.
101
Operation >Gain Switch Operation >Auto Iris

Sets the gain value switch settings. Sets the auto iris.
Gain<L> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value for the L position of the Iris APL Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 If the Mode setting for Auto Iris is set to Standard,
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB GAIN switch. sets the mix ratio of peak to mean auto iris
Gain<M> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value for the M position of the detection value.
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB GAIN switch. Iris Var Width 40 to 500 to 999 Sets the width of the window when Iris Window is
Gain<H> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value for the H position of the set to Var.
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB GAIN switch. Iris Var Height 70 to 500 to 999 Sets the height of the window when Iris Window
Gain <Turbo> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value when the Turbo Gain is set to Var.
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB function is assigned to an assignable switch. Iris Var H Position –479 to 0 to 479 Sets the horizontal position of the window when
Shockless Gain On/Off Turns shockless gain (function that switches the Iris Window is set to Var.
gain smoothly when the gain is switched) on/off. Iris Var V Position –464 to 0 to 464 Sets the vertical position of the window when Iris
Window is set to Var.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris. Operation >Zebra
Item Setting Description Sets the zebra display for video displayed in the viewfinder.
Iris Override On/Off Turns iris override (setting opens or closes the iris [Note]
The gamma display assist effect is not applied.
more than normal) on/off.
Mode Backlight/Standard/Spotlight Selects the control mode of the auto iris. Item Setting Description
Backlight: Backlight mode (mode for reduced Zebra Select 1/2/Both Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra 1, Zebra 2,
darkening of a subject when the subject is Both).
backlit) Zebra1 Level 0% to 70% to 107% Sets the Zebra 1 display level.
Standard: Standard mode (cannot be selected
Zebra1 Aperture Level 1% to 10% to 20% Sets the Zebra 1 aperture level.
when using optional remote control
connection) Zebra2 Level 1% to 100% to 109% Sets the Zebra 2 display level.
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (mode for reduced Operation >Display On/Off
blown out highlights when subject is lit by Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
spotlighting)
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the convergence target level (larger values
increase brightness.) Video Level Warning On/Off Turns the warnings that appear when the video
level is too bright or too dark on/off.
Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the control speed (speed of response to
changes in the video). (Larger values specify Shutter Setting On/Off Turns the shutter mode and shutter speed
quicker reaction times.) indicators on/off.
Clip High light On/Off Turns the function that ignores brightest areas to ND Filter Position On/Off Turns the ND filter setting indicator on/off.
provide a flatter reaction to high luminance on/ Gain Setting On/Off Turns the gain setting indicator on/off.
off. Rec/Play Status On/Off Turns the recording and playback indicators on/
Detect Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the type of auto iris detection window. off.
Var: Variable Color Temp. On/Off Turns the color temperature indicator on/off.
Detect Window On/Off Turns the function that displays the auto iris
Frame Rate/Interval On/Off Turns the special recording mode indicator on/
Indication detection window frame using a marker on/off.
off.
102
Operation >Display On/Off Operation >Display On/Off

Selects the items to display in the viewfinder. Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Battery Remain Auto/Voltage/Off Sets the mode of the remaining battery capacity Video Signal Monitor Off/Waveform/Vector/Histogram Turns the output video signal status indicator on/
and input voltage indicators. off, and selects the type of video signal to display
Auto: Displays the remaining capacity, according (page 18).
to the battery type. [Note]
Voltage: Displays the input voltage, regardless of Not displayed in the following circumstances.
the battery type. When Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and
Off: No display. SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off.
When Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the
Timecode On/Off Turns the display of time data (timecode, user bits,
setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P.
counter, duration) on/off.
Clip Name On/Off Turns the clip name display on/off.
Audio Level Meter On/Off Turns the display of the audio level meter on/off.
Focus Assist Indicator On/Off Turns the focus assist indicator on/off.
Media Status On/Off Turns the media status indicator on/off.
Focus Area Marker On/Off Turns the focus area marker indicator on/off.
SD Card(Utility) On/Off Turns the SD card (Utility) indicator on/off.
Lens Info Meter/Feet/Off Selects whether to display depth of field and the
Focus Position Meter/Feet/Off Turns the lens focus position indicator on/off and
units to display.
selects the display units.
WRR RF Level On/Off Turns the wireless tuner reception status indicator
Iris Position On/Off Turns the lens iris position indicator on/off.
on/off.
Zoom Position On/Off Turns the lens zoom position indicator on/off. Clip Number On/Off Turns the clip information display on/off.
Extender On/Off Turns the lens and extender indicator on/off.
Operation >"!"LED
ALAC On/Off Turns the lens aberration correction indicator on/ Sets the “!” indicator in the viewfinder. (Enabled when using HDVF-20A).
off.
AE Mode On/Off Turns AE mode and the AE level setting indicator
on/off. Gain <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the gain is set to other than 0 dB.
Focus Mode On/Off Turns the focus mode indicator on/off.
Shutter <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
White Balance Mode On/Off Turns the white balance mode indicator on/off.
when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
CC5600K On/Off Turns the CC5600K indicator on/off.
White Preset <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
Rec Format On/Off Turns the recording format indicator on/off. when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
Gamma On/Off Turns the selected gamma type indicator on/off. ATW Run <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
Timecode Lock On/Off Turns the timecode indicator on/off. when ATW is used.
Network Condition On/Off Turns the network connection status indicator on/ Extender <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
off. when the digital extender function or lens
extender is used.
Proxy Status On/Off Turns the proxy status indicator on/off.
NW Client Mode Status On/Off Turns the network client mode indicator on/off. Filter <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
Streaming Status On/Off Turns streaming transmission on/off. when the ND filter is set to other than 1.
GPS On/Off Turns the GPS reception status indicator on/off. Iris Override <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off
when the auto iris override is not set to Standard.
103
Operation >White Setting Operation >Offset White

Makes settings related to white balance adjustment. Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
White Switch Memory/ATW Sets the operating mode selected by the B Warm Cool –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color temperature, for
position of the WHITE BAL switch. Balance<A> use when a satisfactory image cannot be
Memory: Auto white balance obtained with the Warm Cool <A> setting.
ATW: Auto tracing white balance Offset White On/Off When this is set to On, the offset adjusted here is
Shockless White Off/1/2/3 Selects the transition time when the WHITE BAL added to the white balance of channel B.
switch setting is changed (1 is fastest). Warm Cool Approximate color temperature When Offset White is set to On, this specifies
ATW Speed 1/2/3/4/5 Selects the ATW (auto tracing white) transition display the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the
speed (1 is fastest). (Approx. 1600K to 3200K to white balance in memory A. (Note that the error
ATW Mode Natural/Pure Sets the ATW (Auto tracing white balance) mode. 16000K) increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Natural:‌Automatically adjusts ATW to obtain a Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
natural ambiance according to the Warm Cool –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color temperature, for
lighting of the scene. Balance use when a satisfactory image cannot be
Pure:‌Automatically adjusts the ATW to obtain a obtained with the Warm Cool setting.
result closer to primary colors without
Operation >Shutter
residual bluish or reddish colors.
Sets the shutter operating mode.
AWB Fixed Area On/Off Runs AWB (auto white balance) for the center of
the screen. Item Setting Description
Filter White Memory On/Off Sets the white balance memory area for each Mode Speed/Angle Selects the operating mode of the electronic
FILTER knob position number when White shutter.
Balance is set to Preset or ATW. Speed: Sets the shutter speed as a time (units:
ˎˎ When Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable seconds).
switch, this sets independent white balance Angle: Sets the shutter speed as an angle (units:
memory areas for Electrical CC A, B, C, and D degrees).
settings. Operation >Slow Shutter
ˎˎ When Electrical CC is not assigned to an Sets the slow shutter.
assignable switch, this sets white balance
memory areas for each FILTER knob position
number. Setting On/Off Turns the slow shutter function on/off.
Operation >Offset White Number of Frames 2/3/4/5/6/7/8/16 Sets the number of accumulated frames for the
Makes settings related to white balance offset values. slow shutter function.
Item Setting Description Operation >Time Zone

Sets the time zone.
Offset White<A> On/Off Selects whether to add (On) or not to add (Off) an
offset value to the white balance in memory A. Item Setting Description
Warm Cool <A> Approximate color temperature When Offset White<A> is set to On, this specifies Time Zone UTC +14:00 to UTC Greenwich Selects the difference in time from UTC
display the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the to UTC –12:00 (Greenwich Mean Time) in units of 30 minutes.
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to white balance in memory A. (Note that the error
16000K) increases for higher offset color temperatures.
Adjust while viewing the actual image.)
104
Operation >Clip Operation >Planning Metadata

Makes settings relating to clip names and management. Makes settings relating to planning metadata operations.
[Note] Item Setting Description
Do not assign clip names that begin with the “.” (period) symbol. Clips with names in which the first character is “.”
Load from Media(A) Execute/Cancel Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory
cannot be viewed in the application software on a computer.
card in slot A.
Item Setting Description Execute to display a list of planning metadata files
Clip Naming Title/Plan Selects the clip naming format. stored on the SxS memory card in slot A. Select a
Title: Name specified by Title Prefix. file to display the properties screen.
Plan: Name specified in planning metadata (if no
[Note]
name is specified in planning metadata, the This item is not displayed when the file system is set to
name specified by Title Prefix is used.) FAT.
Title Prefix Text input Sets the title part (4 to 46 alphanumeric Load from Media(B) Execute/Cancel Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory
characters) of clip titles using a character string card in slot B.
entry screen (page 92). Execute to display a list of planning metadata files
Number Set Settings vary according to the Sets the numeric portion of the clip name. stored on the SxS memory card in slot B. Select a
Clip Naming setting. When Clip Naming is set to Title: file to display the properties screen.
0001 to 9999 [Note]
When Clip Naming is set to Plan and a planning This item is not displayed when the file system is set to
metadata file is loaded: FAT.
00001 to 99999 Properties Execute/Cancel Displays the planning metadata content loaded in
Operation >Update Media the camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Updates the media’s management file. Clear Memory Execute/Cancel Clears the planning metadata loaded in the
camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT. Clip Name Disp Title1(ASCII)/Title2(UTF-8) Selects the display format if the clip name is
Item Setting Description specified in planning metadata (page 57).
Media(A) Execute/Cancel Updates the management information of the SxS Sort by Date/Time (0-9)/ Date/Time (0-9): Sort the file list in ascending
memory card in slot A (execute by selecting Date/Time (9-0) order in the Date/Time column (oldest
Execute). creation date at the top).
Date/Time (9-0): Sort the file list in descending
Media(B) Execute/Cancel Updates the management information of the SxS order in the Date/Time column (newest
memory card in slot B (execute by selecting creation date at the top).
Execute).
Operation >USB
Operation >GPS Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
Turns location information (GPS) on/off. camcorder to USB media.
GPS On/Off Turns the GPS function on/off. Select Folder Selects a folder on the USB media.
Creates a new folder on the USB media.
View Clip List Displays a list of clips on the USB media.
Rename Folder Renames a folder on the USB media.
Error Check On/Off Selects whether to perform error checking when
copying clips from the recording media inserted
in an SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media.
105
Operation >USB
Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
camcorder to USB media.
Format USB Execute/Cancel Formats the USB media (execute by selecting
Execute).
Copy to USB Media(A) to USB/ Selects the target slot when copying all clips from
Media(B) to USB/ an SxS card slot.
Media(A)(B) to USB Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording
media inserted in slot A.
Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording
media inserted in slot B.
Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A and slot B.
Media Remain (Free space: numeric display and Displays the remaining free space on the USB
bar display) media.
Operation >Flash Band Reduce
Corrects the flashband phenomena.
[Note]
This item is disabled (grayed out) during recording and when Slow&Quick is set to On.
Setting On/Off Turns the flashband reduction function on/off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Momentary noise may occur due to discontinuous
video and audio when switching Flash Band Reduce
on/off.
ˎˎ Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the
function does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is
set to ON.
ˎˎ The setting returns to the default value when power
is switched off.
106
Paint Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Paint >White
Sets the color temperature, and adjusts white balance manually.
Paint >Switch Status
Turns various correction functions and the test signal on/off. Item Setting Description
Item Setting Description Color Temp <A> 1500K to 3200K to 50000K Displays the white balance color temperature
saved in memory A.
Gamma On/Off Turns the gamma function on/off.
Color Temp Balance –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance gain value saved in
Black Gamma On/Off Turns the black gamma function on/off. <A> memory A (linked to R gain and B gain).
Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix function on/off. R Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
Knee On/Off Turns the knee function on/off. memory A.
White Clip On/Off Turns the white clip function on/off. B Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
memory A.
[Note]
If set to Off, it is reset to On when power is next turned Color Temp 1500K to 3200K to 50000K Displays the white balance color temperature
on. saved in memory B.
Detail On/Off Turns the detail function on/off. Color Temp Balance –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance gain values saved in
Aperture On/Off Turns the aperture function on/off. memory B (linked R gain and B gain).
Flare On/Off Turns the flare correction function on/off. R Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
memory B.
Test Saw On/Off Turns the test signal on/off.
B Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
Paint >HDR Paint Setting memory B.
Sets HDR settings when Shooting Mode is set to HDR.
Paint >Black
[Note] Sets the black level (image level without lighting).
Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). You can achieve a desired look by adjusting the black level for deeper or shallower blacks.
HLG Look Natural/Mild/Live Sets the HLG type in HDR mode. Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black level.
Natural: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R black level.
BT.2100(HLG)
Mild: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B black level.
BT.2100(HLG) that delivers milder overall
Paint >Flare
picture quality than Live Look.
Makes settings related to flare correction.
Live: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
Flare is a phenomenon where the video level increases across the entire image due to the effects of bright
BT.2100(HLG) that delivers improved HDR
regions in the image, increasing the brightness of darker regions and reducing contrast. It is caused by
performance.
reflected light inside the lens.
HDR Black Offset –95 to ±0 to +103 Sets the HDR black offset relative to the SDR Item Setting Description
setting (Master Black) in HDR mode.
Setting On/Off Turns the flare correction function on/off.
HDR Knee On/Off Turns the HDR signal knee correction function on/
off when in HDR mode. Master Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master flare correction level.
HDR Knee Point –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee point for HDR signals when HDR R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare correction level.
Knee is set to On. G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare correction level.
HDR Knee Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee slope for HDR signals when HDR Knee is B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare correction level.
set to On.
HDR Black On/Off Turns the function to compress the Black level of the
Compression HDR video to match the SDR video on/off.
107
000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Gamma(HDR) Paint >Gamma

Displays HDR gamma settings. Makes settings related to gamma correction.
[Note]
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an
Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). image.
Gamma Select HLG(Natural) HDR gamma settings (display only) Gamma Select Settings vary according to the Selects the gamma table used for gamma
HLG(Mild) Gamma Category setting. correction.
---
When Gamma Category is STD
Paint >Gamma STD1 DVW: DVW camcorder equivalent
Makes settings related to gamma correction. STD2 x4.5: ×4.5 gain
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an STD3 x3.5: ×3.5 gain
image. STD4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
Item Setting Description STD5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent
Setting On/Off Turns the gamma correction function on/off. STD6 x5.0: ×5.0 gain
Step Gamma 0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 Sets a gamma correction value in 0.05 steps. When Gamma Category is HG
(0.05 steps) HG1 3250G36: Compresses 325% video input to 100% video output.
Master Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master gamma level. HG2 4600G30: Compresses 460% video input to 100% video output.
R Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R gamma level. HG3 3259G40: Compresses 325% video input to 109% video output.
HG4 4609G33: Compresses 460% video input to 109% video output.
G Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G gamma level.
B Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B gamma level. When Gamma Category is User
Gamma Category STD/HG/User Selects the gamma category. User 1: Gamma table registered in User1
STD: Standard gamma curve for video signals User 2: Gamma table registered in User2
HG: Gamma curve that imitates gradation and User 3: Gamma table registered in User3
color reproduction of shooting with film User 4: Gamma table registered in User4
User: User-defined gamma curve created using User 5: Gamma table registered in User5
CvpFileEditorTM V4.2
Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts
of the picture.
Setting On/Off Turns the black gamma correction function on/
off.
[Note]
To enable the black gamma function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid Selects the effective range of the black gamma
correction.
Low: 0 to 3.6%
L.Mid: 0 to 7.2%
H.Mid: 0 to 14.4%
Master Black Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black gamma level.
108
Paint >Knee Paint >Detail(HD)/Detail(SD)

Makes settings related to knee correction. Makes settings related to detail adjustments in HD mode and SD mode.
Knee correction is processing that prevents blown out highlights by compressing the bright parts of the Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the outline of the
image in response to the upper limit for the dynamic range of the recorded/output image. The signal level subject.
where knee processing begins is called the “knee point,” and the slope of knee compression is called the Item Setting Description
“knee slope.”
Knee Aperture On/Off Turns the knee aperture correction function on/
Item Setting Description off.
Setting On/Off Turns the knee correction function on/off. Knee Aperture Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee aperture level.
Point 75% to 95% to 109% Sets the knee point when the DCC function is off. Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the detail limiter for both the white-side and
Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee slope when the DCC function is off. black-side directions.
Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee saturation function on/off. White Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white-side detail limiter.
[Note] Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the black-side detail limiter.
To enable the knee saturation function, set Saturation V Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the black-side V detail limiter.
Mode to Knee.
V Detail Creation NAM/Y/G/G+R Selects the source signal used to generate the V
Knee Saturation Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee saturation level.
detail signal.
Paint >White Clip NAM: V detail signal created from the R signal, V
Makes settings related to white clip adjustment. detail signal created from the G signal, or V
White clip processing limits the maximum level of video output signals. The maximum video output signal detail signal created from the B signal,
value is called the “white clip level.” whichever signal has the highest level
Item Setting Description Y: Y signal
G: G signal
Setting On/Off Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off. G+R: Mixed signal comprising the G signal and R
Level 90.0% to 109.0% Sets the white clip level. signal in a 1:1 ratio
The default setting varies The default setting is 108.0% when the system Cross Color Suppress –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the cross color suppression level of the detail.
according to the system frequency is 59.94, 29.97, 24, or 23.98. The setting (SD mode) [Note]
frequency setting. is 105.0% when the system frequency is 50.25.
This setting is disabled if the detail adjustment function
Paint >Detail(HD)/Detail(SD) is Off, and when Operation Format Frequency in the
Makes settings related to detail adjustments in HD mode and SD mode. setup menu is set to 50 or 25.
Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the outline of the Paint >Aperture
subject. Makes settings related to aperture correction.
Item Setting Description Aperture correction processing improves resolution by adding high-frequency aperture signals to the
Setting On/Off Turns the detail adjustment function on/off. video signal, which corrects deterioration due to high-frequency characteristics.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the detail level.
Setting On/Off Turns the aperture correction function on/off.
H/V Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the mix ratio between the H detail level and
the V detail level. Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the aperture level.
Crispening –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the crispening level.
Level Depend On/Off Turns the level dependence adjustment function
on/off.
Level Depend Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the level dependence level.
Frequency –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the center frequency of the H detail signal
(larger values give finer detail).
109
Paint >Skin Detail Paint >Matrix

Makes settings related to skin detail correction. Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Skin detail correction processing increases or decreases the detail level of a specified color range, for the Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
purpose of obtaining attractive reproduction of skin tones. You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset Matrix.”
Item Setting Description You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix” function adjusts
the matrix to control color reproduction.
Setting On/Off Turns the skin detail correction function on/off.
Area Detection Execute/Cancel Displays a color detection screen for detecting
colors for skin detail correction (execute by User Matrix G-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix.
selecting Execute). User Matrix G-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix.
Area Indication On/Off Turns the display of a zebra pattern in areas User Matrix B-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix.
targeted for skin detail correction on/off. User Matrix B-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the skin detail level.
Paint >Multi Matrix
Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of the color targeted for skin
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
detail correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Hue 0 to 359 Sets the hue of the color targeted for skin detail
correction.
Setting On/Off Turns the multi matrix correction function on/off.
Width 0 to 40 to 90 Sets the range for the hue of the color targeted
for skin detail correction. Area Indication On/Off Turns the display of a zebra pattern in the color
area targeted for multi matrix correction on/off.
Paint >Matrix
Color Detection Execute/Cancel Displays a color detection screen for detecting
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
colors for multi matrix correction (execute by
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
selecting Execute).
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset Matrix.”
You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix” function adjusts Reset Execute/Cancel Sets all hue and saturation on each axis to default
the matrix to control color reproduction. values (execute by selecting Execute).
Item Setting Description Axis B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/R/R+/YL–/ Sets the color targeted for multi matrix correction
YL/YL+/G–/G/G+/CY/CY+/B– (16-axis mode)
Setting On/Off Turns the matrix correction function on/off.
Hue –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the hue of the color targeted for multi matrix
Adaptive Matrix On/Off Turns the adaptive matrix function on/off. correction for each 16-axis mode.
Preset Matrix On/Off Turns the preset matrix function on/off. Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of the color targeted for multi
Preset Select 1: SMPTE240M Selects a preset matrix. matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
2: ITU-709 1: SMPTE240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
Paint >V Modulation
3: SMPTE Wide 2: ITU-709: ITU-709 equivalent
Makes settings related to V modulation shading correction.
4: NTSC 3: SMPTE Wide: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
V modulation shading corrects the vertical slope of the sensitivity arising from the relationship between
5: EBU 4: NTSC: NTSC equivalent
the lens and prism.
6: PAL 5: EBU: EBU equivalent
6: PAL: PAL equivalent Item Setting Description
User Matrix On/Off Turns the user matrix correction function on/off. Setting On/Off Turns the V modulation shading correction
function on/off.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of the color of the entire
image. Master V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master V modulation level.
Phase –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the color tone (phase) of the entire image. R V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the V modulation level of the R signal.
User Matrix R-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix. G V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the V modulation level of the G signal.
User Matrix R-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix. B V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the V modulation level of the B signal.
110
Paint >Low Key Saturation

Makes settings related to low key saturation correction.
Corrects the saturation of colors in dark parts of the image.
Setting On/Off Turns the low key saturation correction function
on/off.
[Note]
To enable the low key saturation function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of colors in low luminance
areas.
Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid Selects the luminance level for which low key
saturation is enabled.
Paint >Saturation Mode
Makes settings related to saturation correction.
Saturation Mode Knee/Low Key Selects whether the saturation function operates
at high levels (Knee) or low levels (Low Key).
Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
Black Gamma On/Off Turns the black gamma correction function on/
off.
Low Key Saturation On/Off Turns the low key saturation function on/off.
Paint >Noise Suppression
Makes settings related to noise suppression (noise compression).
This allows you to effectively suppress noise components while preserving fine edge components of the
subject.
Setting On/Off Turns the noise suppression function on/off.
Level Low/Mid/High Selects the noise suppression level.
111
Maintenance Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Maintenance >Battery
Makes settings related to batteries.
Maintenance >White Shading
Makes settings related to white shading correction. Item Setting Description
White shading is required for each different lens to correct luminance and color irregularities in bright Near End:Info Battery 5%/10%/15%...95%/100% Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
areas arising from lens characteristics. Near End” warning when using a BP-FLX75/
Item Setting Description GL65A/GL95A/GL95B battery pack.
Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target for white shading correction. End:Info Battery 0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5% Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
End” warning when using a BP-FLX75/GL65A/
White H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value for
GL95A/GL95B battery pack.
the horizontal direction.
Near End:Sony Battery 11.5V to 17V Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
White H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value
(0.1V steps) Near End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S
for the horizontal direction.
battery pack.
White V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value for
End:Sony Battery 11.0V to 12.5V Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
the vertical direction.
(0.1V steps) End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S battery
White V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value pack.
for the vertical direction.
Near End:Other Battery 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
White Saw/Para On/Off Turns the white shading SAW/parabola correction (0.1V steps) Near End” warning when using a non-Sony
function on/off. battery pack.
Maintenance >Black Shading End:Other Battery 11.0V to 14.0V Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Makes settings related to black shading correction. (0.1V steps) End” warning when using a non-Sony battery
Item Setting Description pack.
Detected Battery Sony Info Battery/ Displays the result of automatic battery pack type
Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target for black shading correction.
Sony Battery/Other Battery/DC IN detection.
Black H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW black shading correction value for
the horizontal direction. Maintenance >DC Voltage Alarm
Sets alarms relating to external DC supply voltage.
Black H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola black shading correction value
for the horizontal direction. Item Setting Description
Black V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW black shading correction value for DC Low Voltage1 11.5V to 17V Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
the vertical direction. (0.1V steps) Near End” warning when using an external power
Black V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola black shading correction value source connected to the DC IN connector.
for the vertical direction. DC Low Voltage2 11.0V to 14.0V Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery
Black Saw/Para On/Off Turns the black shading SAW/parabola correction (0.1V steps) End” warning when using an external power
function on/off. source connected to the DC IN connector.
Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black level. Maintenance >Audio
Master Gain (TMP) –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Sets a temporary master gain value. Makes settings related to audio.
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB Item Setting Description
Front MIC Select Mono/Stereo Selects whether the front microphone is
monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Rear XLR Auto On/Off Turns the automatic detection function on/off for
detecting cable connections on the AUDIO IN
CH-1/CH-2 connectors on the rear panel.
112
000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Audio Maintenance >Audio

Makes settings related to audio. Makes settings related to audio.
Front MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference level of the front Output Limiter On/Off Turns the audio output limiter on/off.
–40dB/–30dB microphone for channel 1. CH1 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 1 wind noise reduction filter
Front MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference level of the front on/off.
–40dB/–30dB microphone for channel 2. CH2 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 2 wind noise reduction filter
Rear MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO on/off.
–40dB/–30dB IN CH1 switch is set to MIC. CH3 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 3 wind noise reduction filter
Rear MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO on/off.
–40dB/–30dB IN CH2 switch is set to MIC. CH4 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 4 wind noise reduction filter
Line Input Ref +4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO on/off.
IN CH1 and AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to 1kHz Tone on Color On/Off/Auto Sets whether to output (On) or not output (Off) a
LINE. Bars 1 kHz test signal in color bar mode.
Min Alarm Volume Off/Set Selects the volume when the ALARM knob is Auto: Outputs a test signal only when the AUDIO
turned all the way down. SELECT CH1 switch is set to AUTO.
Off: Inaudible MIC CH1 Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
Set: Audible when recording input audio from the front
Speaker Attenuate Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB Selects the volume from the monitor speakers microphone on channel 1.
(does not affect earphone volume). Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Headphone Out Mono/Stereo Selects whether the earphones are monaural Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
(Mono) or stereo (Stereo). Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
Reference Level –20dB/–18dB/–16dB/ Sets the reference input level. It also sets the knob (linked control)
–12dB/EBUL output level of the 1 kHz test signal. MIC CH2 Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
Reference Out +4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Sets the output level relative to the reference when recording input audio from the front
input level. microphone on channel 2.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
CH1&2 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo Automatically adjusts the input level of analog
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2, and
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL
selects whether to make the adjustments
knob (linked control)
separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo
mode (Stereo). Rear1/WRR Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a
wireless microphone or a device connected to the
CH3&4 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo Automatically adjusts the input level of analog
AUDIO IN CH-1 connector on the rear panel.
audio signals recorded on channels 3 and 4, and
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
selects whether to make the adjustments
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
mode (Stereo).
knob (linked control)
AGC Spec –6dB/–9dB/–12dB/ Selects the AGC characteristic (saturation level).
–15dB/–17dB
Limiter Mode Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/ Selects the limiter characteristic (saturation level)
–15dB/–17dB for large input signals when adjusting the audio
input level manually. Select Off if not using the
limiter.
113
Maintenance >Audio Maintenance >WRR Setting

Makes settings related to audio. Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Rear2/WRR Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a TX Input Level ---/Mic/Line Displays whether the input level of the transmitter
wireless microphone or a device connected to the whose signals are being received on the channel
AUDIO IN CH-2 connector on the rear panel. selected by WRR CH Select is set to microphone
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel (Mic) or line (Line).
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel TX ATT Level --- Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL are being received on the channel selected by
knob (linked control) WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies
Audio CH3 Level Side3/Front/Front+Side3 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level depending on the transmitter.)
recorded on channel 3. TX LCF Frequency --- Sets the low cut filter frequency of the transmitter
Side3: LEVEL knob on the side panel whose signals are being received on the channel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range
Front+Side3: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob varies depending on the transmitter.)
(linked control)
TX System Delay Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms Sets the amount of audio delay.
Audio CH4 Level Side4/Front/Front+Side4 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level Auto: Automatically corrects for the amount of
recorded on channel 4. delay so that the delay in the audio from the
Side4: LEVEL knob on the side panel wireless tuner is zero.
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel 0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of estimated
Front+Side4: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob wireless system delay, for cases in which
(linked control) several wireless systems are being used via a
Maintenance >WRR Setting device such as an audio mixer.
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner. TX RF Power High (Power value) mW/Mid Sets the RF power level of the transmitter
(Power value) mW/Low (Power communicating on the channel selected by WRR
value) mW CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on
WRR Valid CH Sel All/CH1 Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the the transmitter.)
wireless tuner (All) or channel 1 only (CH1).
TX Power Save Active/Sleep Sets the power saving mode of the transmitter
WRR CH Select TX1/TX2 Selects the reception channel for display in the whose signals are being received on the channel
menu. selected by WRR CH Select.
TX1: Displays channel 1. Active: Set the transmitter to startup mode.
TX2: Displays channel 2. Sleep: Set the transmitter to power saving mode.
WRR Delay Comp On/Off Selects whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) the TX-Cam Power Sync Off/On Sets whether the transmitter power-save state is
delay compensation function for wireless input also switched in sync with the POWER switch of
audio. (When On is selected, all E-E output audio the camcorder.
is delayed by about 8 ms.)
TX --- Displays the name of the transmitter whose
signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select.
TX Audio Peak ---/Peak Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter
whose signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select are over peak.
114
Maintenance >Time Code Maintenance >Camera Config

Makes settings related to timecode. Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
TC Out Auto/Generator Selects the timecode output. HD SDI Remote I/F Off/Characters/ Sets whether to enable the recording control
Auto: Outputs the timecode generator value Green Tally/Red Tally function for an external device connected to the
during recording, and the timecode reader SDI OUT 1/2 connector (HD SDI output) of the
value during playback. camcorder. If enabled, it selects the indicator used
Generator: Outputs the timecode generator value to display the recording state of the external
during recording and playback. device.
DF/NDF DF/NDF Selects drop-frame mode (DF) or non-drop-frame Off: Recording control function is disabled.
mode (NDF). Chara: Displayed using the external device control
indicator on the status display in the
LTC UBIT Fix/Time Sets the data recorded in LTC user bits.
viewfinder.
Fix: Records user-specified data.
G-Tally: Displayed using the TALLY indicator
Time: Records the current time.
(green tally) in the viewfinder.
Counter Display Counter/Duration Select the method used to reset the counter value R-Tally: Displayed using the REC indicator
displayed on the viewfinder screen. (recording red tally) in the viewfinder.
Counter: Continue to increment until the RESET
Color Bars Select ARIB/100%/75%/SMPTE Selects the color bar type.
button is pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that recording is User Menu Only On/Off Selects whether to display the User menu only
started. (On) or display the menu list (Off) when the
camcorder is displaying the menu.
Maintenance >Essence Mark
User Menu with Lock On/Off Selects whether to lock the menu display,
Makes settings related to essence marks.
showing the User menu only.
Item Setting Description On: Enter an arbitrary passcode number to lock
Find Mode Clip/Rec Start Sets the operation when the NEXT/PREV button is the menu display. (Only the User menu is
pressed. displayed.)
Rec Start: Moves to the next or the previous Off: Enter the passcode number entered when
recording start mark, respectively. “On” was selected to unlock the menu
Clip: Moves to the start of the next clip when the display. (When unlocked, the normal menu
NEXT button is pressed. Moves to the start of list is displayed.)
the current clip when the PREV button is [Note]
pressed (or moves to the start of the previous In normal menu display operation, this item is not
clip if the PREV button is pressed at the start displayed.
of the clip). For details about menu display operation, see
page 93.
RM Common Memory On/Off Selects whether to share (On) or not share (Off)
settings between when using a remote control
unit connection and when the camcorder is
operated locally.
115
Maintenance >Camera Config Maintenance >White Filter

Makes settings related to various camcorder operations. Makes settings related to filters.
RM Rec Start RM/Camera/PARA Selects which of the recording start/stop buttons ND Filter C.Temp On/Off Turns the function that assigns electrical CC filters
are enabled when a remote control unit is to ND filters on/off.
connected. ND FLT C.Temp<1> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when electrical CC
RM: Remote control unit filters are assigned to ND filters (filter 1).
Camera: Camcorder
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when electrical CC
PARA: Both
filters are assigned to ND filters (filters 2 to 4).
SET Key on Thumbnail Pause/Play Selects the operation when the MENU knob is
Electrical CC<A> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when the electrical
pressed with only one thumbnail selected.
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
ALAC Auto/Off Sets whether to execute ALAC (Auto Lens assignable switch.
Aberration Correction) automatically.
Electrical CC 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when the electrical
Auto: Execute ALAC automatically when an
CC filter switching function is assigned to an
ALAC-compatible lens is attached and ALAC
assignable switch.
is enabled.
Off: Do not execute. Electrical CC<C> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/ Selects the color temperature when the electrical
--- CC filter switching function is assigned to an
[Note] assignable switch. Select “----” if not using C.
Depending on the aberration correction lens, the
aberration correction function may not be activated Electrical CC<D> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/ Selects the color temperature when the electrical
immediately (“ALAC” does not appear on the viewfinder --- CC filter switching function is assigned to an
screen) after turning the power on, even when this assignable switch. Select “----” if not using D.
setting is set to Auto. If this occurs, turn the lens zoom
ring and focus ring to the end stop and back, and check Maintenance >DCC Adjust
whether the “ALAC” indicator appears on the viewfinder Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control).
screen.
Contact a Sony service representative for information about
DCC Function Select DCC/Fix Selects the setting method for the knee point
aberration correction lenses.
when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM with
Maintenance >Preset White DCC on.
Makes settings related to white balance preset values. DCC: Automatically adjusts the knee point to
match the luminance of the subject.
Fix: Sets the knee point to a fixed value.
Color Temp 1500K to 3200K to 50000K Sets the white balance preset value.
DCC D Range 400%/450%/500%/550%/ Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/DCC
Color Temp –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the fine color temperature settings, for use 600% switch is set to CAM with DCC on.
Balance when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained DCC Point –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the DCC minimum knee point.
using Color Temp .
DCC Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the gain relative to the DCC detected value.
R Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R gain preset value.
DCC Delay Time –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the DCC control speed (speed of response to
B Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B gain preset value.
changes in the video).
AWB Enable On/Off Turns execution of the AWB (auto white balance) DCC Peak Filter –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the response sensitivity relative to the
function on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set peaks in DCC detected values.
to PRST.
116
Maintenance >Flicker Reduce Maintenance >APR

Makes settings related to the flicker correction function. Makes settings related to automatic pixel noise reduction.
You can correct the flicker created when shooting a subject under lighting where the brightness varies Item Setting Description
periodically, such as fluorescent lighting, due to the relationship between the frequency and the recording
frame rate. APR Execute/Cancel Executes the automatic pixel noise reduction
function to suppress white flecks in SLS mode
Mode Auto/On/Off Sets the operation of the flicker correction Reset Execute/Cancel Deletes white flecks data that were added by
function. execution of the APR and automatic black balance
On: Always operating. adjustment functions (execute by selecting
Auto: Operates when flicker is detected. Execute).
Off: Does not operate.
Frequency 60Hz/50Hz Synchronizes with the power supply frequency of Maintenance >Setup for Mobile App
lighting causing flicker. Configures connection settings using the network setup assist tool.
The factory setting is 60Hz when System Item Setting Description
Frequency is set to 59.94, 29.97, or 23.98. Setup Starts configuring connection settings using the
The factory setting is 50Hz when System network setup assist tool.
Frequency is set to 50 or 25.
Maintenance >Access Authentication
Maintenance >Genlock Makes settings related to access authentication.
Makes settings related to genlock.
User Name (Displays the current user name.) Sets the user name (arbitrary name for access
Genlock On/Off Turns the genlock function on/off. authentication). Set to “admin” by factory default.
Reference Internal/External(HD)/ Displays the type of reference signal used by the Password ******* Sets the password for access authentication.
External(SD)/SDI IN/CA camcorder. Valid passwords must be 8 characters or longer,
Maintenance >Auto Shading and contain at least one alphanumeric character
Executes auto black shading correction. and at least one numeric character.
The entered password is displayed using asterisks.
Item Setting Description The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT
Auto Black Shading Execute/Cancel Executes auto black shading correction (execute key is pressed.
by selecting Execute).
[Note]
Reset Black Shading Execute/Cancel Clears the black shading correction value (execute The password setting is reset when updating the
by selecting Execute). firmware of the unit from a version prior to 5.0 to version
5.0 or later, or a version prior to 6.1 to version 6.1 or later.
Master Gain (TMP) –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Sets a temporary master gain value. (The value is
In this case, set the password again.
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB the same as the value selected with the GAIN
switch.) Generate Password Execute/Cancel Automatically generates a password for access
authentication.
Show Settings Displays the user name and password for access
authentication.
117
Maintenance >Network Maintenance >Network

Makes settings related to network connections. Makes settings related to network connections.
Setting On/Off Turns the network function on/off. Wi-Fi Station Detail Password (password of access Enter the password of the access point of the
Wi-Fi Mode Wi-Fi Access Point/ Sets the operating mode for wireless LAN Settings point) destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station
Wi-Fi Station/Off connections. mode.
The entered password is displayed using asterisks.
NFC Execute/Cancel Initiates a one-touch connection using NFC
The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT
key is pressed.
WPS Execute/Cancel Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) (execute by The following characters are valid.
selecting Execute). Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z
Channel Auto(5GHz)/Auto/CH1/CH2/ Sets the wireless LAN channel. Alphabetic (lower case): a to z
CH3/CH4/CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/ [Note] Numeric: 0 to 9
CH9/CH10/CH11 “Auto(5GHz)” may not be displayed, depending on the Symbols: !"#$%&'*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~
wireless LAN module used. DHCP (On/Off) Sets DHCP in Wi-Fi Station mode.
SSID & Password (SSID display) Displays the SSID and password. When set to On, an IP address is automatically
(Password display) assigned to the camcorder. To enter the
SSID (SSID display) Displays the SSID of the access point of the camcorder IP address manually, set to Off.
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
mode. automatically, DHCP/Off: Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Wi-Fi Station Remote On/Off Enables/disables operation from a Wi-Fi remote 192.168.1.50)
control, web menu, and the “Content Browser Subnet Mask (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
Mobile” application when connected to a network automatically, DHCP/Off: Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
using Wi-Fi Station mode. 255.255.255.0)
Wi-Fi Station Detail Scan Networks (Execute/Cancel) Starts auto detection of network destinations for Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the gateway for the access point.
Settings connection (execute by selecting Execute). automatically, DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
SSID (SSID of access point) Enter the SSID of the access point of the DNS Auto (On/Off) Enables/disables automatic DNS.
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station When set to On, the address of the DNS server is
mode. obtained automatically.
The following characters are valid. Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/ Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z On: obtain automatically, DNS Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Alphabetic (lower case): a to z Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Numeric: 0 to 9 Secondary DNS Server (DNS Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
Symbols: !"#$%&'*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~ Auto/On: obtain automatically, Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Device Name (Wi-Fi) Displays the name of network device attached to
the USB wireless LAN module connector
IP Address (Wi-Fi) Displays the IP address when connected to a
wireless LAN.
Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi) Displays the subnet mask when connected to a
wireless LAN.
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) Displays the MAC address of the USB Wireless LAN
Module attached to the camcorder.
118
Maintenance >Network Maintenance >Network

Makes settings related to network connections. Makes settings related to network connections.
Regenerate Password Execute/Cancel Regenerates a password (execute by selecting Wired LAN Detail DHCP (On/Off) Enables/disables DHCP.
Execute). Settings When set to On, an IP address is automatically
Modem On/Off Enables/disables the network connection using a assigned to the camcorder.
3G/4G modem or USB tethering. To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set
to Off.
Modem Remote On/Off Enables/disables the web UI, Wi-Fi remote control,
and CBM remote control when a modem is IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
connected. automatically, DHCP/Off: Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
192.168.2.50)
[Note]
The functions are disabled regardless of this setting Subnet Mask (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
when a 3G/4G modem is connected. automatically, DHCP/Off: Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Public Key Creation Execute/Cancel Generates a public key/private key. 255.255.255.0)
Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the gateway for the access point.
[Note]
The generated public key/private key will be deleted
automatically, DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
when Maintenance >Network Reset is executed. DNS Auto (On/Off) Enables/disables automatic DNS.
Public Key Clear Execute/Cancel Clears a public key/private key. When set to On, the address of the DNS server is
obtained automatically.
Create Key Date Displays the creation date of the public key/
private key. Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/ Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
On: obtain automatically, DNS Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Wired LAN Enable/Disable Enables/disables wired LAN connection.
Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Wired LAN Remote On/Off If connected to a network using a LAN cable, Secondary DNS Server (DNS Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
operation from a Wi-Fi remote control, web Auto/On: obtain automatically, Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
menu, and “Content Browser Mobile” is enabled. DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
Makes settings related to network client mode for connection with C3 Portal or Sony Network RX Station.
[Note]
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
Setting On/Off Turns network client mode on/off.
[Note]
When set to On, the firmware version cannot be
updated.
Preset Select Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3 Selects preset settings (Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3)
comprising network client mode connection
settings configured beforehand.
119
Maintenance >Network Client Mode Maintenance >File Transfer

Makes settings related to network client mode for connection with C3 Portal or Sony Network RX Station. Makes settings related to network transfer of data on SxS memory cards in the camcorder.
[Note] Item Setting Description
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
Remote File Transfer Enable/Disable Sets whether to enable/disable switching to
Item Setting Description transfer mode to transfer original files recorded on
Preset 1 (Preset name display) Enter the preset name. the camcorder by remote operation over a
network.
CCM Address Sets the address of the CCM to connect.
Enable: Enable switching to transfer mode by
Host name or IP address
remote operation over a network.
CCM Port (1 to 65535 (8443)) Sets the port number of the CCM to connect It is not necessary to execute a transfer using
User Name Sets the user name for authentication of the CCM Maintenance >File Transfer.
to connect. Disable: Disable switching to transfer mode by
Password Sets the password of the CCM to connect. remote operation over a network.
The entered password is displayed using asterisks. It is necessary to execute a transfer using
The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT Maintenance >File Transfer.
key is pressed. Auto Upload (Proxy) Off/On Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.
NCM with Proxy (Enable/Disable) Enable: Enable proxy recording when connected Default Upload Server Sony Ci/NCM RX Server/Server Selects the destination server for uploading
with a CCM. Settings1/Server Settings2/Server original files and proxy files.
Disable: Disable proxy recording when connected Settings3 For Server Settings1 to 3, the name of the servers
with a CCM. entered in Display Name on the Upload Settings
Camera Control (Enable/Disable) Enables/disables camera control operation when page of the web menu are displayed. For details,
connected with a CCM. see “To register a destination server” (page 80).
Camera Setting (Always/ Enables/disables ALL file operations when Clear Completed Jobs Execute/Cancel Clears the transfer completed jobs from the job
Onetime/Off) connected with a CCM. list.
Always: Enable ALL file operations all the time. Clear All Jobs Execute/Cancel Clears all jobs registered in the job list.
Onetime: Enable ALL file operations one time.
View Job List Displays the transfer job list.
Off: Disable ALL file operations.
Preset 2 Same as Preset 1 Same as Preset 1 Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Preset 3 Same as Preset 1 Same as Preset 1
Maintenance >File Transfer
Setting On/Off Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Makes settings related to network transfer of data on SxS memory cards in the camcorder.
Item Setting Description [Notes]
ˎˎ This setting is set to Off when you turn the power on
File Transfer Execute/Cancel Switches to transfer mode (execute by selecting again.
Execute). ˎˎ When set to On, the monitoring function of Content
Browser Mobile is not available.
Preset Select Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3 Selects a streaming preset.
The settings are common to Preset 1/Preset 2/
Preset 3. See below for descriptions for the
settings in a preset.
120
Maintenance >Streaming Maintenance >Language

Makes settings related to streaming. Selects the display language for messages.
Size HD Auto/ Sets the size of video for streaming. Select English/ / Selects the display language for messages.
1280×720/ When “HD Auto” is selected, the size is set to Espanol/Русский
640×360/ 1920×1080 or 1280×720, according to the setting
480×270/ of the recording format recorded on the SxS Maintenance >Hours Meter
320×180 memory card or the format of the clip to be Makes settings related to the digital hours meter.
played back. Item Setting Description
Bit Rate 9Mbps/ Sets the bit rate of video for streaming. Hours (System) xxxxH Displays the cumulative hours of use (cannot be
6Mbps/ The selectable bit rate varies depending on the (xxxx hours) reset).
3Mbps/ Size setting.
Hours (Reset) xxxxH Displays the cumulative hours of use (can be
2Mbps/ [Notes] (xxxx hours) reset).
1Mbps/ ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
0.5Mbps/ Reset Execute/Cancel Resets the Hours (Reset) display to 0 (execute by
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed
0.3Mbps(Mono L)/ to other parties. Always check that the transmission selecting Execute).
0.3Mbps(Mono R)/ destination can receive the streaming data.
Maintenance >Network Reset
0.2Mbps(Mono L)/ ˎˎ The data may be sent to an unintended party if the
address or other settings are configured incorrectly. Returns network-related settings to their factory default state.
0.2Mbps(Mono R)
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the Item Setting Description
status of the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
Reset Execute/Cancel Resets network related settings (execute by
excessive motion. selecting Execute).
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set [Note]
to a large size with a small bit rate. To reduce this,
The public key/private key generated using Maintenance
select a smaller size for the Size setting.
>Network >Public Key Creation will be deleted when
Type MPEG-2 TS/UDP/ Selects the type of video for streaming. this item is executed.
MPEG-2 TS/RTP
Maintenance >Fan Control
Destination Address Character string (0.0.0.0) Enter the address of the transmission destination Sets the fan control mode.
server for streaming data.
Destination Port 1 to 65545 (1234) Enter the port number of the transmission
destination server used for streaming. Setting Auto/Minimum/Off in Rec Selects the fan control mode.
Audio Channel CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 Selects the audio channel for the streaming Maintenance >VF Display Setting
output. Makes settings related to the viewfinder display.
Maintenance >Clock Set Item Setting Description
Sets the internal clock. Chara/Marker 5/4/3/2/1 Sets the brightness of character strings, icons, and
Item Setting Description Brightness markers superimposed in the viewfinder image.
Date Mode YYMMDD/MMDDYY/DDMMYY Selects the display format for dates. Maintenance >Option
12H/24H 12H/24H Selects the clock display format. Performs checks and actions on software options.
Date Displays the date setting screen. Item Setting Description
Time Displays the time setting screen. Type 1 (Option model name) Displays the model name of the first installed
option.
Type 2 (Option model name) Displays the model name of the second installed
option.
121
Maintenance >Option
Performs checks and actions on software options.
Type 3 (Option model name) Displays the model name of the third installed
option.
Install Option Execute/Cancel Displays the screen for installing options (execute
Maintenance >Version
Displays the version of the camcorder, and updates the camcorder.
Number Displays the software version of the camcorder
(Vx.xx).
Version Up Execute/Cancel Updates the software version of the camcorder,
using a card in the UTILITY SD card slot (execute
ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
[Note]
Cannot be selected when the version updater SD card is
not inserted or when Network Client Mode >Setting in
the Maintenance menu is set to On.
Net-Func Version Displays the firmware version of the wireless LAN
Number connection function of the camcorder (Vx.xx).
[Note]
Not displayed when Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in
the Operation menu is set to Off and Network >Setting
in the Maintenance menu is set to Off.
Net-Func Ver.Up Execute/Cancel Updates the software for the wireless LAN
connection function of the camcorder, using a
card in the PROXY SD card slot (execute by
selecting Execute).
ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
ˎˎ SDXC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
[Note]
Cannot be selected when Network Client Mode >Setting
in the Maintenance menu is set to On.
122
File Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
File >User File
Makes settings relating to user file operations. Item Setting Description
Item Setting Description 3Sec Clear Preset On/Off Turns the function that clears the currents settings
and presets of each item on/off, when the MENU
Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading user file settings
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch is pushed up and
from an SD card.
held for three seconds in the CANCEL/PRST
Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving user file settings onto position.
an SD card.
File >Scene File
File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
Makes settings related to scene file operations.
of user files.
Recall User Preset Execute/Cancel Returns the value of menu items registered in the Item Setting Description
User menu to the preset values (execute by Recall Internal Memory Displays a screen for recalling scene files from
selecting [Execute]). internal memory.
Store User Preset Execute/Cancel Stores the value of menu items registered in the Store Internal Memory Displays a screen for storing scene files in internal
User menu items as the preset values (execute by memory.
selecting [Execute]). Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading scene files from an
Clear User Preset Execute/Cancel Returns the current settings and preset values of SD card.
menu items registered in the User menu to the Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving scene files onto an SD
factory default values (execute by selecting card.
[Execute]).
File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
Load Customize Data On/Off Sets whether to load User menu customized of scene files.
information when [Load SD Card] is executed.
Scene White Data On/Off Sets whether to reflect the while balance data of
Load White Data On/Off Sets whether to load white balance information scene files when recalling scene files.
when [Load SD Card] is executed.
File >Reference File
File >All File Makes settings related to reference file operations.
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
Store Reference Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of reference file target
Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading All File settings from menu items as the preset values (execute by
an SD card. selecting [Execute]).
Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving All File settings onto Clear Reference Execute/Cancel Returns the current settings and preset values of
an SD card. reference file target menu items to the factory
File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID default values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
of All Files. Load Reference(SD Execute/Cancel Loads reference file settings from and SD card and
All Preset Execute/Cancel Returns all items to their preset values (execute by Card) sets the preset values (execute by selecting
selecting Execute). [Execute]).
Store All Preset Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of all items as the Save Reference(SD Execute/Cancel Stores the preset values of reference file target
preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Card) menu items to an SD card (execute by selecting
Clear All Preset Execute/Cancel Returns the current settings and presets of All File [Execute]).
menu items to their factory default values File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID
(execute by selecting Execute). of reference files.
123
000 7. Menu Display and Settings: File Menu
File >Lens File File >Lens File

Makes settings related to lens file operations. Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Display Mode Model Name/Lens ID Selects the items to display in the list box that Shading Ch Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target for white shading correction.
appears when saving or loading a file. Shading H SAW –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value in
Recall Internal Memory Displays a screen for recalling lens files from the horizontal direction in the lens file.
internal memory. Shading H PARA –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value
Store Internal Memory Displays a screen for storing lens files in internal in the horizontal direction in the lens file.
memory. Shading V SAW –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value in
Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading lens files from an SD the vertical direction in the lens file.
card. Shading V PARA –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value
Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving lens files onto an SD in the vertical direction in the lens file.
card.
File >User Gamma
File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID Makes settings related to user gamma.
of lens files.
File Source Displays the number of the selected file.
Current Settings Displays a list screen of the current user gamma
Clear Lens Offset Execute/Cancel Clears the lens file (execute by selecting Execute).
file settings (file names).
Lens Auto Recall Off/On(Lens Name)/ Sets whether to automatically recall a lens file
Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading User Gamma
On(Serial Number) when a lens that supports serial communication is
settings from an SD card.
attached.
Reset 1/2/3/4/5/All Resets the settings in the selected user gamma
Lens Serial Number Displays the serial number of the attached lens
file (execute by selecting Execute).
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Select All to reset all user gamma files.
Lens Name Displays the model name of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication only).
Lens Manufacturer Displays the name of the manufacturer of the
attached lens (lenses that support serial
communication only).
Master V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW shading correction value in the
vertical direction in the lens file.
Lens Center H –40 to ±0 to +40 Sets the horizontal position of the center marker
in the lens file.
Lens Center V –40 to ±0 to +40 Sets the vertical position of the center marker in
the lens file.
R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare level in the lens file.
G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare level in the lens file.
B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare level in the lens file.
White Offset R –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance offset R channel correction
value for the lens in the lens file.
White Offset B –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance offset B channel correction
value for the lens in the lens file.
124
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches

Using the Assignable Switch item of the Operation menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the
ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the ONLINE button, and the RET button on the Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
lens.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory.
[Note]
Switch or button Function Assignable Switch setting Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the switch at
ASSIGN. 0 switch No assignment Off that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2 switch or power the
camcorder off and on again.
ASSIGN. 1 switch No assignment Off
Assignable Switch setting Function
Off No assignment
Front Mic Switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected.
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch No assignment Off
Marker Turns the display of all markers on/off.
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch No assignment Off
Picture Cache Rec 1) Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off.
RET button Rec Review (if playback is allowed) Lens RET
Zebra Turns zebra display on/off.
ONLINE button Auto transfer proxy clip Network Client Mode
Clip Continuous Rec Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Rec Source Switches the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and external
input. (If the camcorder is currently recording or playing, the switch takes effect
after recording or playback ends.)
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch Digital Extender ×2 Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/off.
Digital Extender ×3 Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/off.
Digital Extender ×4 Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/off.
Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is
TX Power Save Switches the wireless transmitter power saving mode.
next powered on
Off No assignment — 1) When Picture Cache Rec is assigned, Operation >Rec Function is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be set.
Marker Turns the display of all markers on/off. Setting retained
ATW Hold Holds the white balance setting in the ATW —
(auto-tracking white balance) mode
Picture Cache Rec Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. Setting retained
Focus Magnifier Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained
Zebra Turns zebra display on/off. Setting not retained
Shot Mark1 Writes Shot Mark1. —
Shot Mark2 Writes Shot Mark2. —
Clip Flag OK Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being Setting not retained
recorded or played.
Clip Flag NG Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being Setting not retained
recorded or played.
Clip Flag Keep Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip Setting not retained
being recorded or played.
Flash Band Reduce 1) Turns the flashband correction function on/off. Setting not retained
1) Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the function does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
125
000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is
next powered on
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the ONLINE Button Zoom Tele/Wide When a lens that supports serial communication —
is installed, assigns the Zoom Tele function to
ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Wide
Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
next powered on <4> and <5> are set).
Off No assignment — [Note]
Do not modify the assignment during independent
Front Mic Switches between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) Setting retained
proxy recording.
when a stereo microphone is connected.
Zoom Wide/Tele When a lens that supports serial communication —
Marker Turns the display of all markers on/off. Setting retained
is installed, assigns the Zoom Wide function to
Last Clip Delete Deletes the last recorded clip. — ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Tele
ATW Turns ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on/ Setting not retained function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when
off. <4> and <5> are set).
ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode. — [Note]
Turbo Gain Executes Turbo Gain according to the setting of Setting not retained Do not modify the assignment during independent
Operation >Gain Switch >Gain <Turbo>. proxy recording.
Rec Review Executes recording review. — Manual Focus Assist Turns the manual focus assist function on/off. Setting retained
Rec Starts or stops recording. — Focus Magnifier Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained
NFC Executes the NFC function. — Zebra Turns zebra display on/off. Setting not retained
Network Client Mode Turns network client mode on/off. Setting retained Lens RET Displays return video signal. —
When a camera extension unit is not connected:
Streaming Turns streaming transmission on/off. Setting not retained Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
Auto Upload(Proxy) Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off. Setting retained Return Video Displays the return 1 video signal. —
Picture Cache Rec Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. Setting retained Return Video2 Displays the return 2 video signal. —
Spotlight Turns the spotlight function in auto iris mode on/ Setting retained Return Video3 Displays the return 3 video signal. —
off.
Return Video4 Displays the return 4 video signal. —
Backlight Turns the backlight function in auto iris mode on/ Setting retained
off. Shot Mark1 Writes Shot Mark1. —
VF Mode Switches the viewfinder screen between B&W Setting retained Shot Mark2 Writes Shot Mark2. —
(On) and color (Off). Clip Flag OK Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being Setting not retained
Video Signal Monitor Switches the video signal monitor display Setting retained recorded or played.
function. Clip Flag NG Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being Setting not retained
Lens Info Switches the depth of field indication between Setting retained recorded or played.
off, displayed in meters, and displayed in feet. Clip Flag Keep Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip Setting not retained
Color Temp SW 3200K Adjusts white balance using 3200K preset value. Setting retained
126
000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches

next powered on
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens
Electrical CC Function that switches the electrical CC filter Setting retained
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white
balance adjustment values.
next powered on
Sequence with each press of the switch/button:
3200K4300K5600K6300K Off No assignment —
Can be changed using menu settings (Electrical Lens RET Displays return video signal. —
CC<A><C><D>). When a camera extension unit is not connected:
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
[Note]
This function is not available when Maintenance >White Return Video Displays return video signal. —
Filter >ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu is set to On. Rec Review Executes recording review. —
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the
function, the assignable switch ceases to function. Shot Mark1 Writes Shot Mark1. —
CC5600K Applies a 5600K electrical CC filter to white Setting retained Shot Mark2 Writes Shot Mark2. –
balance adjustment values. Clip Flag OK Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being Setting not retained
Clip Continuous Rec Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. Setting not retained recorded or played.
Slow & Quick Motion Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. Setting retained Clip Flag NG Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being Setting not retained
recorded or played.
Slot Select When recording media is loaded in both card —
slots A and B, selects the card you want to use. Clip Flag Keep Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip Setting not retained
Digital Extender ×2 Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/ Setting not retained
off. Focus Magnifier Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained
Digital Extender ×3 Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/ Setting not retained Digital Extender ×2 Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/ Setting not retained
off. off.
Digital Extender ×4 Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/ Setting not retained Digital Extender ×3 Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/ Setting not retained
off. off.
Digital Extender Switches the magnification of the screen Setting not retained Digital Extender ×4 Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/ Setting not retained
×2×3×4 magnification function. off.
Each press of the switch or button switches in the Digital Extender Switches the magnification of the screen Setting not retained
order Off×2×3×4Off. ×2×3×4 magnification function.
TX Power Save Switches the wireless transmitter power saving Setting not retained Each press of the switch or button switches in the
mode. order Off×2×3×4Off.
Flash Band Reduce Turns the flashband correction function on/off. Setting not retained Proxy Rec Start/Stop Starts/stops proxy recording. Setting not retained
[Note]
Gamma Display Assist Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and Setting not retained
Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the function viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG.
does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON. [Note]
Proxy Recording Mode Turns the proxy data recording function on/off. Setting retained Not available in SDR mode or during playback.
Proxy Rec Start/Stop Starts/stops proxy recording. Setting not retained
Gamma Display Assist Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and Setting not retained
viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG.
[Note]
Not available in SDR mode or during playback.
127
000 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Configuration Data

You can save setup menu settings in the
camcorder’s internal memory and on SD cards. User Files Reference Files
This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate set
of menu settings for the current situation. User files save the setting items and data of the Reference files save the scene file standard settings
To save setup data on an SD card, insert a writable customizable User menu. You can save up to 64 (when File ID is Standard). You can save one file in
SD card (page 33) into the UTILITY SD card slot files on an SD card. By loading this file into the the camcorder’s internal memory and one file on
before proceeding. camcorder memory, you can customize the setup an SD card.
For details about the settings saved in each file, of the User menu.
see “Items Saved in User Data” (page 154).
Inserting an SD card (for saving configuration Lens Files

data) ALL Files
1 Open the switch cover. ALL files save the configuration data of all menus.
You can set the following data for correcting for
the lens characteristics, and save the data as a
You can save up to 64 files on an SD card. lens file. You can save up to 32 lens files in the
2 Insert the SD card (for saving configuration [Note] camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64 lens
data) in the UTILITY SD card slot. Device specific data (shading, output levels, and other data files on an SD card.
that requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.
Configuration data Sub-items
3 Close the switch cover. V modulation shading M V Modulation
correction values
Ejecting an SD card (for saving configuration data)
Scene Files Center marker position Lens Center H
Lens Center V
1 Open the switch cover. Flare level R Flare
Scene files save adjustments to Paint menu items G Flare
2 Press the SD card in slightly, then remove the for the purpose of shooting a particular scene. You B Flare
card. can save up to five files in the camcorder’s internal White balance correction White Offset R
memory and up to 64 files on an SD card. value White Offset B
[Notes]
Scene files allow you to save the following types White shading correction Shading Ch Select
ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card is removed
while the SD is being accessed, the integrity of data on of data. value Shading H SAW
the card cannot be guaranteed. All data recorded on the ˎˎValues set in the Paint menu Shading H PARA
card may be discarded. Always make sure the ACCESS ˎˎShutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS Shading V SAW
indicator is off before turning off the camcorder or
mode Shading V PARA
removing the SD card.
ˎˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card from flying out when ˎˎWhite balance data
inserting/ejecting the card. The data that is saved and loaded depends on
the setting of File >Scene File >Scene White
The following user data is supported. Data in the setup menu.
Gamma Files
Scene files can be stored in internal memory on
the camcorder or on an SD card.
Scene files can also be loaded into the camcorder. You can save up to five user-defined gamma
table data files (User Gamma Data File) in internal
memory.
000
User Files
Saving a User File Loading a User File
1 Select File > User File >Save SD Card in the 1 Select File >User File >Load SD Card in the
setup menu. setup menu.
A screen for selecting a user file save A user file list screen appears.
destination appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob.
then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID
name will overwrite the selected file.
press the knob.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you
[Note]
can modify it.
The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading
configuration data.
knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >User File >File ID in the setup

menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then

press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
000
ALL Files
Saving Configuration Data as an ALL 2 Select characters and enter the File ID. Restoring All Current Settings to Resetting Current Settings and Preset
File 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then Preset Values Values to Factory Default Settings
press the knob.
1 Select File >All File >Save SD Card in the setup
In this document, initial setup menu settings
configured/saved by the user are referred to as
1 Select File >All File >Clear All Preset in the
menu. setup menu.
“preset values.”
A screen for selecting an ALL file save A confirmation screen appears.
Even after loading files to set up the camcorder,
destination appears.
Loading Configuration Data and overwriting original files with new settings,
you can reset the contents of the files by 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, recovering the preset values. press the knob.
1 Select File >All File >Load SD Card in the setup
1 Select File >All File >All Preset in the setup [Note]
menu. The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID menu.
An ALL file list screen appears.
name will overwrite the selected file. A confirmation screen appears.
can modify it.
press the knob.
knob.
[Note]
press the knob.
Saving All Current Settings as Preset
[Notes]
The current values and preset values are stored in an ALL file.
ˎˎ When you load a file from an SD card, the current values Values
and preset values saved in the camcorder’s internal
If an error message appears memory are overwritten.
One of the following error messages may appear

ˎˎ Do not load a file on a device that is an older version than
the device from which the file was saved. Doing so could 1 Select File >All File >Store All Preset in the
during execution of the save, or as soon as you cause a malfunction. setup menu.
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved. ˎˎ The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading A confirmation screen appears.
configuration data.
Error
message
Problem Solution
If an error message appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
File Access No recordable Insert recordable
NG media is inserted. media. One of the following error messages may appear [Note]
during execution of the load, or as soon as you The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded.
Error Problem Solution
message
Changing the File ID File Access There is no Insert the media
NG readable media that contains the
The specified file file you want.
1 Select File >All File >File ID in the setup menu. does not exist on
A screen for editing the File ID appears. the media
000
Scene Files
Saving a Scene File in Internal Changing the File ID 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
Memory A confirmation screen appears.
1 Select File >Scene File >File ID in the setup
1 Select File >Scene File >Store Internal Memory

menu. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
A screen for editing the File ID appears. press the knob.
in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
If the File ID is set to “Standard” destination, 2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
preconfigured standard settings are saved.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, press the knob.
The scene file is saved, overwriting any existing
file, in the selected destination.

Loading a Scene File from Internal
confirmation message screen, then press the Memory
knob.
1 Select File >Scene File >Recall Internal Memory

in the setup menu.
Saving a Scene File on an SD Card A scene file list screen appears.
1 Select File >Scene File >Save SD Card in the

setup menu. A confirmation screen appears.
A scene file save destination screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination,

press the knob.
Load a Scene File from an SD Card
can modify it.

1 Select File >Scene File >Load SD Card in the
setup menu.
confirmation message screen, then press the A scene file list screen appears.
knob.
000
Reference Files
Saving Current Settings as Preset Loading a Reference File from an SD
Values Card
1 Select File >Reference File >Store Reference in 1 Select File >Reference File >Load Reference(SD
the setup menu. Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears. A confirmation screen appears.
Saving Current Settings as Preset Resetting Current Settings and Preset

Values on an SD Card Values to Factory Default Settings
1 Select File >Reference File >Save Reference(SD 1 Select File >Reference File >Clear Reference in
Card) in the setup menu. the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears. A confirmation screen appears.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Reference File >File ID in the setup

menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.

press the knob.
000
Lens Files
Saving a Lens File in Internal Memory Changing the File ID 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load,
1 Select File >Lens File >Store Internal Memory 1 Select File >Lens File >File ID in the setup
in the setup menu. menu. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
A lens file list screen appears. A screen for editing the File ID appears. press the knob.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, 2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
You can save files in rows with File ID of “No 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then Loading a Lens File Automatically
offset.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID press the knob.
name will overwrite the selected file. The File ID is updated. When you are using a lens that supports serial
communication, you can set up the camcorder
can modify it.
by automatically loading the lens file that
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the Loading a Lens File from Internal function).
confirmation message screen, then press the To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set File >Lens
knob. Memory File >Lens Auto Recall in the setup menu to one of
the following.
Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.
1 Select File >Lens File >Recall Internal Memory On (Lens Name): Load the lens file that
Saving a Lens File on an SD Card in the setup menu. corresponds to the lens model name.
A lens file list screen appears. On (Serial Number): Load the lens file that
corresponds to the lens model name and
1 Select File >Lens File >Save SD Card in the 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, serial number (when the lens supports
setup menu. then press the knob. communication of the serial number).
A lens file save destination screen appears. A confirmation screen appears. If the lens does not support communication of
the serial number, even when set to On (Serial
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
Number), load the lens file that corresponds to the
lens model name.
then press the knob. press the knob.
The File ID is generated automatically, but you Loading a Lens File from an SD Card
can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the 1 Select File >Lens File >Load SD Card in the
confirmation message screen, then press the setup menu.
knob. A lens file list screen appears.
000
Gamma Files
Checking the Current Gamma File Using User Gamma Files Created
Settings (File Names) Using CvpFileEditorTM V4.3
Select File >User Gamma >Current Settings in Save created user gamma files to be loaded in the
the setup menu to display a list of the currently “PRIVATE/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/HD_CAM” directory
configured user gamma files. of the SD card.
Loading a User Gamma File from an Resetting a User Gamma File to Initial
SD Card State
1 Select File >User Gamma >Load SD Card in the 1 Select File >User Gamma >Reset in the setup
setup menu. menu.
A user gamma file list screen appears. A gamma file number reset screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the number of
then press the knob. the gamma file to reset (1 to 5).
A confirmation screen appears. To reset all gamma files, select [All].
press the knob. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then
press the knob.
134
000 9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit

When an RM-B170 Remote Control Unit, settings are given below.
RCP‑1001/1501 Remote Control Panel, or other Releasing Remote Control Mode Button RM Rec Start setting
Camcorder setup menu RM-B170
control unit is connected, some camcorder
RM Camera PARA
functions can be controlled from that unit. Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the remote Remote control data
Camcorder REC Disabled Enabled Enabled Main data block
You can also operate the menu and monitor the control unit. block
picture on a monitor screen connected to the START button
The switch settings on the camcorder become
MONITOR connector on the RM-B170. Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled
enabled.
ASSIGN. 1/3 Disabled Enabled Enabled
switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5
Connecting a Remote Control Unit Connecting a Monitor to an RM-B170 switches, and
Camcorder non-volatile memory
ONLINE button
assigned with
Using a remote control cable, connect between The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM- recording start/
the REMOTE connector (8-pin) of the camcorder B170 outputs the same signal as the output from stop function
and the camera connector of the remote control the VIDEO OUT connector. RM-B170 MEDIA Enabled Disabled Enabled Camera unit hardware
unit. To connect a monitor to the MONITOR connector START button
When you turn on the camcorder after making the on the RM-B170, set the VIDEO OUT connector of RM-B170 connected
connection, the camcorder enters remote control the camcorder to Composite signal, and use the RM-B170 not connected
mode, enabling menu operations and shooting black cable supplied with the RM-B170. When a remote control unit is connected, the
operations. “remote control data block” is selected as the
[Notes]
ˎˎ Remote control operation is not supported if USB
Data Structure of Image Quality current paint data block, and the paint adjustment
parameters that were in effect the last time the
connection to the camcorder is enabled.
ˎˎ If a USB connection to the camcorder is enabled during Image Quality Adjustment when an Adjustment Data remote control unit was used are loaded.
However, when the settings of absolute value
remote control, remote control mode is released.
ˎˎ Do not connect or disconnect the remote control unit RM-B170 is Connected The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used
controls1) and absolute value switches2) are set
when the camcorder is on. on the remote control unit, the settings on the
ˎˎ A remote control cable is not supplied with the RCP-
for storing camera image quality adjustment data
remote control unit override the settings on the
1001/1501 Remote Control Panel. When the RM-B170 is connected, the parameters (paint data) consists of the two regions shown
camcorder.
for camera image quality adjustment items (paint below: a “main data block” that is used when
When the remote control unit is disconnected
The following switches of the camcorder are data) are set to the parameters that were specified a remote control unit is not connected, and a
from the camcorder, the “main data block” is re-
disabled when a remote control unit is connected. the last time that the RM-B170 was connected. “remote control data block” that is used when a
enabled, and the camcorder returns to the settings
ˎˎGAIN switch remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment
that were in effect before the remote control unit
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch data is automatically selected and output to the
was connected.
ˎˎAUTO W/B BAL switch camera section depending on whether or not 1) Absolute value controls: Data corresponding to the
ˎˎSHUTTER switch Function of Recording Start/Stop a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is
connected.
angular position of the control is output. Controls for
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch which data corresponding to the amount of rotation is
ˎˎASSIGN. 1/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, Buttons when an RM-B170 is output are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Switches (or knobs), such
and the ONLINE button to which the Turbo Gain
or ATW function has been assigned
Connected as toggle switches or slide switches (except most
momentary switches) whose positions must coincide with
their functions are called absolute value switches.
Set the function of the buttons using Maintenance
>Camera Config >RM Rec Start in the setup menu. When Maintenance >Camera Config >RM
Common Memory in the setup menu is set to
The functions of the buttons for the RM Rec Start [On], you can use settings of the paint adjustment
000
135 9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
data stored in the main data block even if a

remote control unit is connected. In this case,
the settings stored in the main data block will
be updated when you change the settings on
the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the
paint data made with the remote control unit will
be retained even after the remote control unit is
removed. However, if the switch position on the
remote control unit differs from the one on the
camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder
takes precedence.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in
effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you must set the control knobs to
relative value mode on the remote control unit.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the
remote control unit.
Operating the Menu from the

RM‑B170
1 Press the CHARACTER button on the RM-B170,

turning it on, then press the MENU button.
The menu is displayed on the monitor
connected to the MONITOR connector of the
RM-B170.
2 Select and set menu items using the

adjustment knob and CANCEL/ENTER button.
3 When finished, set the MENU button to OFF to

exit the menu.
000
Major Functions Supported on the RCP-1001/1501, RM-B170

Table legend
Signal support is indicated by the following.
Yes: Available
–: Not available
Item Sub-item Settings Function RCP-1001 RCP-1501 RM-B170
Panel Active Panel Active On/Off Turns panel operation on/off. Yes Yes Yes
Bars Bars On/Off Turns color bar output on/off. Yes Yes Yes
Call Call On/Off Calls camcorder from RCP/RM. Yes Yes Yes 1)
Standard Standard On/Off Turns standard mode on/off. Yes Yes Yes 1)
ND Filter ND Filter 1/2/3/4 Displays the selected ND filter. Yes Yes Yes
CC Filter CC Filter A/B/C/D Displays the selected CC filter. – – –
Gain Step Gain –6/–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/ Master gain setting Yes Yes Yes
36/42dB
White Balance AWB Start/Stop Starts auto white balance. Yes Yes Yes
During execution, this stops auto white balance.
White Memory A/B/PRESET Switches the white balance preset memory. Yes Yes Yes
ATW On/Off Turns ATW on/off. Yes 1) Yes Yes 1)
5600K On/Off Turns electrical color temperature conversion on/off. Yes Yes Yes 1)
Black ABB Start/Stop Starts black balance auto adjustment. Yes Yes Yes
During execution, this stops black balance.
Knee Point 75% to 90% to 109% Sets the knee point. – Yes Yes 1)
Detail Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the HD detail level. Yes Yes Yes
Shutter Shutter Setting On/Off Turns the shutter on/off. – Yes Yes
Shutter Speed – Sets the shutter speed. – Yes Yes
ECS Setting On/Off Turns ECS mode on/off. – Yes Yes
ECS Frequency – Sets the ECS mode frequency. – Yes Yes
SLS Setting On/Off Turns SLS mode on/off. – Yes Yes
SLS Speed – Sets the SLS mode speed (number of frames) – Yes Yes
Iris Iris Mode Auto/Manual Sets the iris mode. Yes Yes Yes
Iris Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the auto iris target level. Yes Yes Yes
Close On/Off Turns iris control closing on/off. Yes Yes –
000
Item Sub-item Settings Function RCP-1001 RCP-1501 RM-B170

Switch Status Gamma On/Off Turns the gamma correction function on/off. – Yes Yes 1)
Black Gamma On/Off Turns the black gamma correction function on/off. Yes 1)
Yes Yes 1)
Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix function on/off. – Yes Yes 2)
Knee On/Off Turns the knee correction function on/off. – Yes Yes 1)
White Clip On/Off Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off. – Yes Yes 2)
Detail On/Off Turns the detail adjustment function on/off. – Yes Yes
Flare On/Off Turns the flare correction function on/off. – Yes Yes 1)
Test Saw On/Off Turns the test signal on/off. – Yes Yes 1)
White R Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance R gain value. Yes Yes Yes
B Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance B gain value. Yes Yes Yes
Black Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black level. Yes Yes Yes
R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R channel black level. Yes Yes Yes
B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B channel black level. Yes Yes Yes
Camcorder Menu Menu On/Off Displays the camcorder menu. – – Yes
Cancel/Preset Cancel/Preset – – Yes
Select/Set Select(Up/Down)/Set – – Yes
Media Rec Start/Stop Starts/stops recording. – – Yes
Play Play/Pause Starts playback. – – Yes
FREV – Fast reverse playback – – Yes
FFWD – Fast forward playback – – Yes
STOP – Stops playback. – – Yes
Rec Review – Starts recording review. – – Yes
PREV – Jumps to the start of the current clip. – – Yes
NEXT – Jumps to the start of the next clip. – – Yes
Shot Mark Shot Mark1 – Sets shot mark 1. – – Yes
Shot Mark2 – Sets shot mark 2. – – Yes 1)
ZOOM – – Zoom operation (with compatible lens) – – Yes 1)
FOCUS – – Focus operation (with compatible lens) – – Yes 1)
1) Operation supported when the function is assigned to an assignable switch on the RCP/RM.
2) Camcorder menu operation supported from the RM.
000
Connecting an External Monitor

Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected. of that external device to match the analog
composite signal setting for the VIDEO OUT
connector.
To input camcorder output audio to an external
device such as a monitor, VTR, or other recording
device, connect the audio output of the AUDIO
OUT connector to the audio input of that external
device.
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
BNC cable (not supplied)
HDMI OUT Connector (Type A

Connector)
You can turn the output signal from the
camcorder on/off using Operation >Input/Output
>HDMI Output in the setup menu.
The output signal format is set using Operation
>Input/Output >Output Format in the setup
menu.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable for
connection.
BNC cable (not supplied)
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, >SDI Out1 Output/SDI Out2 Output in the setup
the same status information and menus can be menu (page 98).
displayed on the external monitor as those on the For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
viewfinder screen.
[Note]
The SD signal down-converted output is enabled when
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup
menu is set to 720×486i or 720×576i.
VIDEO OUT Connector
The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to connect
a device that supports analog composite signals.
SDI OUT Connector (BNC) The device type can be a monitor, VTR, or other
recording device.
The output signal changes in conjunction with
The SDI OUT connector can be used to connect a the setting of Operation >Input/Output >Output
device that supports SDI. The device type can be a Format in the setup menu.
monitor, switcher, VTR, or other recording device. To input the VIDEO OUT connector output signal
The output signal from this connector can be to an external analog composite device, it may
turned on and off using Operation >Input/Output be necessary to change the input signal setting
000
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer

The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with this To start USB connection To remove an SxS memory card Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of
camcorder can be controlled on a computer or your computer in advance, using the supplied
edited using optional nonlinear editing software. When you connect a computer to the PC application software.
You can copy clips on SxS memory cards to connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the On Windows Some editing software may not operate properly.
portable storage or other USB media if portable message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to
media/USB media is connected to the external prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the 1 Click on the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon on the recording formats used with this camcorder.
device connection connector. USB connection. the task bar of the computer.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position, 2 Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card -
or if you disconnect the USB cable, the message Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu. Connecting Portable Storage/USB
USB Connection with a Computer “Connect USB Now?” disappears.
Media
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU knob,
the USB connection is enabled and the camcorder
3 Check that the “Safe To Remove Hardware”
message appears, then remove the card.
When you connect the camcorder to a computer is recognized as an extension drive.
using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory card When portable storage, USB HDD, or similar media
If the USB connection is enabled during recording/
in the slot is recognized as an extended drive by playback operation, the operation is stopped and
On Macintosh is connected to the external device connection
the computer. Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to connector, you can copy clips from the recording
the message “USB Connecting” appears on the
When two memory cards are mounted in the Trash. media inserted in an SxS card slot of the
viewfinder screen.
the camcorder, they are recognized as two If the SxS memory card icon is displayed in the camcorder to USB media.
At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO OUT
independent extended drives by the computer. connector and SDI OUT 1/2 connectors changes to
Finder, click on the eject icon. 1 Specify the destination folder for copying clips
a black signal. in Operation >USB >Select Folder in the setup
To use the application software menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The camcorder cannot be operated for recording, You can also select [New] on the screen to
To copy clips to the local disk of your computer,
playback, and so on while the message “USB Connecting” create a new folder.
is displayed.
the dedicated application software must be
downloaded and installed on your computer. For [Note]
USB cable ˎˎ When the computer accesses the media loaded in
If a folder is not specified, a folder is automatically
(not supplied) the camcorder, do not try to carry out the following details about downloading software, see “Software
created with a folder name the same as the creation
operations. Downloads” (page 172). date of the first clip to be copied, and clips are copied
–– Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off,
Although the data regarding recorded materials to that folder.
switching the operating mode, etc.)
–– Removing or loading a media from an active slot are stored over multiple files and folders, you
(being accessed from the computer)
–– Removing or connecting the USB cable
can easily handle the clips without considering
such data and directory structure by using the
2 Select Operation >USB >Copy to USB in the
setup menu.
dedicated application software.
Releasing the USB connection [Note]
If you perform operations on clips, such as copying the clips
3 Select the slot in which the target recording
To release the USB connection, follow the same on the SxS memory card using Explorer (Windows) or Finder media is inserted.
[Notes] procedure as that for removing a device from the (Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips may Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the
ˎˎ Turn the camcorder on and wait until the image and computer. not be maintained. recording media inserted in slot A.
information are displayed on the screen, then connect the To enable the USB connection again, first Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
USB cable to the camcorder.
ˎˎ When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it. To use a nonlinear editing system recording media inserted in slot B.
careful to check the form and direction of the USB The message “Connect USB Now?” appears again. Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
connector. In a nonlinear editing system, editing software recording media inserted in slot A and slot
ˎˎ The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the (option) that supports the formats recorded by the B.
computer. camcorder is required.
000
140 9. Connecting External Devices: Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer
[Note]
When a copy destination folder is specified in step 1 and
Checking for copy read errors State Solution
Media(A)(B) to USB is selected, slot A clips are copied to During clip recording, Terminate the previous
the specified destination folder. Slot B clips are copied You can check for read errors after writing clips by playback, thumbnail operation.
to a folder that is automatically created with a folder setting Operation >USB >Error Check in the setup display, proxy recording,
name the same as the creation date of the first clip. menu to On. streaming, proxy transfer,
or live transfer mode
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then Formatting portable storage/USB media Network Client Mode is Set Network Client Mode
press the knob. On to Off.
All clips on the target recording media are You can format portable storage/USB media in
Camera adaptor is Unmount the camera
copied to the USB media. exFAT format using Operation >USB >Format USB
connected adaptor connection.
in the setup menu.
[Note]
If a clip with the same file name as the clip to copy
already exists in the destination folder, the clip is not
1 Select Operation >USB >Format USB in the [Notes]
ˎˎ Clips on portable storage or other USB media cannot be
setup menu.
copied. copied to recording media inserted in an SxS card slot.
ˎˎ Clips cannot be recorded while power is supplied to
Displaying a list of clips on portable storage/USB 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then the external device connector. To start recording clips,
terminate the Operation >USB operation in the setup
press the knob.
media Initialization (formatting) begins.
menu.
You can display a list of the clips on portable

storage/USB media using Operation >USB >View 3 When the formatting is completed, a message
Clip List in the setup menu. appears on the screen. Select [OK].
Renaming a folder on portable storage/USB Checking free space on portable storage/USB

media media
You can rename a folder using Operation >USB The free space on portable storage/USB media is
>Rename Folder in the setup menu. displayed in the Media Remain row on the screen
displayed when Operation >USB in the setup
1 Select Operation >USB >Rename Folder in the menu is selected.
setup menu.
About power supply to portable storage/USB
2 Select the folder to rename, and press the SET
media
button.
A file name input screen appears. Power is supplied to portable storage/USB media
from the external device connector automatically
3 Enter a folder name, and select [Done] on the when performing an operation in Operation >USB
screen. in the setup menu.
The folder is renamed. However, power supply is not started under the
following conditions, even when performing an
operation in Operation >USB in the setup menu.
To start the supply of power, perform the solution
shown in the table.
000
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System

You can mount a CA-FB70/TX70 HD Camera Adaptor to the camcorder and connect a Camera Control
Unit (CCU). Tally and Call Indicators
This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system consisting of multiple camcorders with
camera extension units connected to a remote control unit. The tally and call indicators for a system are as follows.
For more information about the CA-FB70 and CA-TX70, refer to their respective operation manuals.
Data received from system HDVF LED indicators Text display on viewfinder screen
[Notes]
ˎˎ When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect a video light to the camcorder. Tally Green CA call Non-CA REC/ GREEN   CALL
ˎˎ Supported only for XAVC and MPEG HD recording. Tally call TALLY LED TALLY LED
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function.
OFF OFF OFF OFF Not lit Not lit No display No display No display
OFF OFF OFF ON Lit Not lit  No display CALL
OFF OFF ON OFF Not lit Not lit No display No display CALL
OFF OFF ON ON Lit Not lit  No display CALL
OFF ON OFF OFF Not lit Lit No display  No display
OFF ON OFF ON Lit Lit   CALL
OFF ON ON OFF Not lit Lit No display  CALL
OFF ON ON ON Lit Lit   CALL
ON OFF OFF OFF Lit Not lit  No display No display
ON OFF OFF ON Not lit Not lit No display No display CALL
ON OFF ON OFF Lit Not lit  No display CALL
ON OFF ON ON Not lit Not lit No display No display CALL
ON ON OFF OFF Lit Lit   No display
ON ON OFF ON Not lit Lit No display  CALL
ON ON ON OFF Lit Lit   CALL
ON ON ON ON Not lit Lit No display  CALL
[Note]
Alarm indications using the tally indicator in the warning display are not displayed while a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is
connected.
000
142 9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
Supported Formats and Limitations of Shooting/Recording Systems Operation menu System format of
camera adaptor /
Camcorder
limitation
Format Input/Output camera control unit Return video
The supported formats and operation limitations of a shooting/recording system comprising the Frequency Rec Format Output Format display
camcorder, camera adaptor, and camera control unit are shown in the following table. SDI
Operation menu System format of Camcorder 50 XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080 50i No
camera adaptor / limitation XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
Format Input/Output camera control unit Return video XAVC-L 35 1080P
Frequency Rec Format Output Format display
XAVC-I 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080 50i Yes
SDI XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
59.94 XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080 59.94i No XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P XAVC-L 25 1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080P HD422 50 1080i
XAVC-I 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080 59.94i Yes HQ 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i HQ 1440×1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080i SP 1440×1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i XAVC-I 1280×720P 1280×720P 1280×720 50P Yes
HD422 50 1080i XAVC-L 50 1280×720P
HQ 1920×1080i HD422 50 720P
HQ 1440×1080i HQ 1280×720P
SP 1440×1080i 25 XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080PsF 1920×1080 25PsF a) Yes
XAVC-I 1280×720P 1280×720P 1280×720 59.94P Yes XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P 1920×1080 50i
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 720P HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1280×720P HQ 1920×1080P
29.97 XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080PsF 1920×1080 29.97PsF a) Yes HD422 50 720P 1280×720P 1280×720 50P No
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P 1920×1080 59.94i
a) A PsF setting is recommended when a CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected.
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P [Note]
In a shooting/recording system, special recording functions, such as wireless LAN connection function or Slow & Quick Motion,
HQ 1920×1080P cannot be used simultaneously.
HD422 50 720P 1280×720P 1280×720 59.94P No
23.98 XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080 59.94i No
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P (2-3PD)
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P 1280×720P 1280×720 59.94P No
(2-3PD)
000
Recording External Input Signals

You can record SDI signals from devices connected to the SDI IN connector of the camcorder. HD/SD Operation >Format >Rec Operation >Format >Frequency Supported external input signal
Format in the setup menu in the setup menu formats
To output and record input signals instead of the camera picture, set Operation >Input/Output >Source
HD HD422 50 720P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
Select in the setup menu to [External].
HD 1280×720 59.94P
[Notes] 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
ˎˎ External input signals cannot be recorded in Slow & Quick Motion mode. When a special recording mode, such as Slow & HD 1280×720 50P
Quick Motion mode, is selected, the recording mode is canceled when you set Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in
the setup menu to [External]. HQ 1920×1080i 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
ˎˎ Execution of automatic adjustment functions, such as automatic black balance, and operations, such as playback, Rec HD 1280×720 59.94P
Review, and thumbnail display, will end when Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu is set to
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
[External]. The camcorder enters stop mode and then the camera picture switches to external input.
HD 1280×720 50P
ˎˎ Recording may stop if the input signal is disturbed while recording external input. Recording automatically resumes when
the input signal returns to normal. HQ 1440×1080i 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function. HD 1280×720 59.94P
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
SP 1440×1080i 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
Supported External Input Signal Formats and Camcorder Recording Formats HD 1280×720 59.94P
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD/SD Operation >Format >Rec Operation >Format >Frequency Supported external input signal
HQ 1280×720P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
Format in the setup menu in the setup menu formats
HD 1280×720 59.94P
HD XAVC-I 1920×1080i 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 59.94P HD 1280×720 50P
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i SD MPEG IMX 50 59.94 SD 486 59.94i
HD 1280×720 50P
50 SD 576 50i
XAVC-I 1280×720P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
DVCAM 59.94 SD 486 59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50 SD 576 50i
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
XAVC-L 50 1280×720P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
HD422 50 1080i 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
144
000 10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance
Cleaning the Viewfinder Note about the Battery Terminals Exchanging the Battery of the
Internal Clock
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
mirror inside the viewfinder barrel. battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a part. The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a
commercially available lens cleaner. Power may not be supplied to the unit properly lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery
if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery
[Note] must be exchanged. Contact a Sony service
Never use organic solvents such as thinners. deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become
corroded due to prolonged outdoor use. representative.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
000
145 10. Maintenance and Inspection
Error/Warning System
If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the camcorder, a message is displayed in the viewfinder, the corresponding indicators start flashing, and a warning sound is emitted.
You can adjust the volume of the warning sound using the ALARM knob. If the ALARM knob is set to minimum, the warning sound will not be audible.
Error Display
The camcorder will stop operation when the following kind of display occurs.
Error message Warning sound WARNING Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution
indicator
E + error code Continuous – High-speed flashing Indicates an abnormality in the camcorder.
Turn off the camcorder, and check for any problem with connected devices, cables, or media.
(If the camcorder does not turn off when the POWER switch is set to OFF, remove the battery or disconnect the AC supply.)
If the error persists when the camcorder is turned on again, contact your Sony service representative.
Warning Display
Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs.
Warning message Warning sound WARNING Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution
indicator
Media Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The remaining capacity on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Media Full Continuous On High-speed flashing Clips could not be recorded, copied, or split because there is no remaining capacity on the SxS memory card.
Replace immediately.
Battery Near End Intermittent Flashing Flashing The remaining capacity of the battery pack is getting low.
Recharge at the earliest convenience.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Battery End Continuous On High-speed flashing The battery pack is dead.
Recording is disabled.
Connect a power source to DC IN and allow the battery pack to recharge without attempting to operate the camcorder.
Temperature High Intermittent Flashing Flashing The internal temperature is high.
Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down before operating it again.
Voltage Low Intermittent Flashing Flashing The DC IN voltage is low (level 1).
Check the power source.
Insufficient Voltage Continuous On High-speed flashing The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2).
Recording is disabled.
Connect a different power source.
000
146 10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Warning message Warning sound WARNING Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution
indicator
Clips Full Continuous On High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on an SxS memory card has been reached. Recording or copying more
clips is not possible. Replace immediately.
Last Clip Recording Intermittent Flashing Flashing The clip currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new SxS memory card.
Clips Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Media(Proxy) Full Continuous On High-speed flashing Proxy data cannot be recorded because there is no remaining free space on the proxy data SD card. Replace immediately.
Clips(Proxy) Full Continuous On High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card has been reached. Recording more clips is not
possible. Replace immediately.
Media(Proxy) Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The remaining free space on the proxy data SD card is getting low.
Last Clip(Proxy) Rec Intermittent Flashing Flashing The proxy data currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new proxy data SD card.
Clips(Proxy) Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card is getting low. Replace at the earliest
convenience.
Media(A)1) Full Continuous On High-speed flashing When using the Simul Rec function
Media(A)1) Clips Full Continuous On High-speed flashing When using the Simul Rec function
Media(A)1) Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing When using the Simul Rec function
Media(A) Last Clip Rec
1)
Intermittent Flashing Flashing When using the Simul Rec function
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
000
147 10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Caution and Operation Confirmation Display Display indication

Different Media is Inserted
Cause and Solution
Different media was inserted. Eject the inserted card, and insert a
Cannot Use Media(A)1) card of the same type as the previously inserted card.
The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Follow the
instructions provided to resolve the issue.
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
Display indication Cause and Solution
Battery Error An error was detected in the battery pack.
Please Change Battery Replace with a normal battery pack.
Backup Battery End The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient.
Please Change Replace the backup battery.
Unknown Media(A)1) • A memory card that has been partitioned or a memory card
Please Change containing more clips that can be handled by the camcorder
was inserted.
• An SxS card was inserted when the file system is set to FAT.
• An SDHC card was inserted when the file system is set to
exFAT or UDF.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced.
Media Error An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must be
Media(A)1) Needs to be Restored restored.
Eject and then re-insert the card, then repair the card.
Media Error The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used
Cannot Record to Media(A)1) for recording.
Playback may be possible, so making a copy and replacing the
memory card is recommended.
Media Error The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used
Cannot Use Media(A)1) for recording or playback.
replaced.
Cannot Use Media(A)1) A card using a different file system or an unformatted card was
Unsupported File System inserted.
replaced or formatted using the camcorder.
Media(A)1) Error Cannot continue playback because an error occurred while
Playback Halted reading from the memory card.
If the problem persists, make a copy and replace the memory
card.
Media(A)1) Error Recording is stopped because an error occurred on the memory
card.
If the problem persists, replace the memory card.
148
000 11. Appendix
Messages Displayed During Operation

This section describes the meaning of messages that may be displayed in response to button, switch, or knob operation.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Covers only the messages displayed about possible causes in response to an operation.
ˎˎ Messages displayed when an operation is attempted while a menu item cannot be selected (grayed out) are not described.
Operation Message Meaning and possible cause

REC button was pressed Media not exist Cannot record because there is no recording media in an SxS card slot.
Media(Proxy) Proxy data recording mode is set to On, but cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted.
Cannot Record
No Media in Slot(Proxy)
Media(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error.
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy) Error
Media(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected.
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy): Write Protected
Media(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed.
Cannot Record
NG: Preparing
Assignable switch assigned with Proxy Rec Start/ Media(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted.
Stop was operated Cannot Record
No Media in Slot(Proxy)
Media(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error.
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy) Error
Media(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected.
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy): Write Protected
Media(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed.
Cannot Record
NG: Preparing
PREV button was pressed First Clip Top! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
F REV button was pressed First Clip Top! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
PREV + F REV buttons were pressed First Clip Top! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
PLAY button was pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
NEXT button was pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
F FWD button was pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
NEXT + F FWD buttons were pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
Media slot was changed Cannot Switch Slots Cannot change slots during playback.
Recording media was removed Media removed Media was removing while reading from recording media or while writing to recording media (ACCESS indicator is lit).
GAIN switch was operated Gain: xxdB Gain setting was changed.
(where “xx” is the gain value)
000
149 11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation

DCC switch was operated DCC: On DCC was set to On.
DCC: Off DCC was set to Off.
Fixed By Hyper Gamma ! Cannot set DCC to On because Gamma Category is set to HG or User.
White balance switch was operated White: Preset xxxxK White balance was changed to the preset value.
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White: A xxxxK White balance was changed to the memory A value.
White: B xxxxK White balance was changed to the memory B value.
White: ATW xxxxK White balance mode was changed to ATW.
SHUTTER switch was operated Shutter: 1/xxxx Shutter speed was changed (standard, Speed mode settings).
(where “xxxx” is the shutter value)
Shutter: xxxx Shutter speed was changed (standard, Angle mode settings).
(where “xxxx” is the shutter value)
ECS: xxxxHz Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode).
(where “xxxx” is the frequency value)
Menu knob was turned ECS: xxxxHz Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode).
(where “xxxx” is the frequency value)
Iris Override: +x.xx Iris override level was changed.
(where “x.xx” is a numeric value)
Auto black switch was operated Color Bars Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output.
Cannot Proceed
Test Saw Cannot execute because a test signal is being output.
Cannot Proceed
Not Available Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Recording
Not Available Cannot execute because playback is in progress.
Playing back
Not Available Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Displaying Thumbnails
Auto white switch was operated Color Bars Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output.
Cannot Proceed
Not Available Cannot execute because playback is in progress.
Playing back
Not Available Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Displaying Thumbnails
White Balance Preset Cannot execute because the white balance is set to the preset value.
Assignable switch assigned with ATW Hold ATW Hold ATW Hold function was enabled.
function was operated ATW Hold Off ATW Hold function was disabled.
000

Assignable switch assigned with Clip Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Continuous Rec was operated Recording
Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU.
Assignable switch assigned with Picture Cache Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Rec was operated Recording
Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• Playback is in progress
• Thumbnail screen is displayed
• CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU.
Assignable switch assigned with Streaming was Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because network client mode is enabled.
operated Network Client Mode Setting is "On"
Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because network connection setting is set to Off.
Network Function is Disabled
Cannot Proceed Network client mode is set to On, but cannot execute because network connection is unavailable.
Network Client Mode Setting is "On"
Cannot Start Streaming Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
Streaming Disabled Temporarily • Proxy data playback is in progress
• 1280×720 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1920×1080
• 1920×1080 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1280×720
Cannot Start Streaming Cannot execute because recording/playback was started while wireless function circuitry was initializing (including
Please stop Recording or Playback thumbnail display).
Stop recording/playback (including thumbnail display) to enable execution.
Assignable switch assigned with Streaming was Cannot Proceed Cannot configure because streaming is in progress.
operated while network client mode is enabled Streaming Setting is "On"
Cannot Connect to CCM Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
Cannot Record Proxy Cannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1,
Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Proxy Recording will be Stopped Proxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy
in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM • Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
Cannot Record Proxy • Cannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1,
Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM • Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
Proxy Recording will be Stopped • Proxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with
Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM Connection Control Manager authentication error occurred.
Invalid User Name or Password
Cannot Connect to CCM Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because the Connection Control Manager address or port number settings
Invalid Address or Port Number is incorrect.
000

Assignable switch assigned with Auto Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because proxy data recording circuitry and wireless function circuitry initialization are not completed.
Upload(Proxy) was operated Network Function is Disabled
ONLINE button was pressed and held Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because wireless function circuitry is switching mode or power supply is switching off.
Assignable switch assigned with Zebra was Zebra: On Zebra was set to On.
operated or ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was Zebra: Off Zebra was set to Off.
changed
ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was operated Zebra: On Zebra was set to On.
Zebra: Off Zebra was set to Off.
Assignable switch assigned with Master was Marker: On Marker was set to On.
operated Marker: Off Marker was set to Off.
Assignable switch assigned with Video Signal Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
Monitor was operated • Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off
• Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P
OUTPUT switch was moved to the BARS position Not Available Cannot execute because S&Q motion recording mode is enabled.
(color bar display) S&Q Motion: On
Assignable switch assigned with digital extender Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
was operated • Playback is in progress
• Thumbnail screen is displayed
• External input state
• Color bars or test signal output is in progress
ND filter was changed 2: 1/4ND xxxxK ND filter was changed.
(where “2: 1/4ND” is the ND filter type and “xxxx” is
the color temperature value)
ND:3 CC: x xxxxK ND filter was changed with ND Filter C.Temp set to Off and Electrical CC assigned to an assignable switch.
(where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type and
“CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and color
temperature value after electrical color
temperature conversion)
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 3200K Color Temp SW 3200K was enabled.
3200K was operated Cannot Proceed Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
ND Filter C.Temp: On
000

Assignable switch assigned with Electrical CC ND:3 CC: x xxxxK Electrical CC filter was changed.
was operated (where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type and
“CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and color
temperature value after electrical color
temperature conversion)
Cannot Proceed Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Assignable switch assigned with CC5600K was CC 5600K 5600K setting was selected.
operated Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
• ND Filter C.Temp is set to On
• Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable switch, but 5600K is not assigned to Electrical CC.
Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark1 was Shot Mark1 Shot mark 1 was added.
operated (arbitrary character string when defining planning
metadata)
Cannot Record Essence Mark Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached.
Reached Essence Mark Limit
Cannot Proceed Cannot add because of the following conditions.
• Cannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected
• Picture Cache Rec function is set to On
• Interval Rec recording is in progress
• Media is write-protected
• Target clip is recorded on an SD card
Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark2 was Shot Mark2 Shot mark 2 was added.
operated (arbitrary character string when defining planning
metadata)
Cannot Record Essence Mark Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached.
Reached Essence Mark Limit
Cannot Proceed Cannot add because of the following conditions.
• Cannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected
• Picture Cache Rec function is set to On
• Interval Rec recording is in progress
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag OK OK Clip Flag Clip flag (OK mark) was added.
was operated Delete Clip Flag Clip flag (OK mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
000

Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag NG NG Clip Flag Clip flag (NG mark) was added.
was operated Delete Clip Flag Clip flag (NG mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag Keep KEEP Clip Flag Clip flag (KEEP mark) was added.
was operated Delete Clip Flag Clip flag (KEEP mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Assignable switch assigned with Flash Band Flash Band Reduce: On Flash Band Reduce was set to On.
Reduce was operated Flash Band Reduce: Off Flash Band Reduce was set to Off.
SLOT SELECT button was operated Switched Slot Recording media to use was changed.
An assignable button assigned with Slow & Cannot Proceed Slow & Quick Motion cannot be used due to unsupported format.
Quick Motion was operated in a recording S&Q Unsupported Rec Format
format that does not support Slow & Quick
Motion.
000
154 11. Appendix
Items Saved in User Data

Table legend Item Sub-item File type
Yes: Saved All Scene Reference Lens
Yes*: Saved (not cleared using Clear All Preset)
Input/Output Output Format Yes No No No
No: Not saved
–: Not saved (temporary setting) Source Select Yes No No No
Default: ‌Not saved in Reference file, but saved as default menu preset when File >Reference in the setup SDI Out1 Output Yes No No No
menu is executed. SDI Out2 Output Yes No No No
HDMI Output Yes No No No
User Menu SDI Out2/HDMI Super Yes No No No
Video Out Super Yes No No No
Item Sub-item File type Down Converter Yes No No No
All Scene Reference Lens Wide ID Yes No No No
Edit User Menu – Yes No No No Wide Mode(Ext.) Yes No No No
Super Impose Super(VF Display) Yes No No No
Super(Menu) Yes No No No
Super(Marker) Yes No No No
Operation Menu LCD LCD Color Yes No No No
LCD Marker&Zebra Yes No No No
Rec Function Slow & Quick Motion Yes No No No
Item Sub-item File type
Frame Rate Yes No No No
All Scene Reference Lens
Clip Continuous Rec Yes No No No
Format Frequency Yes* No No No
Picture Cache Rec Yes No No No
File System Yes* No No No
Cache Rec Time Yes No No No
Rec Format Yes No No No
Interval Rec No No No No
Aspect Ratio (SD) Yes No No No
Number of Frames Yes No No No
Audio Length (IMX) Yes No No No
Interval Time Yes No No No
Base Setting Shooting Mode Yes No No No
Pre-Lighting Yes No No No
HDR Setting HD Rec/Out – – – –
Simul Rec Yes No No No
Color Space – – – –
Proxy Recording Setting Yes* No No No
Format Media Media(A) – – – –
Mode Size Yes* No No No
Media(B) – – – –
Frame Rate – – – –
SD Card(Utility) – – – –
Bit Rate – – – –
SD Card(Proxy) – – – –
Audio Channel Yes* No No No
000
155 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item Sub-item File type Item Sub-item File type

All Scene Reference Lens All Scene Reference Lens
Assignable Switch <0> Yes No No No Auto Iris Iris Override Yes No No No
<1> Yes No No No Mode Yes No No No
<2> Yes No No No Level Yes No No No
<3> Yes No No No Speed Yes No No No
<4> Yes No No No Clip High light Yes No No No
<5> Yes No No No Detect Window Yes No No No
Lens RET Yes No No No Detect Window Indication No No No No
Online Yes No No No Iris APL Ratio Yes No No No
Zoom Speed Yes No No No Iris Var Width Yes No No No
VF Setting Color Yes No No No Iris Var Height Yes No No No
Color Mode Yes No No No Iris Var H Position Yes No No No
Peaking Type Yes No No No Iris Var V Position Yes No No No
Peaking Frequency Yes No No No Zebra Zebra Select Yes No No No
Peaking Color Yes No No No Zebra1 Level Yes No No No
VF Detail Level Yes No No No Zebra1 Aperture Level Yes No No No
Marker Setting Yes No No No Zebra2 Level Yes No No No
Color Yes No No No Display On/Off Video Level Warning Yes No No No
Center Marker Yes No No No Shutter Setting Yes No No No
Safety Zone Yes No No No ND Filter Position Yes No No No
Safety Area Yes No No No Gain Setting Yes No No No
Aspect Marker Yes No No No Rec/Play Status Yes No No No
Aspect Select Yes No No No Color Temp. Yes No No No
Aspect Mask Yes No No No Frame Rate/Interval Yes No No No
Aspect Safety Zone Yes No No No Battery Remain Yes No No No
Aspect Safety Area Yes No No No Timecode Yes No No No
100% Marker Yes No No No Audio Level Meter Yes No No No
User Box Yes No No No Media Status Yes No No No
User Box Width Yes No No No SD Card(Utility) Yes No No No
User Box Height Yes No No No Focus Position Yes No No No
User Box H Position Yes No No No Iris Position Yes No No No
User Box V Position Yes No No No Zoom Position Yes No No No
Gain Switch Gain<L> Yes No No No Extender Yes No No No
Gain<M> Yes No No No ALAC Yes No No No
Gain<H> Yes No No No AE Mode Yes No No No
Gain <Turbo> Yes No No No Focus Mode Yes No No No
Shockless Gain Yes No No No White Balance Mode Yes No No No
000

Display On/Off CC5600K Yes No No No Slow Shutter Setting Yes Yes No No
Rec Format Yes No No No Number of Frames Yes Yes No No
Gamma Yes No No No Time Zone Time Zone Yes No No No
Timecode Lock Yes No No No Clip Clip Naming Yes No No No
Network Condition Yes No No No Title Prefix Yes No No No
Proxy Status Yes No No No Number Set No No No No
NW Client Mode Status Yes No No No Update Media Media(A) – – – –
Streaming Status Yes No No No Media(B) – – – –
GPS Yes No No No GPS GPS Yes No No No
Video Signal Monitor Yes No No No Planning Load from Media(A) – – – –
Clip Name Yes No No No Metadata Load from Media(B) – – – –
Focus Assist Indicator Yes No No No Properties – – – –
Focus Area Marker Yes No No No Clear Memory – – – –
Lens Info Yes No No No Clip Name Disp Yes No No No
WRR RF Level Yes No No No Sort by Yes No No No
Clip Number Yes No No No USB Select Folder – – – –
“!” LED Gain <!> Yes No No No View Clip List – – – –
Shutter <!> Yes No No No Rename Folder – – – –
White Preset <!> Yes No No No Error Check Yes No No No
ATW Run <!> Yes No No No Format USB – – – –
Extender <!> Yes No No No Copy to USB – – – –
Filter <!> Yes No No No Media Remain – – – –
Iris Override <!> Yes No No No Flash Band Setting No No No No
White Setting White Switch Yes No No No Reduce
Shockless White Yes No No No
ATW Speed Yes No No No
ATW Mode Yes No No No
AWB Fixed Area Yes No No No
Filter White Memory Yes No No No
Offset White Offset White <A> Yes No No No
Warm Cool <A> Yes No No No
Warm Cool Balance<A> Yes No No No
Offset White Yes No No No
Warm Cool Yes No No No
Warm Cool Balance Yes No No No
Shutter Mode Yes Yes No No
000
Paint Menu Item Sub-item

All Scene
File type
Reference Lens
Gamma Setting Yes Yes Default No
Item Sub-item File type Step Gamma Yes Yes Yes No
All Scene Reference Lens Master Gamma Yes Yes Yes No
Switch Status Gamma Yes Yes Default No R Gamma Yes Yes Yes No
Black Gamma Yes Yes Yes No G Gamma Yes Yes Yes No
Matrix Yes Yes Yes No B Gamma Yes Yes Yes No
Knee Yes Yes Yes No Gamma Category Yes Yes Yes No
White Clip No Yes No No Gamma Select Yes Yes Yes No
Detail Yes Yes Default No Black Gamma Setting Yes Yes Yes No
Aperture Yes Yes Default No Range Yes Yes Yes No
Flare Yes Yes Default No Master Black Gamma Yes Yes Yes No
Test Saw Yes No No No Knee Setting Yes Yes Yes No
HDR Paint Setting HLG Look Yes Yes Yes No Point Yes Yes Yes No
HDR Black Offset Yes Yes Yes No Slope Yes Yes Yes No
HDR Knee Yes Yes Yes No Knee Saturation Yes Yes Yes No
HDR Knee Point Yes Yes Yes No Knee Saturation Level Yes Yes Yes No
HDR Knee Slope Yes Yes Yes No White Clip Setting No Yes No No
HDR Black Compression Yes Yes Yes No Level Yes Yes Yes No
White Color Temp <A> Yes Yes Yes No Detail(HD) Setting Yes Yes Default No
Color Temp Balance <A> Yes Yes Yes No Level Yes Yes Yes No
R Gain <A> Yes Yes Yes No H/V Ratio Yes Yes Yes No
B Gain <A> Yes Yes Yes No Crispening Yes Yes Yes No
Color Temp Yes Yes Yes No Level Depend Yes Yes Yes No
Color Temp Balance Yes Yes Yes No Level Depend Level Yes Yes Yes No
R Gain Yes Yes Yes No Frequency Yes Yes Yes No
B Gain Yes Yes Yes No Knee Aperture Yes Yes Yes No
Black Master Black Yes Yes Yes No Knee Aperture Level Yes Yes Yes No
R Black Yes Yes Yes No Limit Yes Yes Yes No
B Black Yes Yes Yes No White Limit Yes Yes Yes No
Flare Setting Yes Yes Default No Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No
Master Flare Yes Yes Yes No V Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No
R Flare Yes Yes Yes No V Detail Creation Yes Yes Yes No
G Flare Yes Yes Yes No
B Flare Yes Yes Yes No
Gamma(HDR) Gamma Select No No No No
000

Detail (SD) Setting Yes Yes Default No Matrix Setting Yes Yes Yes No
Level Yes Yes Yes No Adaptive Matrix Yes Yes Yes No
H/V Ratio Yes Yes Yes No Preset Matrix Yes Yes Yes No
Crispening Yes Yes Yes No Preset Select Yes Yes Yes No
Level Depend Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix Yes Yes Yes No
Level Depend Level Yes Yes Yes No Level Yes Yes Yes No
Frequency Yes Yes Yes No Phase Yes Yes Yes No
Knee Aperture Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix R-G Yes Yes Yes No
Knee Aperture Level Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix R-B Yes Yes Yes No
Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix G-R Yes Yes Yes No
White Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix G-B Yes Yes Yes No
Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix B-R Yes Yes Yes No
V Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix B-G Yes Yes Yes No
V Detail Creation Yes Yes Yes No Multi Matrix Setting Yes Yes Yes No
Cross Color Suppress Yes Yes Yes No Area Indication No No No No
Aperture Setting Yes Yes Default No Color Detection – – – –
Level Yes Yes Yes No Reset – – – –
Skin Detail Setting Yes Yes Yes No Axis No No No No
Area Detection – – – – Hue Yes Yes Yes No
Area Indication No No No No Saturation Yes Yes Yes No
Level Yes Yes Yes No V Modulation Setting Yes No Default No
Saturation Yes Yes Yes No Master V Modulation Yes Yes Default No
Hue Yes Yes Yes No R V Modulation Yes Yes Default No
Width Yes Yes Yes No G V Modulation Yes Yes Default No
B V Modulation Yes Yes Default No
Low Key Setting Yes Yes Yes No
Saturation Level Yes Yes Yes No
Range Yes Yes Yes No
Saturation Mode Saturation Mode Yes Yes Yes No
Knee Saturation Yes Yes Yes No
Black Gamma Yes Yes Yes No
Low Key Saturation Yes Yes Yes No
Noise Suppression Setting Yes Yes Yes No
Level Yes Yes Yes No
000
Thumbnail Menu Maintenance Menu

Display Clip – – – – – White Shading Channel Select Yes No Default No
Properties White H Saw No No No No
Set Index Picture – – – – – White H Para No No No No
Thumbnail View Essence Mark Thumbnail – – – – White V Saw No No No No
Clip Thumbnail – – – – White V Para No No No No
Set Shot Mark Add Shot Mark1 – – – – White Saw/Para Yes No Default No
Delete Shot Mark1 – – – – Black Shading Channel Select Yes No Default No
Add Shot Mark2 – – – – Black H Saw No No No No
Delete Shot Mark2 – – – – Black H Para No No No No
Set Clip Flag Add OK – – – – Black V Saw No No No No
Add NG – – – – Black V Para No No No No
Add KEEP – – – – Black Saw/Para Yes No Default No
Delete Clip Flag – – – – Master Black Yes Yes Yes No
Lock/Unlock Clip Select Clip – – – – Master Gain (TMP) – – – –
Lock All Clips – – – – Battery Near End: Info Battery Yes No No No
Unlock All Clips – – – – End: Info Battery Yes No No No
Copy Clip Select Clip – – – – Near End: Sony Battery Yes No No No
All Clips – – – – End: Sony Battery Yes No No No
Delete Clip Select Clip – – – – Near End: Other Battery Yes No No No
All Clips – – – – End: Other Battery Yes No No No
Transfer Clip Select Clip – – – – Detected Battery – – – –
All Clips – – – – DC Voltage Alarm DC Low Voltage1 Yes No No No
Transfer Select Clip – – – – DC Low Voltage2 Yes No No No
Clip(Proxy) All Clips – – – –
Filter Clips OK – – – –
NG – – – –
KEEP – – – –
None – – – –
Customize View Thumbnail Caption Yes Yes No No
000

Audio Front MIC Select Yes No No No WRR Setting WRR Valid CH Sel Yes No No No
Rear XLR Auto Yes No No No WRR CH Select No No No No
Front MIC CH1 Ref Yes No No No WRR Delay Comp Yes No No No
Front MIC CH2 Ref Yes No No No TX – – – –
Rear MIC CH1 Ref Yes No No No TX Audio Peak – – – –
Rear MIC CH2 Ref Yes No No No TX Input Level – – – –
Line Input Ref Yes No No No TX ATT Level – – – –
Min Alarm Volume Yes No No No TX LCF Frequency – – – –
Speaker Attenuate Yes No No No TX System Delay Yes No No No
Headphone Out Yes No No No TX RF Power – – – –
Reference Level Yes No No No TX Power Save – – – –
Reference Out Yes No No No TX-Cam Power Sync Yes No No No
CH1&2 AGC Mode Yes No No No Timecode TC Out Yes No No No
CH3&4 AGC Mode Yes No No No DF/NDF Yes No No No
AGC Spec Yes No No No LTC UBIT Yes No No No
Limiter Mode Yes No No No Counter Display Yes No No No
Output Limiter Yes No No No Essence Mark Find Mode Yes No No No
CH1 Wind Filter Yes No No No Camera Config HD SDI Remote I/F Yes No No No
CH2 Wind Filter Yes No No No Color Bars Select Yes No No No
CH3 Wind Filter Yes No No No User Menu Only Yes No No No
CH4 Wind Filter Yes No No No User Menu with Lock No No No No
1kHz Tone on Color Bars Yes No No No RM Common Memory Yes No No No
MIC CH1 Level Yes No No No RM Rec Start Yes No No No
MIC CH2 Level Yes No No No SET Key on Thumbnail Yes No No No
Rear1/WRR Level Yes No No No ALAC Yes No No No
Rear2/WRR Level Yes No No No Preset White Color Temp Yes No No No
Audio CH3 Level Yes No No No C.Temp BAL Yes No No No
Audio CH4 Level Yes No No No R Gain Yes No No No
B Gain Yes No No No
AWB Enable No No No No
White Filter ND Filter C.Temp Yes No No No
ND FLT C.Temp<1> Yes No No No
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4> Yes No No No
Electrical CC<A> Yes No No No
Electrical CC Yes No No No
Electrical CC<C> Yes No No No
Electrical CC<D> Yes No No No
000

DCC Adjust DCC Function Select Yes No No No Network Setting Yes* No No No
DCC D Range Yes No No No Wi-Fi Mode Yes* No No No
DCC Point Yes No No No NFC – – – –
DCC Gain Yes No No No WPS – – – –
DCC Delay Time Yes No No No Channel Yes* No No No
DCC Peak Filter Yes No No No SSID & Password – – – –
Flicker Reduce Mode Yes No No No SSID – – – –
Frequency Yes No No No Wi-Fi Station Remote Yes* No No No
Genlock Genlock Yes No No No Wi-Fi Station Scan Networks – – – –
Reference – – – – Detail SSID No No No No
Settings
Auto Shading Auto Black Shading – – – – Password No No No No
Reset Black Shading – – – – DHCP Yes* No No No
Master Gain (TMP) – – – – IP Address Yes* No No No
APR APR – – – – Subnet Mask Yes* No No No
Reset – – – – Gateway Yes* No No No
Setup for Mobile Setup – – – – DNS Auto Yes* No No No
App Primary DNS Yes* No No No
Access User Name No No No No Server
Authentication Password No No No No Secondary DNS Yes* No No No
Generate Password – – – – Server
Show Settings – – – – Device Name (Wi-Fi) – – – –
IP Address (Wi-Fi) – – – –
Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi) – – – –
MAC Address (Wi-Fi) – – – –
Regenerate Password – – – –
Modem Yes* No No No
Modem Remote – – – –
Public Key Creation – – – –
Public Key Clear – – – –
Create Key Date – – – –
Wired LAN Yes* No No No
Wired LAN Remote Yes* No No No
000

Network Wired DHCP Yes* No No No Streaming Setting No No No No
LAN IP Address Yes* No No No Preset Select Yes* No No No
Detail
Subnet Mask Yes* No No No Preset1 Size Yes* No No No
Settings
Gateway Yes* No No No Bit Rate Yes* No No No
DNS Auto Yes* No No No Type Yes* No No No
Primary DNS Yes* No No No Destination Yes* No No No
Server Address
Secondary DNS Yes* No No No Destination Port Yes* No No No
Server Preset2 Same as Preset1
Network Client Setting Yes* No No No Preset3 Same as Preset1
Mode Preset Select Yes* No No No Audio Channel Yes* No No No
Preset 1 Display Name Yes* No No No Clock Set Date Mode Yes No No No
CCM Address Yes* No No No 12H/24H Yes No No No
CCM Port Yes* No No No Date – – – –
User Name No No No No Time – – – –
Password No No No No Language Select Yes No No No
NCM with Proxy Yes* No No No Hours Meter Hours (System) – – – –
Camera Control Yes* No No No Hours (Reset) – – – –
Camera Setting No No No No Reset – – – –
Preset 2 Same as Preset 1 Network Reset Reset – – – –
Preset 3 Same as Preset 1 Fan Control Setting Yes No No No
File Transfer File Transfer – – – – VF Display Setting Chara/Marker Brightness Yes No No No
Remote File Transfer Yes* No No No Option Type 1 – – – –
Auto Upload (Proxy) Yes* No No No Type 2 – – – –
Default Upload Server Yes* No No No Type 3 – – – –
Clear Completed Jobs – – – – Install Option – – – –
Clear All Jobs – – – – Version Number – – – –
View Job List – – – – Version Up – – – –
Net-Func Version Number – – – –
Net-Func Ver.Up – – – –
000
File Menu Item Sub-item

All Scene
File type
Reference Lens
Lens File Display Mode No No No No
Item Sub-item File type Recall Internal Memory – – – –
All Scene Reference Lens Store Internal Memory – – – –
User File Load SD Card – – – – Load SD Card – – – –
Save SD Card – – – – Save SD Card – – – –
File ID No No No No File ID No No No Yes
Recall User Preset – – – – File Source – – – –
Store User Preset – – – – Clear Lens Offset – – – –
Clear User Preset – – – – Lens Auto Recall Yes No No No
Load Customize Data Yes No No No Lens Serial Number – – – –
Load White Data Yes No No No Lens Name – – – –
All File Load SD Card – – – – Lens Manufacturer – – – –
Save SD Card – – – – Master V Modulation No No No Yes
File ID Yes No No No Lens Center H No No No Yes
All Preset – – – – Lens Center V No No No Yes
Store All Preset – – – – R Flare No No No Yes
Clear All Preset – – – – G Flare No No No Yes
3Sec Clear Preset No No No No B Flare No No No Yes
Scene File Recall Internal Memory – – – – White Offset R No No No Yes
Store Internal Memory – – – – White Offset B No No No Yes
Load SD Card – – – – Shading Ch Select Yes No No No
Save SD Card – – – – Shading H SAW No No No Yes
File ID No Yes No No Shading H PARA No No No Yes
Scene White Data Yes No No No Shading V SAW No No No Yes
Reference File Store Reference – – – – Shading V PARA No No No Yes
Clear Reference – – – – User Gamma Current Settings – – – –
Load Reference(SD Card) – – – – Load SD Card – – – –
Save Reference(SD Card) – – – – Reset – – – –
File ID No No Yes No
000
164 11. Appendix
Special Recording Support by Recording Format

Special recording 1)
Format Normal recording Slow & Quick Clip Continuous
Picture Cache Rec Interval Rec 2-slot Simul Rec
Motion Rec
HD XAVC-I HD exFAT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
XAVC-L 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
XAVC-L 35 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
XAVC-L 25 Yes Yes Yes – Yes Yes
MPEG HD422 exFAT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
UDF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes –
MPEG HD420 HQ exFAT Yes Yes – – – Yes
UDF Yes Yes – – – –
FAT Yes Yes – – – –
MPEG HD420 SP Yes Yes – – – –
SD MPEG IMX 50 exFAT Yes Yes – – – –
UDF Yes Yes – – – –
DVCAM exFAT Yes – – – – –
UDF Yes – – – – –
1) For details about supported image size, frame rate, and functions, see “Advanced Operations” (page 51).
000
165 11. Appendix
Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings

Operation >Format in the setup menu Cache Rec Time
Frequency Rec Format 0–2 sec 2–4 sec 4–6 sec 6–8 sec 8–10 sec 10–12 sec 12–14 sec 13–15 sec
59.94 XAVC-I 1920×1080P Yes Yes – – – – – –
50 (6 3/4) XAVC-I 1920×1080i Yes Yes Yes Yes – – – –
XAVC-I 1280×720P Yes Yes Yes Yes – – – –
XAVC-L 50/35/25 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MPEG HD422 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MPEG HD420 HQ/SP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MPEG IMX50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
DVCAM – – – – – – – –
29.97 XAVC-I 1920×1080P Yes Yes Yes Yes – – – –
25 XAVC-L 50/35 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
23.98
MPEG HD422 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
MPEG HD420 HQ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
000
166 11. Appendix
Media Recording and Playback Time

[Note]
The recording and playback times are for a continuous recording as a single clip. The actual times may be shorter, depending on the number of clips recorded.
Format No. of pixels/Frame rate Maximum bit rate Recording/playback time

SBP-240F SBS-128G1C
XAVC Intra XAVC-I HD 1920×1080 / 59.94P, 50P 222 Mbps Approx. 115 minutes Approx. 57 minutes
1920×1080 / 29.97P, 25P, 59.94i, 50i 111 Mbps Approx. 220 minutes Approx. 105 minutes
1920×1080 / 23.98P 89 Mbps Approx. 270 minutes Approx. 135 minutes
1280×720 / 59.94P, 50P 112 Mbps Approx. 215 minutes Approx. 105 minutes
XAVC Long XAVC-L 50 – 50 Mbps Approx. 470 minutes Approx. 230 minutes
XAVC-L 35 – 35 Mbps Approx. 635 minutes Approx. 315 minutes
XAVC-L 25 – 25 Mbps Approx. 850 minutes Approx. 420 minutes
MPEG-2 Long GOP MPEG HD422 – 50 Mbps Approx. 445 minutes Approx. 220 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ – 35 Mbps Approx. 685 minutes Approx. 340 minutes
MPEG IMX – – 50 Mbps Approx. 430 minutes Approx. 215 minutes
DVCAM – – 25 Mbps Approx. 820 minutes Approx. 405 minutes
000
167 11. Appendix
Usage Precautions
The fan and battery are consumable parts that will ˎˎIf sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air, ˎˎLocations subject to violent vibration Viewfinder
need periodic replacement. or other transportation service, pack it in the ˎˎNear strong magnetic fields
When operating at room temperature, a shipping carton of the camcorder. ˎˎClose to radio or TV transmitters producing Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece
normal replacement cycle will be about 5 years. strong electromagnetic fields. lens pointing directly at the sun.
However, this replacement cycle represents only Care of the camcorder ˎˎIn direct sunlight or close to heaters for The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays
a general guideline and does not imply that the Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the extended periods and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For lenses or optical filters using a blower.
details on parts replacement, contact your dealer. Do not attempt to clean the interior of the camera To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable About the LCD panels
using a blower. Any dust particles in the air that communications devices
The life expectancy of the AC adaptor and the enter components may cause a malfunction. The use of portable telephones and other The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured
electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with communications devices near this camcorder can with high precision technology, giving a
normal operating temperatures and normal usage a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth result in malfunction and interference with audio functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a
(8 hours per day; 25 days per month). moistened in a little neutral detergent, then wipe and video signals. very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”,
If usage exceeds the above normal usage dry. Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or It is recommended that the portable either always off (black), always on (red, green, or
frequency, the life expectancy may be reduced thinners, as these may cause discoloration or other communications devices near this camcorder be blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long period
correspondingly. damage to the finish of the camcorder. powered off. of use, because of the physical characteristics of
the liquid crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may
Use and storage In the event of operating problems Note on laser beams appear spontaneously. These problems are not a
malfunction. Note that any such problems have no
If you should experience problems with the
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image effect on recorded data.
camcorder, contact a Sony service representative.
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks sensor. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser
ˎˎThe internal mechanism may be damaged or
Do not place this product close to medical devices beam, be careful not to expose the CMOS image Phenomena specific to CMOS image sensors
the body warped. sensor to the laser beam or any reflected light and
This product (including accessories) has The following phenomena that may appear in
ˎˎIf an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe scattered light from the laser beam.
magnet(s) which may interfere with pacemakers, images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe
programmable shunt valves for hydrocephalus Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. They
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using
treatment, or other medical devices. Do not Condensation do not indicate malfunctions.
it and contact your dealer or a Sony service
place this product close to persons who use such
representative. If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm
medical devices.
location, or if ambient temperature suddenly White flecks
Consult your doctor before using this product if
Do not cover the camcorder while operating rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
you use any such medical device.
Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known with high-precision technologies, fine white
can cause excessive internal heat build-up. as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
Use and storage locations the unit and wait until the condensation clears cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related
before operating the unit. Operating the unit while to the principle of image sensors and is not a
After use Store in a level, ventilated place.
condensation is present may damage the unit. malfunction.
Always turn off the POWER switch. Avoid using or storing the camcorder in the
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following places.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period ˎˎIn excessive heat or cold (operating temperature Fitting the zoom lens following cases:
range: 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)) ˎˎWhen operating at a high environmental
Remove the battery pack. It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise temperature
Remember that in summer in warm climates
the temperature inside a car with the windows
damage may result. Be sure to refer to the section ˎˎWhen you have raised the master gain
Shipping “Mounting and Adjusting the Lens” (page 27). (sensitivity)
closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F).
ˎˎRemove the media before transporting the ˎˎWhen operating in Slow-Shutter mode
camcorder. ˎˎIn damp or dusty locations
The problem may be alleviated by executing
ˎˎLocations where the camcorder may be
automatic black balance adjustment.
exposed to rain
000
168 11. Appendix: Usage Precautions
Aliasing While repeating picture recording/playback with About GPS ˎˎIf you upload and share the images which are
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they a certain recording media for an extended period, recorded when the setting “GPS” is ”On,” the
may appear jagged or flicker. files in the media may be fragmented, disabling The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system record location may be exposed on the Internet
proper recording/storage. In such a case, make that calculates geographical location from highly even if you do not intend to do so. If you do not
Flicker a backup of clips in the media then perform accurate US space satellites. This system allows want to record location information, select “Off”
If recording is made under lighting produced formatting of the media using Operation >Format you to pinpoint your exact location on the earth. for “GPS” (page 104).
by discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, Media (page 98) in the setup menu. The GPS satellites are located in 6 orbits, 20,000 km
or mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker, above the earth. The GPS system consists of 24 or On triangulating errors
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear Notes on security more GPS satellites. ˎˎIf you move to another location right after
distorted. A GPS receiver receives radio signals from the setting “GPS” to “On” in the menu, it may
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF satellites, and calculates the current location of the take a longer time for the camcorder to start
ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO receiver based on the orbital information (almanac triangulating, compared to when you stay in the
IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY MEASURES data) and travel time of the signals, etc. same place.
ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE Determining a location is called “triangulating.” A ˎˎError caused by the position of GPS satellites
DATA LEAKS RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION GPS receiver can determine the location’s latitude The camcorder automatically triangulates your
SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF and longitude by receiving signals from 3 or more current location when the camcorder receives
ANY KIND. satellites. radio signals from 3 or more GPS satellites.
ˎˎDepending on the operating environment, ˎˎAs the positions of GPS satellites vary constantly, The triangulating error allowed by the GPS
In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to unauthorized third parties on the network may it may take longer to determine the location or satellites is about 10 m (33 feet). Depending
auto mode (page 116). be able to access the unit. When connecting the the receiver may not be able to determine the on the environment of the location, the
If the frame rate selected for recording is close unit to the network, be sure to confirm that the location at all, depending on the location and triangulating error can be greater. In this case,
to the power-supply frequency, flicker may not network is protected securely. time you use the camcorder. your actual location may not match the location
be reduced sufficiently even if you activate the ˎˎCommunication content may be unknowingly ˎˎ“GPS” is a system for determining geographic on the map based on the GPS information.
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the location by triangulating radio signals from Meanwhile, the GPS satellites are controlled
electronic shutter. vicinity of the signals. When using wireless LAN GPS satellites. Avoid using the camcorder by the United States Department of Defense,
communication, implement security measures in places where radio signals are blocked or and the degree of accuracy may be changed
properly to protect the communication content. reflected, such as a shadowy place surrounded intentionally.
Focal plane
ˎˎFrom a safety standpoint, when using the unit by buildings or trees, etc. Use the camcorder in ˎˎError during the triangulating process
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
connected with the network, it is strongly open sky environments. The camcorder acquires location information
elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading video
recommended to access the Control window ˎˎYou may not be able to record location periodically during triangulating.
signals, subjects that quickly move across the
via a Web browser and change the access information at locations or in situations where
screen may appear slightly skewed.
limitation settings from the factory preset values radio signals from the GPS satellites do not
(page 77).
On the restriction of use of GPS
reach the camcorder as follows. Use GPS in accordance with the regulations of the
Flashband Changing the password regularly is also –– In tunnels, indoors or under the shade of
The luminance at the top and bottom of the situation, the countries/regions of use.
recommended. buildings.
screen may change when shooting a flashlight ˎˎDo not browse any other website in the Web –– Between tall buildings or at narrow streets
beam or a light source that quickly flashes. browser while making settings or after making surrounded by buildings.
On the geographic coordinate system
You can use the supplied application software to settings. The “WGS-84” geographic coordinate system is
–– In underground locations, locations
correct clips that contain frames with flash bands. Since the login status remains in the Web used.
surrounded by dense trees, under an
browser, close the Web browser when you elevated bridge, or in locations where
Fragmentation complete the settings to prevent unauthorized magnetic fields are generated, such as near
third parties from using the unit or harmful high voltage cables.
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced programs from running. –– Near devices that generate radio signals of
properly, try formatting the recording media.
the same frequency band as the camcorder:
near 1.5 GHz band mobile telephones, etc.
000
169 11. Appendix
Specifications
Operating temperature MPEG HD420 HQ: LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, DVCAM
General 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) 4-channel 720×480/59.94i
Storage temperature MPEG IMX 720×576/50i
Mass Approx. 3.6 kg (7 lb 15 oz) (body only) –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) LPCM 16/24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel Proxy
Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch), excluding File system DVCAM Main line 1920×1080: 29.97P, 25P,
protrusions, body only)1) exFAT, UDF, FAT LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel 23.98P
Continuous operating time Proxy Main line 1280×720: 59.94P, 50P,
Approx. 195 minutes (using BP-GL95B) AAC-LC, 128 kbps, 2-channel 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
150 (6)
Recording format (video) Recording/playback time
XAVC Intra See “Media Recording and Playback Time”
XAVC-I: CBG, 223 Mbps (max), MPEG-4 (page 166).
AVC/H.264 Recording frame rate Input/Output Section
XAVC Long XAVC Intra
XAVC-L 50: VBR, 50 Mbps (max), XAVC-I
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
269 (10 5/8)
MPEG‑4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-L 35: VBR, 35 Mbps (max), 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P Inputs
MPEG‑4 AVC/H.264 1280×720/59.94P, 50P GENLOCK IN:
XAVC-L 25: VBR, 25 Mbps (max), XAVC Long BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
MPEG‑4 AVC/H.264 XAVC-L 50 unbalanced
332 (13 1/8)
MPEG-2 Long GOP 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i, TC IN: BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kilohms
1) The values for dimensions are approximate. MPEG HD422: CBR, 50 Mbps, MPEG-2 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:
422P@HL 1280×720/59.94P, 50P XLR type, 3-pin, female
Power requirements MPEG HD420 HQ: VBR, 35 Mbps (max), XAVC-L 35 LINE / AES/EBU / MIC / MIC+48V
12 V (11 V to 17.0 V) DC MPEG‑2 MP@HL 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i, switchable
Power consumption MPEG HD420 SP: CBR, 25 Mbps, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P LINE: +4, 0, –3 dBu
Approx. 22 W (body only, when MPEG‑2 MP@H-14 XAVC-L 25 AES/EBU: AES3 compliant
recording in XAVC, with LCD MPEG IMX 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu
monitor on) CBR, 50 Mbps MPEG-2 Long GOP MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female, –70 dBu to
Approx. 24 W (CBK-VF02 viewfinder, DVCAM MPEG HD422 –30 dBu
lens, microphone, when recording CBR, 25 Mbps 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, WRR: D-sub 15-pin
in XAVC, with LCD monitor on) Proxy 25P Analog CH1: –40 dBu
[Notes] AVC/H.264 Main Profile 4:2:0 Long GOP 1280×720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 23.98P, Digital CH1/CH2: –40 dBFS
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of 1280×720: 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps 25P SDI IN: SMPTE ST292-1/259 standard
50 W or greater. 640×360/3 Mbps, MPEG HD420 HQ compliant
ˎˎ When using a battery (BP-GL95B), do not allow the total 480×270/1 Mbps, 500 kbps (VBR) 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 4-channel audio
power consumption of connected peripherals to exceed
55 W.
Recording format (audio) 25P
ˎˎ When using the AC-DN10A, do not allow the total power XAVC Intra 1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 50 W. LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel 1280×720/59.94P, 50P
ˎˎ Connect only devices with current consumption of 1.8 A XAVC Long MPEG HD420 SP
or lower to the DC OUT connector.
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel 1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
MPEG-2 Long GOP MPEG IMX
MPEG HD422: LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 720×486/59.94i
4-channel 720×576/50i
000
170 11. Appendix: Specifications
Outputs SD card slots

VIDEO OUT: Camera Section Audio Section Proxy (1), Utility (1)
BNC type, SD analog composite/HD-Y
switchable Imaging element Sampling frequency
SDI OUT 1/2: 2/3-inch type, “Exmor” Full HD CMOS 48 kHz
BNC type, 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced (3G image sensor Quantization Lens Section (PXW-X400KC)
HD/1.5G HD/SD switchable) 1920 (H) × 1080 (V) 16/24-bit
SMPTE ST424/425 Level-A/B, ST292- Type 3-chip RGB Headroom
1/259 standard compliant Lens mount
Optical system 20 dB (factory default) (20, 18, 16,
4-channel audio Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount
F1.4 prism system 12 dB), EBUL
AUDIO OUT: Focal length
ND filters Frequency response
XLR type, 5-pin, male, +4/0/–3 dBu 8.2 mm to 164 mm
1: Clear 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less)
(balanced) Zoom Manual
2: 1/4 ND Dynamic range
TC OUT: BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 50 ohms Zoom factor
3: 1/16 ND 90 dB (typical)
EARPHONE (stereo, mini jack): 20
4: 1/64 ND Distortion 0.08% or lower (–40 dBu input level)
–11 dBu (reference level output, Maximum aperture ratio
Sensitivity F12 (system frequency: 59.94i) (Typical) Built-in speaker
maximum monitor volume, 1:1.9
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance, 3200K) Monaural, 300 mW output
16‑ohm load) Iris Auto/Manual switchable
Minimum illumination
HDMI: Type A, 19-pin F1.9 to F16 and C (Close)
0.013 lx (F1.4, +42 dB, 16-frame
Focus range
accumulation)
Auto/Manual switchable
Other Image S/N ratio Display Section Range
DC IN: XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 V to 17 V DC 62 dB (Noise Suppression On) (Typical)
900 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
DC OUT: Round type 4-pin, 11 V to 17 V DC, Horizontal resolution
LCD monitor 10 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide
1.8 A maximum rated current 1000 TVL (TV lines) or higher
Screen size angle)
LENS: 12-pin, lens power source (11 V to 17 V Black level 3 ±1% (Black set to [±0] in the setup
8.8 cm (3.5 inch) diagonal Filter diameter
DC, 1.0 A maximum rated current) menu)
Aspect ratio M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch
REMOTE: 8-pin Shutter speed
16:9 Macro ON/OFF selectable
LIGHT: 2-pin 59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
USB: 4-pin (type A) (2), 4-pin (type B) 29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec. Number of pixels
VF: Square type 26-pin (for CBK-VF02), 25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec. 960 (H) × 540 (V)
round type 20-pin (for HDVF series) 23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec.
Network connector: Slow shutter Lens Section (PXW-X400KF)
RJ45 type, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u), 2 to 8, 16 frames
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3) Dynamic range Media Section Lens mount
600% Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount
Smear –135 dB Focal length
SxS card slots
Form factor: Express Card/34 8 mm to 128 mm
Number of slots: 2 (35 mm equivalent: 31.5 mm to
Connector: PCMCIA Express Card 503 mm)
compliant Zoom Power/Manual switchable
Write rate: 50 Mbps or higher Zoom factor
Read rate: 50 Mbps or higher 16
Maximum aperture ratio
1:1.9
000
Iris Auto/Manual switchable

Related Equipment XQD ExpressCard adaptor Design and specifications are subject to change
F1.9 to F16 and C (Close) without notice.
Focus range QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory cards)
Auto/Manual switchable Notes
Range Recording media ˎˎAlways make a test recording, and verify that it
800 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
Upgrade license was recorded successfully.
50 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide SxS memory cards SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
CBKZ-SLHL1 (HDR LICENSE)
angle) SxS PRO X series OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
732 mm to ∞ (macro ON, SxS PRO+ series TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
Power supply and related equipment ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR
telephoto) SxS PRO series
Filter diameter AC adaptor SxS-1 series ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE
M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch AC-DN10A SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE
Macro ON/OFF selectable Battery pack Audio equipment SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
BP-GL95B ˎˎAlways verify that the unit is operating
Battery charger Microphone properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE
BC-L70A ECM-678/674/673/680S FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
Supplied Accessories Microphone holder
CAC-12
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR
REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS
Lens, viewfinder and related equipment OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE
Digital wireless receiver
Shoulder belt (1) Lens 2/3-inch bayonet mount lens only DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE
Cold shoe kit (1) Viewfinder UHF synthesized tuner unit WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF
Lens mount cap HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30 URX-S03D THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
USB wireless LAN module (IFU-WLM3) Viewfinder rotation bracket WHATSOEVER.
Protective cap (1) BKW-401 Other peripheral devices ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF
Guard (1) ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR
Before Using This Unit (1) Tripod attachment MADE BY THIRD PARTIES.
Equipment for remote control
Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) (1) VCT-14/U14 ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS,
Lens (supplied with PXW-X400KC) (1) Remote control unit Video light REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA
Autofocus lens (supplied with PXW-X400KF) (1) RM-B170 UC-D200A (Nippon Video System - RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE
Flange focal length (flange back) adjustment chart RCP-1000/1500/1530 NIPROS) SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
(1) RCP-1001/1501 Ultralight (Anton Bauer) STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR
Stereo microphone (supplied with PXW-X400KC/ Pad CBK-SP01 soft-type shoulder pad STORAGE SYSTEMS.
[Note]
PXW-X400KF) (1) Command network unit (CNU) is not supported. Wireless LAN adaptor ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
Viewfinder (supplied with PXW-X400KC/ CBK-WA02 TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY
PXW‑X400KF) (1) Network adaptor kit SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY
Stereo microphone windscreen (supplied with
HD camera adaptor CBK-NA1 RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY
PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF) (1) CA-FB70/TX70 USB adaptor KIND.
CBK-DL1
[Note]
If SDI OUT2 is used when the CA-FB70 is attached, use an
L-shaped adaptor. Products for maintenance, ease of use/handling
Media adaptor Attachment bracket
A-2092-367-
MEAD-SD02 (for SD cards)
000
Software Downloads Chart of Peripheral Devices and Accessories MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio License
When the unit is used with a PC connection, ECM-680S/678/674/673 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
download any device drivers, plug-ins, and Microphone HD monitor/SD monitor PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
application software you require from the USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT
following websites. CAC-12 DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO
Microphone holder (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
Sony Professional products website: CBK-VF02 STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
Viewfinder (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY
Japan https://www.sony.jp/professional/ A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY
All other countries URX-S03D AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30 UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
https://pro.sony/ (click [Change Country, Viewfinder LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
Region or Language] at the bottom of the DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless Receiver
page and select the region and language) SxS memory cards NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
SBS-32G1C, SBS-64G1C, SBS-128G1C, SBP-64E, FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Sony Creative Software, software download page: SBP-128E, SBP-256E, SBP-120F, SBP-240F MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/download/ SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
software_for_sony_equipment QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor
PXW-X400
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530 CA-FB70 HD Camera Adaptor
RCP-1001/1501
Remote Control Unit
CA-TX70 HD Camera Adaptor
VCT-14
Tripod attachment
BP-GL95B BC-L70A
Battery Pack Battery Charger
AC-DN10A
AC Adaptor
000
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt to MATERIALS The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed,
derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you to manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control
disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in view, store, process and/or use content created by you and/ equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
IMPORTANT: part, or create any derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE or third parties. Such content may be protected by copyright, performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THE unless such derivative works are intentionally facilitated by other intellectual property laws, and/or agreements. You aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic
CAMCORDER, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE the SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper with any agree to use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems,
AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE SOFTWARE digital rights management functionality of the SOFTWARE. such laws and agreements that apply to such content. You in which the failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death,
YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO You may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any acknowledge and agree that SONY may take appropriate personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage
NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE of the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any measures to protect the copyright of content stored, (“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of the THIRD-PARTY
THE SOFTWARE. mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You may processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such measures SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates specifically
not separate any individual component of the SOFTWARE include, but are not limited to, counting the frequency of disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or condition
This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony for use on more than one camcorder unless expressly your backup and restoration through certain SOFTWARE of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA governs your rights authorized to do so by SONY. You may not remove, alter, features, refusal to accept your request to enable restoration
and obligations regarding the software of SONY and/or cover or deface any trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE. of data, and termination of this EULA in the event of your EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
its third party licensors (including SONY’s affiliates) and You may not share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign, illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE. You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is
their respective affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The software, network
at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use of the
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder, together with any services or other products other than SOFTWARE upon
CONTENT SERVICE SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” without
updates/ upgrades provided by SONY, any printed, on-line or which the SOFTWARE’S performance depends might be
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED warranty, duty or condition of any kind.
other electronic documentation for such software, and any interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers
data files created by operation of such software (collectively, (software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR
MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for
the “SOFTWARE”). and such suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE,
THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-
network services, contents or other products will continue
OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in the to be available, or will operate without interruption or
TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE “SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES
SOFTWARE having a separate end user license agreement modification.
WILL BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
(including, but not limited to, GNU General Public license BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
and Lesser/Library General Public License) shall be covered content and services available through the SOFTWARE
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE may be provided by third parties over which SONY has MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR
by such applicable separate end user license agreement A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR
in lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent required by COMPONENTS no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN
Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license grant, you INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE MAKE ANY CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT
such separate end user license agreement (“EXCLUDED THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE
SOFTWARE”). acknowledge that the SOFTWARE may include EXCLUDED DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME.
SOFTWARE. Certain EXCLUDED SOFTWARE may be WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL
covered by open source software licenses (“Open Source BE UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE
SOFTWARE LICENSE INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY
Components”), which means any software licenses approved
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is as open source licenses by the Open Source Initiative or any SERVICES DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE
protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws substantially similar licenses, including but not limited to any You acknowledge and agree that access to certain WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE
and international treaties. license that, as a condition of distribution of the software SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection OR DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES
licensed under such license, requires that the distributor for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are solely (INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER
make the software available in source code format. If and responsible for payment of any third party fees associated THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S
COPYRIGHT with your Internet connection, including but not limited
to the extent disclosure is required, please visit www.sony. PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE,
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not to Internet service provider or airtime charges. Operation
com/linux or other SONY-designated web site for a list of UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND (E) REGARDING
limited to, any images, photographs, animation, video, audio, of the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted depending
applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS included in the THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE
music, text and “applets” incorporated into the SOFTWARE) on the capabilities, bandwidth or technical limitations of
SOFTWARE from time to time, and the applicable terms and IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR
is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD-PARTY your Internet connection and service. The provision, quality
conditions governing its use. Such terms and conditions OTHERWISE.
SUPPLIERS. and security of such Internet connectivity are the sole
may be changed by the applicable third party at any time
without liability to you. To the extent required by the licenses responsibility of the third party providing such service. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
GRANT OF LICENSE covering EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE will apply in lieu of the terms of this EULA. To the extent the EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR
solely in connection with the camcorder and only for your terms of the licenses applicable to EXCLUDED SOFTWARE You agree to comply with all applicable export and re-export IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.
individual use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS prohibit any of the restrictions in this EULA with respect to restrictions and regulations of the area or country in which SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME
expressly reserve all rights, title and interest (including, but such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will not apply you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize the transfer, THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
not limited to, all intellectual property rights) in and to the to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To the extent the terms of of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise in OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
SOFTWARE that this EULA does not specifically grant to you. the licenses applicable to Open Source Components require violation of any such restrictions or regulations. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE
SONY to make an offer to provide source code in connection EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
with the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby made.
000
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Certain services available through the SOFTWARE may rely ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY the amendment, you should promptly contact SONY for
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for upon location information, including, but not limited to, the This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as amended and instructions. Your continued use of the SOFTWARE after
purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY geographic location of the camcorder. You acknowledge modified from time to time, together constitute the entire the effective date of any such notice shall be deemed your
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”) SHALL that for the purpose of providing such services, SONY, agreement between you and SONY with respect to the agreement to be bound by such amendment.
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS or their partners may collect, SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED archive, process and use such location data, and that such right or provision of this EULA shall not constitute a waiver of THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT services are governed by the privacy policies of SONY or such right or provision. If any part of this EULA is held invalid, Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended third-
LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED such third party. By using any such services, you agree that illegal, or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to party beneficiary of, and shall have the right to enforce, each
TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY you have reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain the intent provision of this EULA with respect to the SOFTWARE of such
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF services and consent to such activities. of this EULA, and the other parts will remain in full force and party.
REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE effect.
OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not intentionally
TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE use Information to personally identify the owner or user of
the SOFTWARE without your knowledge or consent. Any use GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable contact
of Information will be in accordance with the privacy policies The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION address of each area or country.
of SONY or such third party. Please contact applicable International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA.
OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
contact address of each area or country for SONY’s current This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, without
ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation.
privacy policy. regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any dispute arising out
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
of this EULA shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
Please contact applicable third parties for privacy policies Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties hereby consent
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
relating to personally identifiable and other information to the venue and jurisdiction of such courts.
you provide when you use or access third party software or
CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL services. EQUITABLE REMEDIES
INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA SECURITY Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the
You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its affiliates, Information may be processed, stored or transferred to contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation
partners and agents may read, collect, transfer, process and SONY, its affiliates or agents which are located in countries of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause
store certain information collected from the SOFTWARE, outside of your country of residence. Data protection and irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages
including but not limited to information about (i) the information privacy laws in certain countries may not offer would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY obtaining
SOFTWARE and (ii) the software applications, contents and the same level of protection as your country of residence and any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY deems necessary
peripheral devices that interact with your camcorder and the you may have fewer legal rights in relation to Information or appropriate in such circumstances. SONY may also take
SOFTWARE (“Information”). Information includes, but is not processed and stored in, or transferred to, such countries. any legal and technical remedies to prevent violation of
limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your camcorder SONY will use reasonable efforts to take appropriate and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not limited to,
and its components; (2) performance of the camcorder, the technical and organizational steps to prevent unauthorized immediate termination of your use of the SOFTWARE, if
SOFTWARE and their components; (3) configurations of your access to or disclosure of Information, but does not warrant it SONY believes in its sole discretion that you are violating or
camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software applications, will eliminate all risk of misuse of such Information. intend to violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition
contents and peripheral devices that interact with the to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or
camcorder and the SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of use under contract.
of the functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the software AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS may
with the SOFTWARE; and (5) location data, as indicated automatically update or otherwise modify the SOFTWARE, TERMINATION
below. SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may use including, but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may
and disclose Information subject to applicable laws in order of security functions, error correction and improvement of terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its terms.
to improve its products and services or to provide products functions, at such time as you interact with SONY’s or third In case of such termination, you must: (i) cease all use, and
or services to you. Such uses include, but are not limited parties’ servers, or otherwise. Such updates or modifications destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii) comply with the
to: (a) administering the functionalities of the SOFTWARE; may delete or change the nature of features or other requirements in the section below entitled “Your Account
(b) to improve, service, update or upgrade the SOFTWARE; aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, Responsibilities”.
(c) improving, developing and enhancing the current and functions you may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree
that such activities may occur at SONY’s sole discretion and
future products and services of SONY and other parties; (d) AMENDMENT
to provide you with information about the products and that SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE TERMS
services offered by SONY and other parties; (e) complying upon your complete installation or acceptance of such
OF THIS EULA AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE
with applicable laws or regulations; and (f) to the extent update or modifications. Any updates/modifications shall be
ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL NOTIFICATION
offered, providing you with location-based services of SONY deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE
TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING
and other parties, as indicated below. In addition, SONY for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you
NOTICE AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN
retains the right to use Information to protect itself and third consent to such update/ modification.
UPGRADES/ UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY
parties from illegal, criminal or harmful conduct. RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF NOTICE. If you do not agree to
000
Open Software Licenses Trademarks

On the basis of license contracts between Sony ˎˎXDCAM is a registered trademark of Sony
and the software copyright holders, this product Corporation.
uses open software. ˎˎXAVC and are registered trademarks of
To meet the requirements of the software Sony Corporation.
copyright holders, Sony is obligated to inform you ˎˎXQD is a registered trademark of Sony
of the content of these licenses. Corporation.
For the content of these licenses, see “License1. ˎˎAndroid and Google Chrome are trademarks or
pdf” in the “License” folder of the supplied CD- registered trademarks of Google, Inc.
ROM. ˎˎMicrosoft and Windows are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
ˎˎApple, Macintosh, Safari, and iPhone and their
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. registered in the US and other
countries.
ˎˎThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
ˎˎWi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance.
ˎˎThe N-Mark is a trademark or registered
trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United
States and in other countries.
ˎˎQR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
ˎˎAll system names and product names are
registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners. Trademarked items are not
indicated by ® or ™ symbols in this document.

Solid-State Memory Camcorder: PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Solid-State Memory Camcorder: PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Solid-State Memory Camcorder: PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4-587-873-19 (1)

Solid-State Memory Camcorder

PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF

© 2015 Sony Corporation

Name and Function of Parts

6. Camera adaptor connector

ˎˎ When connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to

[Note] 5. AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black

this switch up to this position again resets the 1. Built-in speaker

“Obtaining Location Information (GPS)” (page 59) 9. Network connector

4. External device connector 10. HDMI connector

4. AUDIO IN selector switch

7. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and

11. SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (BNC type)

3. Color temperature indicator

17. Timecode external lock indicator Off – – –

Supplied Lens and Viewfinder

10 13 14. Power/iris control cable

7. Viewfinder barrel OFF: Do not reverse the image.

Preparing a Power Supply

ˎˎBP-GL95B Lithium-ion Battery Pack

When a BP-GL95B Battery Pack is used, the

Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger

Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder Viewfinder front-to-back

1 [1] Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right Adjusting the Viewfinder Position 2

Reversing the Display (image/text

Detaching the Viewfinder Barrel Reversing the Display (image/text

4 Adjust the front-to-back position so that the

Adjusting the Screen

Using the Camcorder for the First Time

Setting the Time Zone 5 Press the SET button.

2 Select the time zone to use.

Setting the Date and Time of the

2 Turn the MENU knob to select the year, month,

Mounting and Adjusting the Lens

8 When the optimum position of the F.B.

This section describes how to attach the lens

5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamp.

Adjusting the flange focal length on manual

2 Place the supplied flange focal length

3 Open the iris.

4 Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring

5 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to

6 Point the camcorder at the chart by turning

7 Set the zoom ring to wide angle.

8 Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in

9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the chart stays in

10 Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.

Preparing the Audio Input System

[1] [1] [2]

4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable Equipment [1]

Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices

1 Attach the optional VCT-14/U14 Tripod

2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.

Connecting a Video Light

To attach a video light, fit the video light to

Handling SxS Memory Cards

to ask whether you want to restore it.